Micom 631 Technical Manual 3m1t13

MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection P631 P632 P633 P634

-301/302/303 -301/302/303 -301/302/303 -301/302/303

-401/402/403/404 -401/402/403/404 -401/402/403/404/405/406 -401/402/403/404

-301/602/603/605 -301/602/603/605 -301/602/603/605 -301/602/603/605

Technical Manual P63X/EN M/A43 Contains : Technical Manual for Software Version -601 Software Update -602 Software Update -603 Software Update -605

P63X/EN M/C11 P63x/EN AD/B22 P63x/EN AD/C32 P63x/EN AD/A43

MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Version -301 -401 -601

Technical Manual P63X/EN M/C11 (AFSV.12.06661 EN)

Warning When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltage will be present in certain parts of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage. Before working in the terminal strip area, the device must be isolated. Where stranded conductors are used, wire end ferrules must be employed. Proper and safe operation of this device depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate this device.

Qualified Personnel are individuals who o are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the device and of the system to which it is being connected; o are able to perform switching operations in accordance with safety engineering standards and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground, and label it; o are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering standards; o are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

Note The operating manual for this device gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. the appropriate AREVA technical sales office and request the necessary information. Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on the part of AREVA, including settlement of warranties, result solely from the applicable purchase contract, which is not affected by the contents of the operating manual.

Modifications After Going to Press

Contents

1

Application and Scope

1-1

2

Technical Data

2-1

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.9.1 2.9.2 2.9.3 2.10 2.11 2.12

Conformity General Data Tests Type Tests Routine Tests Climatic Conditions Inputs and Outputs Interfaces Information Output Settings Deviations Deviations of the Operate Values Deviations of the Timer Stages Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition Recording Functions Power supply Dimensioning of Current Transformers

2-1 2-1 2-2 2-2 2-4 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-9 2-10 2-11 2-12 2-13

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7

Contents (continued)

3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.8 3.9 3.9.1 3.9.2 3.9.3 3.10 3.11 3.11.1 3.11.2 3.11.3 3.11.4 3.11.5 3.11.6 3.11.7 3.11.8 3.11.9 3.11.10 3.11.11

8

Operation Modular Structure Operator-Machine Communication Configuration of the Measured Value s Serial Interfaces PC interface Communication interface Time synchronization via the IRIG-B interface Configuration and operating mode of the binary inputs Measured data input Direct current input Input for Connection of a Resistance Thermometer Configuration, operating mode and blocking of the output relays Measured data output BCD-coded measured data output Analog measured data output Output of ‘external’ measured data Configuration and operating mode of the LED indicators Main functions of the P63x Conditioning of the measured variables Selection of the residual current to be monitored Operating data measurement Configuring and enabling the protection functions Activation of dynamic parameters Multiple blocking Blocked / faulty Starting signals and starting logic Time tag and clock synchronization Resetting mechanisms Test mode

(function group LOC)

3-1 3-1 3-3 3-4

(function group PC) (function group COMM1) (function group IRIGB)

3-7 3-7 3-9 3-16

(function group INP)

3-17

(function group MEASI)

3-18 3-19 3-22

(function group OUTP)

3-23

(function group MEASO)

3-26 3-29 3-31 3-35 3-36

(function group LED) (function group MAIN)

3-38 3-38 3-42 3-45 3-57 3-59 3-59 3-61 3-62 3-66 3-67 3-68

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

Contents (continued)

3.12 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16 3.17 3.18 3.19 3.20 3.21

3.23

Parameter subset selection Self-monitoring Operating data recording Monitoring signal recording Overload data acquisition Overload recording Fault data acquisition Fault recording Differential protection Ground differential protection (Br: Restricted earth fault protection) Definite-time overcurrent protection Inverse-time overcurrent protection

3.24

Thermal overload protection

3.25 3.26 3.27 3.28

Time-voltage protection Over-/ underfrequency protection Limit value monitoring Limit value monitoring 1 to 3

3.29

Programmable logic

3.22

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

(function group PSS) (function group SFMON) (function group OP_RC) (function group MT_RC) (function group OL_DA) (function group OL_RC) (function group FT_DA) (function group FT_RC) (function group DIFF) (function groups REF_1 to REF_3) (function groups DTOC1 to DTOC3) (function groups IDMT1 to IDMT3) (function groups THRM1 and THRM2) (function group V<>) (function group f<>) (function group LIMIT) (function groups LIM_1 to LIM_3) (function group LOGIC)

3-69 3-71 3-73 3-74 3-75 3-78 3-81 3-89 3-95 3-116 3-123 3-133 3-149 3-158 3-161 3-166 3-169 3-172

9

Contents (continued)

10

4

Design

4-1

4.1 4.2

Designs Modules

4-2 4-8

5

Installation and connection

5-1

5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3

Unpacking and packing Checking the nominal data and the design type Location requirements Installation Protective grounding Connection Connecting the measuring and auxiliary circuits Connecting the IRIG-B interface Connecting the serial interfaces

5-1 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-14 5-15 5-15 5-18 5-18

6

Local control

6-1

6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.5.4 6.5.5 6.5.6 6.5.7 6.5.8 6.5.9

Display and keypad Changing between display levels Illumination of the display Control at the level Control at the menu tree level Navigation in the menu tree Switching between address mode and plain text mode Change-enabling function Changing parameters Setting a list parameter Memory readout Resetting -protected control actions Changing the

6-2 6-6 6-7 6-7 6-8 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-19 6-20 6-21

7

Settings

7-1

7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.1.3.1 7.1.3.2 7.1.3.3

Parameters Device identification Configuration parameters Function parameters Global General functions Parameter subsets

7-1 7-2 7-6 7-30 7-30 7-33 7-46

8

Information and control functions

8-1

8.1 8.1.1 8.1.1.1 8.1.1.2 8.1.1.3 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3

Operation Cyclic values Measured operating data Physical state signals Logic state signals Control and testing Operating data recording Events Event counters Measured fault data Fault recording

8-1 8-1 8-1 8-10 8-15 8-30 8-32 8-33 8-33 8-34 8-37

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

Contents (continued)

9 9.1 9.2

Commissioning Safety instructions Commissioning tests

9-1 9-1 9-3

10

Troubleshooting

10-1

11

Maintenance

11-1

12

Storage

12-1

13

Accessories and spare parts

13-1

14

Order information

14-1

14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4

Order information for P631 in case 40T Order information for P632 in case 40T Order information for P633 in case 40T or 84T Order information for P634 in case 84T

14-1 14-2 14-3 14-4

Appendix

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

11

12

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

1 Application and Scope

1

Application and Scope

The P63x differential protection devices are designed for the fast and selective shortcircuit protection of transformers, motors and generators and of other two-, three- or fourwinding arrangements. Four models are available. The P631 and P632 are designed for the protection of two-winding arrangements, the P633 and P634 for the protection of three- or four-winding arrangements, respectively. Main functions The P63x differential protection devices have the following main functions: ¨

Three-system differential protection for protected objects with up to four windings

¨

Amplitude and vector group matching

¨

Zero-sequence current filtering for each winding, may be deactivated

¨

Triple-slope tripping characteristic

¨

Inrush restraint with second harmonic, optionally with or without global effects; may be deactivated

¨

Overfluxing restraint with fifth harmonic component, may be deactivated

¨

Through-stabilization with saturation discriminator

¨

Ground differential protection (Am) ; (Br: Restricted earth fault protection) (This function is not available in the P631.)

¨

Definite-time overcurrent protection (three stages, phase-selective, separate measuring systems for phase currents, negative-sequence current and residual current)

¨

Inverse-time overcurrent protection (single-stage, phase-selective, separate measuring systems for phase currents, negative-sequence current and residual current)

¨

Thermal overload protection, choice of relative or absolute thermal replica

¨

Over-/ underfrequency protection

¨

Over-/ undervoltage protection (time-voltage protection)

¨

Limit value monitoring

¨

Programmable logic

The can select all main functions individually for inclusion in the device configuration or cancel them as desired. By means of a straightforward configuration procedure, the can adapt the device flexibly to the scope of protection required in each particular application. The unit’s powerful, freely configurable logic also makes it possible to accommodate special applications.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

1-1

1 Application and Scope (continued)

Global functions In addition to the features listed above, the P63x models provide comprehensive selfmonitoring as well as the following global functions:

1-2

¨

Parameter subset selection

¨

Operating data recording (time-tagged signal logging)

¨

Overload data acquisition

¨

Overload recording (time-tagged signal logging)

¨

Fault data acquisition

¨

Fault signal recording (time-tagged signal logging with fault value recording of the phase currents for each winding)

¨

Extended fault recording (fault recording of the neutral-point current for each winding as well as the voltage)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

1 Application and Scope (continued)

The following function groups are provided in the P63x differential protection devices. For a detailed description of these function groups, see Chapter 3. P631 P632 P633 P634 COMM1: DIFF: DTOC1: DTOC2: DTOC3: DVICE: f<>: FT_DA: FT_RC: IDMT1: IDMT2: IDMT3: INP: IRIGB: LED: LIM_1: LIM_2: LIM_3: LIMIT: LOC: LOGIC: MAIN: MEASI: MEASO: MT_RC: OL_DA: OL_RC: OP_RC: OUTP: PC: PSS: REF_1:

Communication link Differential protection Definite-time overcurrent protection 1 Definite-time overcurrent protection 2 Definite-time overcurrent protection 3 Device Over-/underfrequency protection Fault data acquisition Fault recording Inverse-time overcurrent protection 1 Inverse-time overcurrent protection 2 Inverse-time overcurrent protection 3 Binary inputs IRIG-B interface LED indicators Limit value monitoring 1 Limit value monitoring 2 Limit value monitoring 3 Limit value monitoring Local control Logic Main functions Measured data input Measured data output Monitoring signal recording Overload data acquisition Overload recording Operating data recording Binary outputs PC link Parameter subset selection Ground differential protection 1 (Am) ; (Br: Restricted earth fault protection 1) REF_2: Ground differential protection 2 REF_3: Ground differential protection 3 SFMON: Self-monitoring THRM1: Thermal overload protection 1 THRM2: Thermal overload protection 2 V<>: Time-voltage protection

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü -

ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü

ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü

ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü

ü ü -

ü ü ü ü

ü ü ü ü ü ü

ü ü ü ü ü ü

1-3

1 Application and Scope (continued)

Design The P63x is modular in design. The plug-in modules are housed in a robust aluminum case and electrically connected via one analog and one digital bus module. Inputs and outputs The P63x models have the following inputs/outputs: P631

P632

P633

P634

Phase current inputs

6

6

9

12

Inputs for residual or neutral current

-

2

3

3

Voltage inputs

-

1

1

1

Optical coupler inputs for binary signals (freely configurable function assignment)

4

4 to 10 (per order)

4 to 16 (per order)

4 to 10 (per order)

Additional optical coupler inputs (optional)

-

24

24

24

Output relays (freely configurable function assignment)

8 to 14 (per order)

8 to 22 (per order)

8 to 30 (per order)

8 to 22 (per order)

Anaput, 0 to 20 mA

-

1

1

1

PT 100 input

-

1

1

1

Analog output, 0 to 20 mA

-

2

2

2

The nominal voltage range of the optical coupler inputs is 24 to 250 V DC without internal switching. The auxiliary voltage input for the power supply is also a wide-range design. The nominal voltage ranges are 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC. A 24 V DC version is also available. All output relays are suitable for both signals and commands. The optional PT 100 input is lead-compensated, balanced and linearized for PT-100 resistance thermometers per IEC 751. The optional 0 to 20 mA input provides open-circuit and overload monitoring, zero suppression defined by a setting, plus the option of linearizing the input variable via 20 adjustable interpolation points. Two freely selected measured variables (cyclically updated measured operating data, stored overload data and stored measured fault data) can be output as a loadindependent direct current via the two optional 0 to 20 mA outputs. The characteristics are defined via 3 adjustable interpolation points allowing a minimum output current (4 mA, for example) for receiver-side open-circuit monitoring, knee-point definition for fine scaling and a limitation to lower nominal currents (10 mA, for example). Where sufficient output relays are available, a freely selected measured variable can be output in BCDcoded form via s. Interfaces Local control and display: 1-4

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

1 Application and Scope (continued)

¨

Local control with LCD display

¨

17 LED indicators, 13 of which allow freely configurable function assignment

¨

PC interface

¨

Communication interface for connection to a substation control system (optional)

Information exchange is via the local control , the PC interface, or the optional communication interface. The communication interface complies with the international IEC 60870-5-103 standard or alternatively, with IEC 870-5-101, MODBUS or DNP 3.0. Using the communication interface, the P63x can be integrated with a substation control system.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

1-5

1-6

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

2 Technical Data

2 2.1

Technical Data Conformity

Notice Applicable to P631/P632/P633/P634, version 301-401-601. Declaration of conformity (Per Article 10 of EC Directive 72/73/EC.) The products designated ‘P631, P632, P633 and P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices’ have been designed and manufactured in conformance with the European standards EN 60255-6 and EN 60010-1 and with the ‘EMC Directive’ and the ‘Low Voltage Directive’ issued by the Council of the European Community. 2.2

General Data

General device data Design Surface-mounted case suitable for wall installation or flush-mounted case for 19” cabinets and for control s. Installation Position Vertical ± 30°. Degree of Protection Per DIN VDE 0470 and EN 60529 or IEC 529. IP 52; IP 20 for rear connection space with flush-mounted case. Weight Case 40 T: approx. 7 kg Case 84 T: approx. 11 kg Dimensions and Connections See Dimensional Drawings (Chapter 4) and Terminal Connection Diagrams (Chapter 5). Terminals PC Interface (X6): DIN 41652 connector, type D-Sub, 9-pin. Communication Interface: Optical fibers (X7 and X8):

or Leads (X9 and X10): IRIG-B Interface (X11):

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

F-SMA optical fiber connector per IEC 874-2 or DIN 47258 or ® BFOC (ST ) optical fiber connector 2.5 per IEC 874-10 or DIN 47254-1 ® (ST is a ed trademark of AT&T Lightguide Cable Connectors) M2 threaded terminal ends for wire cross-sections up to 1.5 mm2. BNC plug

2-1

2 Technical Data (continued)

Current-Measuring Inputs: M5 threaded terminal ends, self-centering with wire protection for conductor cross sections ≤ 4 mm2. Other Inputs and Outputs: M3 threaded terminal ends, self-centering with wire protection for conductor cross sections from 0.2 to 2.5 mm2. Creepage Distances and Clearances § Per EN 61010-1 and IEC 664-1. Pollution degree 3, working voltage 250 V, overvoltage category III, impulse test voltage 5 kV. 2.3 2.3.1 Type tests

Tests Type Tests §

All tests per EN 60255-6 or IEC 255-6. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Interference Suppression § Per EN 55022 or IEC CISPR 22, Class A. 1 MHz Burst Disturbance Test § Per IEC 255 Part 22-1 or IEC 60255-22-1, Class III. Common-mode test voltage: 2.5 kV Differential test voltage: 1.0 kV Test duration: > 2 s, source impedance: 200 Ω Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge § Per EN 60255-22-2 or IEC 60255-22-2, severity level 3. discharge, single discharges: > 10 Holding time: > 5 s Test voltage: 6 kV Test generator: 50 to 100 MΩ, 150 pF / 330 Ω Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Energy § § Per EN 61000-4-3 and ENV 50204 , severity level 3. Antenna distance to tested device: > 1 m on all sides Test field strength, frequency band 80 to 1000 MHz: 10 V / m Test using AM: 1 kHz / 80 % Single test at 900 MHz AM 200 Hz / 100 % _______________________________________________________________ §

For this EN, ENV or IEC standard, the DIN EN, DINV ENV or DIN IEC edition, respectively, was used in the test.

2-2

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

2 Technical Data (continued)

Electrical Fast Transient or Burst Requirements § Per EN 61000-4-4 or IEC 60255-22-4, severity levels 3 and 4. Rise time of one pulse: 5 ns, Impulse duration (50% value): 50 ns, Amplitude: 2 kV / 1 kV or 4 kV / 2 kV Burst duration: 15 ms, Burst period: 300 ms Burst frequency: 5 kHz or 2.5 kHz Source impedance: 50 Ω Current/Voltage Surge Immunity Test § Per EN 61000-4-5 or IEC 61000-4-5, insulation class 4. Testing of circuits for power supply and unsymmetrical or symmetrical lines. Open-circuit voltage, front time / time to half-value: 1.2 / 50 µs Short-circuit current, front time / time to half-value: 8 / 20 µs Amplitude: 4 / 2 kV, Pulse frequency: > 5 / min Source impedance: 12 / 42 Ω Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Induced by Radio Frequency Fields § Per EN 61000-4-6 or IEC 61000-4-6, severity level 3. Test voltage: 10 V Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity § Per EN 61000-4-8 or IEC 61000-4-8, severity level 4. Frequency: 50 Hz Test field strength: 30 A / m Alternating Component (Ripple) in DC Auxiliary Energizing Quantity Per IEC 255-11. 12 % Insulation Voltage Test § Per EN 61010-1 or IEC 255-5. 2 kV AC, 60 s Direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test of the power supply inputs. The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test. Impulse Voltage Withstand Test Per IEC 255-5 Front time: 1.2 µs Time to half-value: 50 µs Peak value: 5 kV Source impedance: 500 Ω

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

2-3

2 Technical Data (continued)

Mechanical robustness Vibration Test § Per EN 60255-21-1 or IEC 255-21-1, test severity class 1. Frequency range in operation: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm, 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g Frequency range during transport: 10 to 150 Hz, 1 g Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test § Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 255-21-2, test severity class 1. Acceleration: 5 g / 15 g Pulse duration: 11 ms Seismic Test § Per EN 60255-21-3 , test procedure A, class 1 Frequency range: 5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 10 / 5 m/s2, 3 × 1 cycle 2.1.2

Routine Tests §

All tests per EN 60255-6 or IEC 255-6. and DIN 57435 part 303 Voltage Test Per IEC 255-5. 2.5 kV AC, 1 s. Direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test of the power supply inputs. The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test. Additional Thermal Test 100% controlled thermal endurance test, inputs loaded. 2.4

Climatic Conditions

Environment Temperatures Recommended temperature range: -5°C to +55°C or +23°F to +131°F. Limit temperature range: -25°C to +70°C or -13°F to +158°F. Humidity ≤ 75 % relative humidity (annual mean), 56 days at ≤ 95 % relative humidity and 40°C or 104°F, condensation not permissible. Solar Radiation Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be avoided.

2-4

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

2 Technical Data (continued)

2.5

Inputs and Outputs

Measurement inputs Current Nominal current: 1 or 5 A AC (adjustable). Nominal consumption per phase: < 0.1 VA at Inom Load rating: continuous: 4 Inom for 10 s: 30 Inom for 1 s: 100 Inom Nominal surge current: 250 Inom Voltage Nominal voltage Vnom: 50 to 130 V AC (adjustable) Nominal consumption per phase: < 0.3 VA at Vnom = 130 V AC Load rating: continuous 150 V AC Frequency Nominal frequency fnom: 50 Hz and 60 Hz (adjustable) Frequency protection function: Operating range: 40 to 70 Hz All other protection functions: Operating range: 0.95 to 1.05 fnom. Binary signal inputs Nominal voltage Vin,nom: 24 to 250 V DC. Operating range: 0.8 to 1.1 Vin,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % Vin,nom Power consumption per input: Vin = 19 to 110 V DC: 0.5 W ± 30 %, Vin > 110 V DC: 5 mA ± 30 %. Direct current input Input current: 0 to 26 mA Value range: 0.00 to 1.20 IDC,nom (IDC,nom = 20 mA) Maximum permissible continuous current: 50 mA Maximum permissible input voltage: 17 V Input load: 100 Ω Open-circuit monitoring: 0 to 10 mA (adjustable) Overload monitoring: > 24.8 mA Zero suppression: 0.000 to 0.200 IDC,nom (adjustable) Resistance thermometer Resistance thermometer: only PT 100 permitted, § Mapping curve per IEC 751 . Value range: -40.0°C to +215.0°C (-40°F to +419°F) 3-wire configuration: max. 20 Ω per conductor. Open and short-circuited input permitted Open-circuit monitoring: Θ > +215°C and Θ < -40°C (Θ > +419°F and Θ < -40°F)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

2-5

2 Technical Data (continued)

Output relays Rated voltage: 250 V DC, 250 V AC Continuous current: 5 A Short-duration current: 30 A for 0.5 s Making capacity: 1000 W (VA) at L/R = 40 ms Breaking capacity: 0.2 A at 220 V DC and L/R = 40 ms 4 A at 230 V AC and cos ϕ = 0.4 BCD-coded measured data output Maximum numerical value that can be displayed: 399 Analog measured data output Value range: 0 to 20 mA Permissible load: 0 to 500 Ω Maximum output voltage: 15 V 2.6

Interfaces

Local control Input or output: via seven keys and a LCD display of 4 x 20 characters State and fault signals: 17 LED indicators (4 permanently assigned, 13 freely configurable) PC interface Transmission rate: 300 to 115 200 baud (adjustable) Communication interface Settable communications protocols: Per IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, MODBUS and DNP 3.0 ( selection) Wire Leads Per RS 485 or RS 422, 2 kV isolation Distance to be bridged: Point-to-point connection: max. 1.200 m Multipoint connection: max. 100 m

2-6

Module

Transmission Rate

Communication Protocol

A 0336 426

300 to 19,200 baud (adjustable)

IEC 60870-5-103

A 9650 356

300 to 64,000 baud (adjustable)

adjustable

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

2 Technical Data (continued)

Plastic Fiber Connection Optical wavelength: typically 660 nm Optical output: min. –7.5 dBm Optical sensitivity: min. -20 dBm Optical input: max. -5 dBm 1) Distance to be bridged: max. 45 m Module

Transmission Rate

Communication Protocol

A 0336 428

300 to 38,400 baud (adjustable)

IEC 60870-5-103

A 9650 355

300 to 64,000 baud (adjustable)

adjustable

Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125 Optical wavelength: typically 820 nm Optical output: min. -19.8 dBm Optical sensitivity: min. -24 dBm Optical input: max. -10 dBm 1) Distance to be bridged: max. 400 m Module

Transmission Rate

Communication Protocol

A 9650 107

300 to 38,400 baud (adjustable)

IEC 60870-5-103

A 9650 354

300 to 64,000 baud (adjustable)

adjustable

Glass Fiber Connection G 62.5/125 Optical wavelength: typically 820 nm Optical output: min. -16 dBm Optical sensitivity: min. -24 dBm Optical input: max. -10 dBm 1) Distance to be bridged: max. 1400 m Module

Transmission Rate

Communication Protocol

A 9650 107

300 to 38,400 baud (adjustable)

IEC 60870-5-103

A 9650 354

300 to 64,000 baud (adjustable)

adjustable

IRIG-B interface B122 format Amplitude-modulated 1 kHz carrier signal BCD time-of-year code

____________________________________________________________________ 1)

Distance to be bridged given identical optical outputs and inputs at both ends, a system reserve of 3 dB, and typical fiber attenuation.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

2-7

2 Technical Data (continued)

2.7

Information Output

Counters, measured data, signals and indications: see Address List 2.8

Settings

Typical characteristic data Main Function Minimum output pulse for a trip command: 0.1 to 10 s (adjustable) Differential Protection Operating time at Id = 10·Idiff> with harmonic blocking disabled or at Id > Idiff>>>: min. 13 ms / typ. 15 ms Operating time at Id = 2.5·Idiff> with harmonic blocking disabled: min. 19 ms / typ. 21 ms Operating time at Id = 2.5·Idiff> with harmonic blocking enabled: min. 30 ms / typ. 33 ms Definite-Time and Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection Operate time including output relay (measured variable from 0 to 2-fold operate value): ≤ 40 ms, approx. 30 ms Release time (measured variable from 2-fold operate value to 0): ≤ 40 ms, approx. 30 ms Disengaging ratio for starting: approx. 0.95 2.9 2.9.1

Deviations Deviations of the Operate Values

Definitions ‘Reference Conditions’ Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion ≤ 2 %, ambient temperature 20 °C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom. ‘Deviation’ Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions. Differential protection Measuring System Deviation for Idiff ≥ 0.2 Iref: ± 5 % Inrush Stabilization Deviation: ± 10 % Ground differential protection Measuring System Deviation for Idiff ≥ 0.2 Iref: ± 5 %

2-8

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

2 Technical Data (continued)

Definite-time and inversetime overcurrent protection Deviation: ± 5 % Thermal overload protection Deviation: ± 5 % Frequency protection Deviation: ± 3 % Voltage protection Deviation: ± 3 % Direct current input Deviation: ± 1 % Resistance thermometer Deviation: ± 2 ° or ± 1 % Analog measured data output Deviation: ± 1 % Output residual ripple for max. load: ± 1 %

2.1.2

Deviations of the Timer Stages

Definitions ‘Reference Conditions’ Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion ≤ 2 %, ambient temperature 20 °C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom. ‘Deviation’ Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions. Definite-time stages Deviation: ±1 % + 20 to 80 ms Software version -603 and up: Deviation: ±1 % + 20 to 40 ms Inverse-time stages Deviation for I ≥ 2 Iref: ± 5 % +10 to 25 ms For IEC characteristic ‘extremely inverse‘: ± 7.5 % +10 to 20 ms Limit value monitoring stages Limit Value Monitoring is not a fast protection function and is intended to be used for signalling purposes. This function is processed about once a second only, hence it is not possible to make meaningful accuracy claims.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

2-9

2 Technical Data (continued)

2.9.3

Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition

Definitions ‘Reference Conditions’ Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion ≤ 2 %, ambient temperature 20 °C, and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom. ‘Deviation’ Deviation relative to the corresponding nominal value under reference conditions. Operating data measurement Measuring Input Currents Deviation: ± 1 % Measuring Input Voltage Deviation: ± 0.5 % Restraining and Differential Currents Formed Internally Deviation: ± 2 % Frequency Deviation: ± 10 mHz Direct Current of Measured Data Input and Output Deviation: ± 1 % Temperature Deviation: ± 2 °C Fault data acquisition Short-Circuit Current and Voltage Deviation: ± 3 % Restraining and Differential Currents Deviation: ± 5 % Internal clock With free running internal clock: Deviation: < 1min/month With external synchronization (with a synchronization interval ≤ 1 min): Deviation: < 10 ms

2-10

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

2 Technical Data (continued)

2.10 Recording Functions Organization of the Recording Memories Operating data memory Scope: Depth:

All operation-relevant signals from a total of 1024 different logic state signals (see Address List: "Operating Data Memory") The 100 most recent signals

Monitoring signal memory Scope: Depth:

All signals relevant for self-monitoring from a total of 1024 different logic state signals (see Address List: "Monitoring Signal Memory") Up to 30 signals

Overload memory Number: Scope: Depth:

The 8 most recent overload events All signals relevant for an overload event from a total of 1024 different logic state signals (see Address List: "Overload Memory") 200 entries per overload event

Number:

The 8 most recent faults

Scope:

Signals: All fault-relevant signals from a total of 1024 different logic state signals (see Address List: "Fault Memory")

Fault memory

Fault Values: Sampled values for all measured currents and voltages Depth:

Signals: 200 entries per fault Fault Values: max. number of periods per fault can be set by ; a total of 820 periods for all faults, i.e., 16.4 s (for fnom = 50 Hz) or 13.7 s (for fnom = 60 Hz)

Resolution of the Recorded Data Signals Time resolution:

1 ms

Time resolution:

20 sampled values per period

Dynamic range: Amplitude resolution:

33 Inom 2 mA r.m.s. for Inom = 1 A 10.1 mA r.m.s. for Inom = 5 A

Dynamic range: Amplitude resolution:

150 V AC 9.2 mV r.m.s

Fault values Phase currents

Voltages

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

2-11

2 Technical Data (continued)

2.11 Power supply Power supply Nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom: 24 V DC or 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC (per order) Operating range for direct voltage: 0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,nom Operating range for alternating voltage: 0.9 to 1.1 VA,nom Nominal consumption where VA = 220 V DC and maximum module configuration For case

40 T

84 T

Initial position approx.:

12.6 W

14.5 W

Active position approx.: 34.1 W

42.3 W

Start-up peak current: < 3 A for duration of 0.25 ms Stored energy time: ≥ 50 ms for interruption of VA ≥ 220 V DC

2-12

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

2 Technical Data (continued)

2.12 Dimensioning of Current Transformers The following equation is used for dimensioning a current transformer to the offset maximum primary current:

(

)

' Vsat = (R nom + R i ) ⋅ n ⋅ Inom ≥ R op + R i ⋅ k ⋅ I1, max

where: Vsat :

saturation voltage

' I1,max :

non-offset maximum primary current, converted to the secondary side

Inom : n: k: Rnom :

rated secondary current rated overcurrent factor overdimensioning factor rated burden

R op :

actual connected operating burden

Ri :

internal burden

The current transformer can then be dimensioned for the minimum required saturation voltage Vsat as follows:

(

)

' Vsat ≥ R op + R i ⋅ k ⋅ I1, max

Alternatively, the current transformer can also be dimensioned for the minimum required rated overcurrent factor n by specifying a rated power Pnom as follows: n≥

(R op + R i )

(R nom

+ Ri )

⋅k ⋅

' I1, max

Inom

=

(Pop + Pi )

(Pnom + Pi )

⋅k ⋅

' I1, max

Inom

where 2 Pnom = R nom ⋅ Inom 2 Pop = R op ⋅ Inom 2 Pi = R i ⋅ Inom

Theoretically, the current transformer could be dimensioned for lack of saturation by inserting in the place of the required overdimensioning factor k its maximum: k max ≈ 1 + ωT1 where: ω: T1:

system angular frequency system time constant

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

2-13

2 Technical Data (continued)

However, this is not necessary. Instead, it is sufficient to dimension the overdimensioning factor k such that the normal behavior of the analyzed protective function is guaranteed under the given conditions. The transformer differential protection device is equipped with a saturation discriminator. This function will generate a stabilizing blocking signal if a differential current occurs as a consequence of transformer saturation with an external fault (in contrast to an internal fault). For the ing maximum fault current in the case of an external fault, overdimensioning is, therefore, obviated. For the maximum fault current with an internal fault, static saturation up to a maximum saturation factor fS of 4 is permissible. This corresponds to an overdimensioning factor k of 0.25. The implementation of these requirements is comparitively unproblematic as transformer differential protection would require overdimensioning in accordance with the total fault clearing time, that is including the total circuit-breaker-open time for an external fault. The current transformers should comply with the fault tolerance values of class 5P.

2-14

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation

3 3.1

Operation Modular Structure

The P63x, a numerical protection device, is one of the units of instrumentation in the MiCOM P 30 product range. The devices that are part of this range are built from identical uniform hardware modules. Figure 3-1 shows the basic hardware structure of the P63x.

3-1

Basic hardware structure

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-1

3 Operation (continued)

The external analog and binary quantities – electrically isolated – are converted to the internal processing levels by the peripheral modules T, Y and X. Commands and signals generated by the device internally are transmitted to external destinations via floating s through the binary I/O modules X. The external auxiliary voltage is applied to the power supply module V which supplies the auxiliary voltages that are required internally. Analog data are always transferred from the transformer module T via the analog bus module B to the processor module P. The processor module contains all the elements necessary for the conversion of measured analog variables, including multiplexers and analog/digital converters. The analog data conditioned by the analog I/O module Y are transferred to the processor module P via the digital bus module. Binary signals are fed to the processor module by the binary I/O modules X via the digital bus module. The processor handles the processing of digitized measured variables and of binary signals, generates the protective trip and signals and transfers them to the binary I/O modules X via the digital bus module. Moreover, the entire device communication is handled by the processor module. As an option, communication module A can be mounted on the processor module to provide serial communication with substation control systems. The control and display elements of the integrated local control and the integrated PC interface are housed on control module L.

3-2

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3.2

Operator-Machine Communication

The following interfaces are available for the exchange of information between operator and device: ¨

Integrated local control

¨

PC interface

¨

Communication interface

All setting parameters and signals as well as all measured variables and control functions are arranged within the branches of the menu tree following a scheme that is uniform throughout the device family. The main branches are: ‘Parameters’ branch This branch carries all setting parameters, including the device identification data, the configuration parameters for adapting the device interfaces to the system, and the function parameters for adapting the device functions to the process. All values in this group are stored in non-volatile memory, which means that the values will be preserved even if the power supply fails. ‘Operation’ branch This branch carries all information relevant for operation such as measured operating data and binary signal states. This information is updated periodically and consequently is not stored. In addition, various control parameters are grouped here, for example those for resetting counters, memories and displays. ‘Events’ branch The third branch is reserved for the recording of events. Therefore all information contained in this group is stored. In particular, the start/end signals during a fault, the measured fault data, and the sampled fault records are stored here and can be read out at a later time.

Settings and signals are displayed either in plain text or as addresses, in accordance with the ’s choice. The appendix documents the settings and signals of the P63x in the form of an ‘address list’. This address list is complete and thus contains all settings, signals and measured variables used with the P63x. The configuration of the local control moreover allows the installation of Measured Value ‘s’ on the LCD display. Different s are automatically displayed for certain operation conditions of the system. Priority increases from normal operation to operation under overload conditions and finally to operation following a short-circuit in the system. The P63x thus provides the measured data relevant for the prevailing conditions.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-3

3 Operation (continued)

3.3

Configuration of the Measured Value s (Function Group LOC)

The P63x offers Measured Value s which display the measured values relevant at a given time. During normal power system operation, the Operation is displayed. As an event occurs, the display switches to the appropriate Event - provided that measured values have been selected for the Event s. In the event of overload event, the display will automatically switch to the Operation at the end of the event. In the event of a fault, the Fault remains active until the LED indicators or the fault memories are reset. Operation The Operation is displayed after the set return time has elapsed, provided that at least one measured value has been configured. From the measured operating data, values may be selected via an 'm out of n' parameter for display on the Operation . If more measured values are selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of values at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - t i m e f o r P a n e l s or when the appropriate key on the local control is pressed.

3-2

3-4

Operation

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

Fault The Fault is displayed in place of another data when there is a fault, provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The Fault remains on display until the LED indicators or the fault memories are reset. The can select the measured fault values that will be displayed on the Fault by setting an 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of values at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - t i m e f o r P a n e l s or when the appropriate key on the local control is pressed.

3-3

Fault

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-5

3 Operation (continued)

Overload The Overload is automatically displayed in place of another data when there is an overload, provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The Overload remains on display until the overload ends, unless a fault occurs. In this case the display switches to the Fault . The can select the measured values that will be displayed on the Overload by setting an 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of values at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - t i m e f o r P a n e l s or when the appropriate key on the local control is pressed.

3-4

3-6

Overload

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3.4

Serial Interfaces

The P63x has a PC interface as standard component. The communication interface is optional. Setting and readout is possible through both P63x interfaces. If tests are run on the P63x, the is advised to activate the test mode so that the PC or the control system will evaluate all incoming signals accordingly (see General Functions). 3.4.1

PC Interface (Function Group PC)

Communication between the device P63x and a PC is through the PC interface. In order for data transfer between the P63x and the PC to function, several settings must be made in the P63x. The S&R-103 Operating Program is available as an accessory for P63x control (see the Chapter entitled ‘Accessories’).

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-7

3 Operation (continued)

3-5

3-8

PC interface settings

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3.4.2

Communication Interface (Function Group COMM1)

Communication between the P63x and the control station’s computer is through the communication interface. Depending on the design version of the communication module A (see Technical Data), several interface protocols are available. The protocol as per IEC 60870-5-103 is ed for all versions. The following -selected interface protocols are available for use with the P63x: ¨

IEC 60870-5-103, “Transmission protocols - Companion standard for the informative interface of protection equipment,’ first edition, 1997-12 (corresponds to VDEW / ZVEI Recommendation, “Protection communication companion standard 1, compatibility level 2,” February 1995 edition) with additions covering control and monitoring

¨

IEC 870-5-101, “Telecontrol equipment and systems - Part 5: Transmission protocols - Section 101 Companion standard for basic telecontrol tasks,” first edition 1995-11

¨

ILS-C, internal protocol of AREVA

¨

MODBUS

¨

DNP 3.0

In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in the P63x. The communication interface can be blocked through a binary signal input. In addition, a signal or measured-data block can also be imposed through a binary signal input.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-9

3 Operation (continued)

3-6

3-10

Selecting the interface protocol

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-7

Settings for the IEC 60870-5-103 interface protocol

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-11

3 Operation (continued)

3-8

3-12

Settings for the IEC 870-5-101 interface protocol

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-9

Settings for the ILS_C interface protocol

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-13

3 Operation (continued)

3-10

3-14

Settings for the MODBUS protocol

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-11

Settings for the DNP 3.0 protocol

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-15

3 Operation (continued)

3.5 Time Synchronization via the IRIG-B Interface (Function Group IRIGB)

If, for example, a GPS receiver with IRIG-B connection is available, the internal clock of the P63x can be synchronized to run on GPS time using the optional IRIG-B interface. It should be noted that the IRIG-B signal holds information on the day only (day of the current year). Using this information and the year set at the P63x, the P63x calculates the current date (DD.MM.YY). Disabling or enabling the IRIG-B interface The IRIG-B interface can be disabled or enabled from the local control . Ready to synchronize If the IRIG-B interface is enabled and receiving a signal, the P63x checks the received signal for plausibility. Implausible signals are rejected by the P63x. If the P63x does not receive a correct signal in the long run, synchronization will not be ready any longer.

3-12

3-16

IRIG-B-interface

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3.6

Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (Function Group INP)

The P63x has optical coupler inputs for the processing of binary signals from the substation. The functions that will be activated by triggering these binary signal inputs are defined by the configuration of the binary signal inputs. The trigger signal must persist for at least 30 ms in order to be recognized by the P63x. Configuration of the binary inputs To each binary signal input, a function can be assigned by configuration. The same function can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thereby, a function can be activated from several control points with differing signal voltages. In this manual, we assume that the required functions (marked “EXT” in the address description) have been assigned to binary signal inputs by configuration. Operating mode of the binary inputs For each binary signal input, the operating mode can be defined by the . The can specify whether the presence (active “high” mode) or the absence (active “low” mode) of a voltage should be interpreted as the logic “1” signal. The display of the state of a binary signal input – “low” or “high” – is independent of the setting for the operating mode of the signal input.

3-13

Configuration and operating mode of the binary signal inputs

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-17

3 Operation (continued)

3.7

Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI)

The P63x has a measured data input function involving two inputs. Direct current is fed to the P63x through one of the inputs. The other input is designed for connection of a resistance thermometer. The input current IDC is displayed as a measured operating value. The current that is conditioned for monitoring purposes (IDClin) is also displayed as a measured operating value. In addition, it is monitored by the limit value monitoring function to detect whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds (see ‘Limit Value Monitoring’). The measured temperature is also displayed as a measured operating value and monitored by the limit value monitoring function to detect whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds (see ‘Limit Value Monitoring’). Disabling and enabling measured data input The measured data input function can be disabled or enabled from the local control .

3-14

3-18

Disabling and enabling the measured data input function

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3.7.1

Direct Current Input

External measuring transducers normally supply an output current of 0 to 20 mA that is directly proportional to the physical quantity being measured – the temperature, for example. If the output current of the measuring transducer is directly proportional to the measured quantity only in certain ranges, linearization can be arranged - provided that the measured data input is set accordingly. Furthermore, it may be necessary for certain applications to limit the range being monitored or to monitor certain parts of the range that have a higher or lower sensitivity. By setting the value pair M E A S I : I D C x and M E A S I : I D C l i n x , the specifies which input current (IDC) will correspond to the current that is monitored by the limit value monitoring function (IDC,lin). The points determined in this way, which are called ‘interpolation points’, are connected by straight lines in an IDC-IDClin diagram. In order to implement a simple characteristic, it is sufficient to specify two interpolation points, which are also used as limiting values (Figure 3-15). Up to 20 interpolation points are available for implementing a complex characteristic. When setting the characteristic the must that only a monotone ascending curve is allowed. If the setting differs, the signal S F M O N : I n v a l i d s c a l i n g I D C will be generated.

IDClin / IDC,nom 1.2 1.1

IDClin20

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1

IDClin1

0 0

0.1

0.2

0.25

0.3

0.35

0.4

0.45

IDC1

0.5

0.6

IDC / IDC,nom

IDC20 D5Z52KDA

3-15

Example of the conversion of 4-10 mA input current to 0-20 mA monitored current, IDClin

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-19

3 Operation (continued)

IDClin / IDC,nom 0.8

Interpolation points IDClin20

0.7

0.6

IDClin4

0.5

0.4

IDClin3

0.3

IDClin2

0.2

IDClin1

0.1

0 0

0.1

0.2

IDC1

0.3

0.4

0.5

IDC2

0.6

IDC3

0.7

0.8

0.9

IDC4

1

IDC20

1.1

1.2

IDC / IDC,nom

Enable IDC p.u. D5Z52KEA

3-16

Example of a characteristic having five interpolation points (characteristic with zero suppression setting of 0.1 IDC,nom is shown as a broken line)

Zero suppression Zero suppression is defined by setting M E A S I : E n a b l e I D C p . u . If the direct current does not exceed the set threshold, the per-unit input current IDC p.u. and the current IDClin will be displayed as having a value of ‘0’. Open-circuit and overload monitoring The device is equipped with an open-circuit monitoring function. If current IDC falls below the set threshold, the signal M E A S I : O p e n c i r c . 2 0 m A i n p . is issued. The input current is monitored in order to protect the 20 mA input against overloading. If it exceeds the fixed threshold of 24.8 mA, the signal M E A S I : O v e r l o a d 2 0 m A i n p u t is issued.

3-20

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-17

Analog direct current input

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-21

3 Operation (continued)

Beyond the linearization described above, the has the option of scaling the linearized values. Thereby negative values, for example, can be displayed as well and are available for further processing by protection functions.

3-18

Scaling of the linearized measured value

3.7.2

Input for Connection of a Resistance Thermometer

This input is designed for connection of a PT 100 resistance thermometer. The mapping curve R = f(T) of PT 100 resistance thermometers is defined in DIN IEC 751. If the PT 100 is connected using the 3-wire method, then no further calibration is required. Open-circuit monitoring If there is an open measuring circuit due to wire breakage, the signal M E A S I : P T 1 0 0 f a u l t y is generated.

3-19

3-22

Temperature measurement using resistance thermometer

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3.8

Configuration, Operating Mode and Blocking of the Output Relays (Function Group OUTP)

The P63x has output relays for the output of binary signals. The binary signals to be issued are defined by configuration. Configuration of the output relays One binary signal can be assigned to each output relay. The same binary signal can be assigned to several output relays by configuration. Operating mode of the output relays The can set an operating mode for each output relay. The operating mode determines whether the output relay will operate in an energize-on-signal (ES) mode or normally-energized (NE) mode and whether it will operate in latching mode. Depending on the I/O module under consideration, the output relays have either make s, changeover s or both (see the Terminal Connection Diagrams in the Appendix). For relays with make s, the energize-on-signal (ES) mode corresponds to normally-open operation. The normally-energized (NE) mode means that the polarity of the driving signal is inverted, such that a logic "0" maintains the relay normally-closed. For relays with changeover s, these more common descriptions are not applicable. Latching is disabled manually from the local control or through an appropriately configured binary signal input either at the onset of a new fault or at the onset of a new system disturbance, depending on the operating mode selected. Blocking the output relays The P63x offers the option of blocking all output relays from the local control or by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input. The output relays are likewise blocked if the device is disabled via appropriately configured binary inputs. In these cases, the relays are treated in keeping with their set operating mode. Relays in normally-energized (NE) mode are triggered, those in energize-on-signal (ES) mode are not. This does not apply to relays with the signals SF MO N: W ar ning ( r elay) or MAIN: Bloc k ed/f aulty assigned to them. Thereby the blocking is signalled correctly. (The signal MAIN: Bloc k ed/f aulty is coupled to the activation of the LED labeled 'OUT OF SERVICE'.) If, on the other hand, the self-monitoring function detects a serious hardware fault (see Chapter 10 for signals leading to protection blocking), all output relays are reset irrespective of the set operating mode or signal assignment.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-23

3 Operation (continued)

3-20

3-24

Configuration, operating mode and blocking of the output relays

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

Testing the output relays For testing purposes, the can select an output relay and trigger it via the local control . Triggering persists while the set hold time is running.

3-21

Testing the output relays

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-25

3 Operation (continued)

3.9

Measured Data Output (Function Group MEASO)

Output of the measured fault or ground fault data provided by the P63x can be in BCD-coded form through output relays or in analog form as direct current. Output as direct current can only occur if the device is equipped with analog I/O module Y. BCDcoded output, however, is possible, regardless of whether the device is equipped with analog I/O module Y or not. Disabling and enabling the measured data output function The measured data output function can be disabled or enabled from the local control .

3-22

3-26

Disabling and enabling the measured data output function

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

Enabling measured data output Measured data output can be enabled through a binary signal input, provided that the function M E A S O : O u t p . e n a b l e d E X T has been configured. If the function M E A S O : O u t p . e n a b l e d E X T has not been configured for a binary signal input, then measured data output is always enabled.

3-23

Enabling measured data output

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-27

3 Operation (continued)

Resetting the measured data output function BCD-coded or analog output of measured data is terminated while the hold time elapses if one of the following conditions is met:

3-24

3-28

¨

The measured data output function is reset from the local control or through an appropriately configured binary signal input.

¨

There is a general reset.

¨

The LED indicators have been reset.

Resetting the measured data output function

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3.9.1

BCD-Coded Measured Data Output

The can select a measured value for output in BCD-coded form through output relays. The selected measured value is output in BCD-coded form for the duration of the set hold time (M E A S O : H o l d t i m e o u t p u t B C D . If the selected variable was not measured, then there is no output of a measured value. Output of measured event values If the measured event value is updated while the hold time is elapsing, the measured value output memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This means that the updated value is immediately output. Output of measured operating values The measured operating value is output for the duration of the hold time. After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the hold time is re-started. If the hold time has been set to ‘blocked’, the measured operating value that has been output will be stored until the measured data output function is reset. Scaling The resolution for measured data output is defined by setting the scaling factor. The scaling factor should be selected so that the value 399 is not exceeded by the maximum measured value to be output. If this should occur, however, or if the measured value is outside the acceptable measuring range, then the value for ‘Overflow’ (all relays triggered) is transmitted.

Mx,scal =

Mx,max scaling factor

where: Mx,scal : scaled measured value M x,max : maximum transmitted value for the selected measured value

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-29

3 Operation (continued)

3-25

3-30

BCD-coded measured data output

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3.9.2

Analog Measured Data Output

Analog output of measured data is two-channel. The can select two of the measured values available in the P63x for output in the form of load-independent direct current. Three interpolation points per channel can be defined for specific adjustments such as adjustment to the scaling of a measuring instrument. The direct current that is output is displayed as a measured operating value. The selected measured value is output as direct current for the duration of the set hold time (M E A S O : H o l d t i m e o u t p u t A - x ) . If the selected variable was not measured, then there is no output of a measured value. Output of measured event values

If the measured event value is updated while the hold time is elapsing, the measured value output memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This means that the updated value is immediately output. Output of measured operating values

The measured operating value is output for the duration of the hold time. After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the hold time is re-started. If the hold time has been set to ‘blocked’, the measured operating value that has been output will be stored until the measured data output function is reset. Configuration of output relays assigned to the output channels

The must keep in mind that direct current output only occurs when the output relays assigned to the output channels are configured for M E A S O : V a l u e A - x o u t p u t , since otherwise the output channels remain short-circuited (see terminal connection diagrams).

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-31

3 Operation (continued)

Scaling

The minimum and maximum values to be transmitted for the selected measured value and one additional value for the knee point must be scaled to the range limit value of the measured value. By setting the following parameters the can obtain an analog output characteristic like the one shown in Figure 3-26. ¨

MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-x

¨

MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-x

¨

MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-x

¨

MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-x

¨

MEASO: AnOut knee point A-x

¨

MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-x

The scaled values that need to be set can be calculated using the following formulas: Formulas

Example

Key to the Formulas:

Let voltage V12 be selected as the measured value to be transmitted. Let the measuring range be 0 to 1.5 Vnom.

Mx,RL :

Range limit value of selected measured value

Mx,min :

Minimum value to be transmitted for selected measured value

Mx,knee :

Knee point value to be transmitted for selected measured value

M x,max :

When Vnom = 100 V, the range limit value in the assumed example is 150 V. Range to be transmitted: 0.02 to 1 Vnom = 2 to 100 V Knee point: 0.1 Vnom = 10 V

Maximum value to be transmitted for selected measured value

Mx,scal,min :

Scaled minimum value

M x,scal,knee :

Scaled knee point value

M x,scal,max :

Scaled maximum value

M x,scal,min =

M x,scal,knee = M x,scal,max =

3-32

M x,min M x,RL

M x,knee M x,RL M x,max M x,RL

M x,scal,min =

2V = 0.013 150 V

M x,scal,knee =

10 V = 0.067 150 V

M x,scal,max =

100 V = 0.67 150 V

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

By setting M E A S O : A n O u t m i n . v a l u e A - x , the can specify the output current that will be output when values are smaller than or equal to the set minimum measured value to be transmitted. The setting at M E A S O : A n O u t m a x . v a l . A x defines the output current that is output for the maximum measured value to be transmitted. By defining the knee point, the can obtain two characteristic curve sections with different slopes. When making this setting the must keep in mind that only a monotone ascending or a monotone descending curve is allowed. If the wrong setting is entered, the signal S F M O N : I n v a l i d s c a l i n g A - x will be generated. Note:

After this setting, the new characteristics will be checked and implemented after enabling at MAIN: Protec tion enabled.

Ia / mA 20

Max. output value 18 Knee point 16 output value 14 12 10 8 6

Min. output 4 value 2 0 0

0.02

0.1

0.013

0.067

1

1.2

0.667

1.3

1.4

1.5 Vnom

Mx,scal D5Z52KFA

3-26

Example of a characteristic curve for analog output of measured data

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-33

3 Operation (continued)

3-27

3-34

Analog measured data output

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3.9.3

Output of ‘External’ Measured Data

Measured data from external devices, which must be scaled for 0-100%, can be written to the following parameters of the P63x by way of the communications interface: ¨

MEASO: Output value 1

¨

MEASO: Output value 2

¨

MEASO: Output value 3

These "external" measured values are output by the P63x either in the form of BCDcoded data or as load-independent direct current, provided that the BCD-coded measured data output function or the channels of the analog measured data output function are configured accordingly.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-35

3 Operation (continued)

3.10 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators (Function Group LED) The P63x has 17 LED indicators for the indication of binary signals. Five of the LED indicators are permanently assigned to functions. The other LED indicators are freely configurable. (However, LED indicator H4 has a default setting of G en. tr ip s ignal and is labeled "Trip".) Configuration of the LED indicators To each of the freely configurable LED indicators, a binary signal can be assigned. The same binary signal can be assigned to several LED indicators by configuration. Operating mode of the LED indicators The can set an operating mode for each LED indicator – with the exception of the first one - that determines whether the LED indicator operates in an energize-on-signal arrangement (‘open-circuit principle’) or normally-energized arrangement (‘closed-circuit principle’) and whether it operates in latching mode. Latching is disabled either manually from the local control or by an appropriately configured binary signal input (see Main Functions of the P63x), at the onset of a new fault or of a new system disturbance, depending on the operating mode selected.

3-36

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-28

Configuration and operating mode of the LED indicators

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-37

3 Operation (continued)

3.11 Main Functions of the P63x (Function Group MAIN) 3.11.1 Conditioning of the Measured Variables The secondary phase currents of the system transformers are fed to the P63x. Furthermore, there is the option of connecting a measuring voltage. The measured variables are – electrically isolated – converted to normalized electronics levels. The analog quantities are digitized and are thus available for further processing. Depending on the design version, the P63x has the following measuring inputs: P631: ¨

Current inputs (three phases) for the processing of measured variables for two ends of the transformer

P632: ¨

Current inputs (three phases) for the processing of measured variables for two ends of the transformer

¨

Two current inputs for the measurement of the residual currents (see Figure 3-30)

¨

One voltage input

P633 and P634:

3-38

¨

Current inputs (three phases) for the processing of measured variables for three (P633) or four (P634) ends of the transformer

¨

Current inputs for up to three neutral-point-to-ground connections (see Figure 3-29) or, alternatively, for looping into the ground connections of the phase current transformers or for connection to a Holmgreen group

¨

One voltage input

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-29

Connection of the measured variables to the P63x, connection of the fourth current transformer set to the transformers of the neutral-point-to-ground connections

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-39

3 Operation (continued)

3-30 a

3-40

Connection of the measured variables to the P63x, looping of the fourth current transformer set into the ground connections of the phase current transformers, Part 1 of 2

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-30 b

Connection of the measured variables to the P63x, looping of the fourth current transformer set into the ground connections of the phase current transformers, Part 2 of 2

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-41

3 Operation (continued)

3.11.2 Selection of the Residual Current to be Monitored For protection functions of the P632, P633 and P634 monitoring the residual current, the can select whether the device is to use the current calculated from the three phase currents or the current measured at the fourth current transformer. Moreover, the P633 and P634 offer the option of forming the sum of the phase currents or of the residual currents for two ends of the transformer.

3-42

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-31

Evaluation of residual current

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-43

3 Operation (continued)

3-32

3-44

Summation of the phase currents or of the residual currents P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3.11.3 Operating Data Measurement The P63x has an operating data measurement function for the display of currents and voltages measured by the P63x during normal power system operation; quantities derived from these measured values are also displayed. For the display of measured values, set lower thresholds need to be exceeded. If these lower thresholds are not exceeded, the value not measured is displayed. The following measured variables are displayed: ¨

Phase currents of all three phases of all four ends of the transformer

¨

Maximum phase current of each end of the transformer

¨

Minimum phase current of each end of the transformer

¨

Delayed and stored maximum phase current of each end of the transformer

¨

Current IN calculated by the P63x from the sum of the phase currents for each end of the transformer

¨

Current IY measured by the P63x at transformer -Tx4 (x: 1, 2 or 3)

¨

Phase currents of all three phases of the virtual end of the transformer. The virtual end is formed by adding the corresponding currents of two transformer ends selected by the at MAIN: Cur r ent s um m ation.

¨

Maximum phase current of the virtual end of the transformer

¨

Minimum phase current of the virtual end of the transformer

¨

Current IN of the virtual end of the transformer

¨

Voltage

¨

Frequency

¨

Angle between the phase currents for a given end of the transformer

¨

Angle between the currents of the same phase between two ends of the transformer

¨

Angle between calculated IN and the current measured at transformer -Tx4 (x: 1, 2 or 3)

The measured data are updated at 1 s intervals. Updating is interrupted if a general starting state occurs or if the self-monitoring function detects a hardware fault.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-45

3 Operation (continued)

Measured current values The measured values for the current are displayed both as quantities referred to the nominal current of the P63x and as primary quantities. To allow a display in primary values, the primary nominal current of the transformers connected to the P63x needs to be set.

3-46

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-33

Measured operating data for the phase currents, ends a to d

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-47

3 Operation (continued)

Delayed maximum phase current display

Stored maximum phase current display

The P63x offers the option of delayed display of the maximum value of the three phase currents. The delayed maximum phase current display is an exponential function of the maximum phase current IP,max (see upper curve in Figure 3-34). At M A I N : S e t t l . t . I P , m a x , d e l the can set the time after which the delayed maximum phase current display will have reached 95 % of maximum phase current IP,max. The stored maximum phase current follows the delayed maximum phase current. If the value of the delayed maximum phase current is declining, then the highest value of the delayed maximum phase current remains stored. The display remains constant until the actual delayed maximum phase current exceeds the value of the stored maximum phase current (see middle curve in Figure 3-34). At M A I N : R e s e t I P , m a x , s t o r e d the can set the stored maximum phase current to the actual value of the delayed maximum phase current (see lower curve in Figure 3-34).

3-48

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-34

Operation of delayed and stored maximum phase current display

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-49

3 Operation (continued)

3-35

3-50

Measured operating data for the residual currents, ends a to c

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-36

Measured operating data for the residual currents, end d (P634 only)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-51

3 Operation (continued)

3-37

3-52

Measured operating data for the phase currents and the residual current for the virtual end (formed by current summation, P633 and P634 only, see Figure 3-32)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

Measured voltage value The measured voltage value is displayed both as quantity referred to the nominal voltage of the P63x and as primary quantity. To allow a display in primary values, the primary nominal voltage of the transformer connected to the P63x needs to be set.

3-38

Measured voltage value

Frequency The P63x determines the frequency from the voltage. The voltage needs to exceed a minimum threshold of 0.65 Vnom in order for the frequency to be determined.

3-39

Frequency measurement

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-53

3 Operation (continued)

Angle determination The P63x determines the angle between the following currents if the associated currents exceed the lower threshold of 0.033 Inom:

3-40

3-54

¨

Angle between the phase currents for each end of the transformer

¨

Angle between the currents of the same phase between two ends of the transformer

¨

Angle between the calculated residual current and the current measured at the transformer -Tx4 (x: 1, 2 or 3) for each end of the transformer

Determination of the angle between the phase currents

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-41

Determination of the angle between the phase currents of the transformer ends

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-55

3 Operation (continued)

3-42

3-56

Determination of the angle between the calculated residual current and the current measured at transformer -Tx4

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3.11.4 Configuring and Enabling the Protection Functions By means of a straight-forward configuration procedure, the can adapt the unit flexibly to the range of functions required in each particular high voltage substation. By including the relevant protection functions in the device configuration and canceling all others, the creates an individual device appropriate to the application. Parameters, signals and measured values of canceled protection functions are not displayed on the local control . Functions of general applicability such as operating data recording (OP_RC) or main functions (MAIN) cannot be canceled. Canceling a protection function The following conditions have to be met before a protection function can be canceled: ¨

The protection function must be disabled.

¨

None of the functions of the protection function to be canceled may be assigned to a binary input.

¨

None of the signals of the protection function may be assigned to a binary output or to an LED indicator.

If the above conditions are met, proceed through the Configuration Parameters branch of the menu tree to access the setting parameter relevant for the device function to be canceled. If you wish to cancel the LIMIT function group, for example, access the setting parameter L I M I T : F u n c t i o n g r o u p L I M I T and set its value to Without. Should you wish to re-include the function group in the device configuration, set the value to With. The assignment of a parameter, a signal or a measured value to a protection function is defined by a function group descriptor such as ‘LIMIT’. In the description of the protection functions later in this manual, the protection function being described is presumed to be included in the configuration. Disabling and enabling the protection function Protection functions that are included in the configuration may still be disabled via a function parameter or via binary signal inputs. Protection can only be disabled or enabled through binary signal inputs if the M A I N : D i s a b l e p r o t e c t . E X T and M A I N : E n a b l e p r o t e c t . E X T functions are both configured. When only one or neither of the two functions is configured, this is interpreted as ‘Protection externally enabled’. If the triggering signals of the binary signal inputs are implausible, as for example when they both have a logic value of ‘1,’ then the last plausible state remains stored in memory.

Note:

If the protection device is disabled via the binary signal input configured to MAIN: Dis able pr otec t. EX T there will be no MAIN: Bloc k ed/f aulty signal.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-57

3 Operation (continued)

3-43

3-58

Enabling or disabling protection

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3.11.5 Activation of Dynamic Parameters For several of the protection functions, it is possible to switch the duration of the set hold time to other settings - the "dynamic parameters" – through an appropriately configured binary signal input. If the hold time is set to 0 s, the switching is effective while the binary signal input is being triggered.

3-44

Activation of dynamic parameters

3.11.6 Multiple Blocking Four multiple blockings may be defined via 'm out of n' parameters. The items available for selection are found in the Address List. Thereby the functions defined by the selection may be blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-59

3 Operation (continued)

3-45

3-60

Multiple blocking

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3.11.7 Blocked / Faulty If the protective functions are blocked, this condition is signaled by a steady light from yellow LED indicator H 2 on the local control and also by a signal through the output relay configured for MAIN: Bloc k ed/f aulty. In addition, the can select the functions that will produce the MAIN: Bloc k ed/f aulty signal by setting an ‘m out of n’ parameter.

3-46

‘Blocked/faulty’ signal

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-61

3 Operation (continued)

3.11.8 Starting Signals and Starting Logic Starting signals The trip signals of differential protection and ground differential protection (Br: Restricted earth fault protection) plus the general startings of the definite-time and inverse-time overcurrent protection are combined into one common general starting.

3-47

3-62

General starting of the P63x

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

Counter of starting signals The starting signals are counted. The counter can be reset individually.

3-48

Counter of general starting signals

Trip command The P63x has four trip commands. The functions to effect a trip can be selected by setting an 'm out of n' parameter independently for each of the four trip commands. The minimum trip command time may be set. The trip signals are present only as long as the conditions for the signal are satisfied. Manual trip command A manual trip command may be issued via the local control or a signal input configured accordingly. It is not executed, however, unless the manual trip is included in the selection of possible functions to effect a trip. Latching of the trip commands For each of the four trip commands, the can specify by way of the appropriate setting whether it will operate in latching mode. If the latching mode is selected, the trip command persists until it is reset from the local control or via an appropriately configured binary signal. Blocking of the trip commands The trip commands may be blocked via the integrated local control or via an appropriately configured binary signal input. The blocking is effective for all four trip commands. The trip signals are not affected by the blocking. If the trip commands are blocked this is indicated by a steady light at yellow LED indicator H 2 on the local control and by an output relay configured to ‘Blocked/faulty’. (To identify H2, see the dimensional drawings in the Chapter entitled ‘Design’.)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-63

3 Operation (continued)

3-49

3-64

Formation of the trip commands

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

Counter of trip commands The trip commands are counted. The counters can be reset either individually or as a group.

3-50

Counter of trip commands

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-65

3 Operation (continued)

3.11.9 Time Tag and Clock Synchronization The data stored in the operating data memory, the monitoring signal memory and the event memories are date-and time-tagged. For correct tagging, date and time need to be set at the P63x. Via an appropriately configured binary signal input, the time of different devices may be synchronized by means of a pulse. The P63x evaluates the rising edge. This is used to set the clock to the next full minute, rounding either up or down. If several start/end signals occur (bouncing of a relay ), the last edge is evaluated.

3-51

3-66

Date and time setting and clock synchronization

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3.11.10 Resetting Mechanisms Stored data such as event logs, fault values etc, can be cleared in a number of ways. The following mechanisms are available: ¨

Automatic resetting of the event signals indicated by LED indicators (provided that the LED operating mode has been set accordingly) and of the display of measured event data on the local control whenever a new event occurs.

¨

Resetting of LED indicators and measured event data on the local control by pressing the reset key (‘Clear’ key ‘C’) located on the

¨

Selective resetting of a particular memory type (only the fault memory, for example) from the local control or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs

¨

General reset

In the first two cases listed above only the displays on the local control are cleared but not the internal memories such as the fault memory. In the event of a cold restart, namely simultaneous failure of both internal battery and power supply, all stored signals and values will be lost.

3-52

General reset, LED reset and measured event data reset from the local control

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-67

3 Operation (continued)

3.11.11 Test Mode If tests are run on the P63x, the is advised to activate the test mode so that all incoming signals via the serial interfaces will be marked accordingly.

3-53

3-68

Setting the test mode

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3.12 Parameter Subset Selection (Function Group PSS) With the P63x, four independent parameter subsets may be pre-set. The may switch between parameter subsets during operation without interrupting the protection function. Selecting the parameter subset The control path determining the active parameter subset (function parameter or external signal input) may be selected via the function parameter P S S : C o n t r o l v i a U S E R or via the external signal P S S : C o n t r o l v i a u s e r E X T . Correspondingly, the parameter subset is selected either in accordance with the pre-set function parameter P S S : P a r a m . s u b s . s e l . U S E R or in accordance with external signals. The parameter subset actually active at a particular time may be determined by scanning the logic state signals P S S : A c t u a l p a r a m . s u b s e t or P S S : P S x a c t i v e . Selecting the parameter subset via binary inputs If the binary signal inputs are to be used for parameter subset selection, then the P63x first checks to determine whether at least two binary inputs are configured for parameter subset selection. If this is not the case, then the parameter subset selected via the function parameter will be active. The P63x also checks to determine whether the signals present at the binary signal inputs allow an unambiguous parameter subset selection. This is only true when just one binary signal input is set to a logic value of ‘1’. If more than one signal input is set to a logic value of ‘1’, then the parameter subset previously selected remains active. Should a dead interval occur while switching between parameter subsets (this is the case if all binary signal inputs have a logic value of ‘0’), then the stored energy time is started. While this timer stage is running, the previously selected parameter subset remains active. As soon as a signal input has a logic value of ‘1’, the associated parameter subset becomes active. If, after the stored energy time has elapsed, there is still no signal input with a logic value of ‘1’, the parameter subset selected via a function parameter becomes active. If, after the supply voltage is turned on, no logic value of ‘1’ is present at any of the binary signal inputs selected for the parameter subset selection, then the parameter subset selected via a function parameter will become active once the stored energy time has elapsed. The previous parameter subset remains active while the stored energy timer stage is running. Parameter subset selection may also occur during a starting condition. When subset selection is handled via binary signal inputs, a maximum inherent delay of approximately 100 ms must be taken into . Settings for which only one address is given in the following sections are equally effective for all four parameter subsets.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-69

3 Operation (continued)

3-54

3-70

Activating the parameter subsets

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3.13 Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON) Comprehensive monitoring routines in the P63x ensure that internal faults are detected and do not lead to malfunctions. Tests during startup After the supply voltage has been turned on, various tests are carried out to full operability of the P63x. If the P63x detects a fault in one of the tests, then startup is terminated. The display shows which test was running when termination occurred. No control actions may be carried out. A new attempt to start up the P63x can only be initiated by turning the supply voltage off and then on again. Cyclic tests After startup has been successfully completed, cyclic self-monitoring tests will be run during operation. In the event of a positive test result, a specified monitoring signal will be issued and stored in a non-volatile memory – the monitoring signal memory – along with the assigned date and time (see also Monitoring Signal Recording). The self-monitoring function monitors the built-in battery for any drop below the minimum acceptable voltage level. If the associated monitoring signal is displayed, then the battery should be replaced within a month, since otherwise there is the danger of data loss if the supply voltage should fail. Chapter 11 gives further instructions on battery replacement. Signaling The monitoring signals are also signaled via the output relay configured SFMO N: W ar ning. The output relay operates as long as an internal fault is detected.

3-55

Monitoring signals

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-71

3 Operation (continued)

Device response The response of the P63x to monitoring signals takes one of the following forms depending on the signal.

3-72

¨

Signaling Only If there is no malfunction associated with the monitoring signal, then only a signal is issued, and there are no further consequences. This situation exists, for example, when internal data acquisition memories overflow.

¨

Selective Blocking If a fault is diagnosed solely in an area that does not affect the protective functions, then only the affected area is blocked. This would apply, for example, to the detection of a fault on the communication module or in the area of the PC interface.

¨

Warm Restart If the self-monitoring function detects a fault that might be eliminated by a system restart, for example a fault in the hardware, then a procedure called a warm restart is automatically initiated. During this procedure, as with any startup, the computer system is reset to a defined state. A warm restart is characterized by the fact that no stored data and, in particular, no setting parameters are affected by the procedure. A warm restart can also be triggered manually by control action. During a warm restart sequence the protective functions and the communication through serial interfaces will be blocked. If the same fault is detected after a warm restart has been triggered by the self-monitoring system, then the protective functions remain blocked but communication through the serial interfaces will usually be possible again.

¨

Cold Restart If a corrupted parameter subset is diagnosed in the checksum test during selfmonitoring, then a cold restart is carried out. This is necessary because the protection device cannot identify which parameter in the subset is corrupt. A cold restart causes all internal memories to be reset to a defined state. This means that all the protection device settings are also erased after a cold restart. The settings that then apply are shown underlined in the column ‘Range of Values’ in the Address List (see Appendix). In order to establish a safe initial state, the default values have been selected so that the protective functions are blocked. Both the monitoring signal that triggered the cold restart and the value indicating parameter loss are entered in the monitoring signal memory.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3.14 Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC) For the continuous recording of processes in system operation as well as of events, a non-volatile ring memory is provided. The operationally relevant signals, each fully tagged with date and time at signal start and signal end, are entered in chronological order. The signals relevant for operation include control actions such as function disabling and enabling and triggers for testing and resetting. The onset and end of events in the system that represent a deviation from normal operation such as overloads, ground faults, or short-circuits are also recorded. The operating data memory can be cleared. Counter of signals relevant to system operation The signals stored in the operating data memory are counted.

3-56

Operating data recording and the counter of signals relevant to system operation

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-73

3 Operation (continued)

3.15 Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC) The monitoring signals generated by the self-monitoring function are recorded in the monitoring signal memory. A listing of all possible entries in this monitoring signal memory is given in the address list (see Appendix). The memory depth allows for a maximum of 30 entries. If more than 29 monitoring signals occur without interim memory clearance, the SFMON: O v e r f l o w M T _ R C signal is entered as the last entry. Monitoring signals prompted by a hardware fault in the protection device are always entered in the monitoring signal memory. Monitoring signals prompted by a peripheral fault can be entered into the monitoring signal memory, if desired. The can select this option by setting an 'm out of n' parameter (see Self-Monitoring). If at least one entry is stored in the monitoring signal memory, this fact is signaled by the red LED indicator H 3 on the local control . Each new entry is indicated by a flashing light. The monitoring signal memory can only be cleared manually by a control action. Entries in the monitoring signal memory are not even cleared automatically if the corresponding test in a new test cycle has a negative result. The contents of the monitoring signal memory can be read from the local control or through the PC or communication interface. The time and date information assigned to the individual entries can be read out through the PC or communication interface or from the local control . Counter of monitoring signals The number of entries stored in the monitoring signal memory is displayed on the MT_RC: N o . m o n i t . s i g n a l s . counter.

3-57

3-74

Monitoring signal recording and the counter of monitoring signals

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3.16 Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA) In the event of an overload, the P63x determines the following measured overload data: ¨

Overload duration

¨

Measured overload data derived from the measured operating data of the thermal overload protection functions THRM1 and THRM2. For each of these two functions, the following values are determined: n

Status of the thermal replica

n

Load current

n

Object temperature

n

Coolant temperature

n

Time remaining before trip

n

Offset of the thermal replica

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-75

3 Operation (continued)

Acquisition of the overload duration The overload duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the OL_RC: Rec or d. in pr ogr es s signal.

3-58

3-76

Overload duration

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

Acquisition of the measured overload data of thermal overload protection The measured overload data are derived from the measured operating data of the thermal overload protection function. They are stored at the end of the overload event.

3-59

Measured overload data of thermal overload protection 1 (THRM1)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-77

3 Operation (continued)

3.17 Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC) Start of overload recording The following description is presented for the thermal overload protection function THRM1 but is equally relevant for THRM2. An overload exists, and therefore overload recording begins, if the signal T H R M 1 : S t a r t i n g k * I B > is issued. Counting overload events Overload events are counted and identified by sequential number.

3-60

3-78

Counting overload events

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

Time tag The date that is assigned to each overload event by the internal clock is stored. An overload event’s individual start or end signals are likewise time-tagged by the internal clock. The date and time assigned to the overload events when the event begins can be read out from the overload memory at the local control or through the PC and ILSA interfaces. The time information (relative to the onset of the overload event) that is assigned to the signals can be retrieved from the overload memory or through the PC or communication interfaces. Overload logging Protection signals during an overload event are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific event. A total of eight overload events, each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the non-volatile overload memories. After eight overload events have been logged, the oldest overload log will be overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more than 199 start or end signals have occurred during a single overload event, then OL_RC: O ver l. m em . over f low will be entered as the last signal. In addition to the signals, the measured overload data are also entered in the overload memory. The overload recordings can be read from the local control or through the PC or communication interfaces.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-79

3 Operation (continued)

3-61

3-80

Overload memory

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3.18 Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA) When there is a fault in the power system, the P63x collects the following measured fault data: ¨

Running time

¨

Fault duration

¨

Fault currents

¨

Differential current of all three measuring systems

¨

Second and fifth harmonic of the differential current

¨

Restraining current of all three measuring systems

¨

Differential currents of ground differential protection

¨

Restraining currents of ground differential protection

Running time and fault duration The running time is defined as the time between the start and end of the general starting signal that is generated within the P63x, and the fault duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the FT _RC: Rec or d. in pr ogr es s signal.

3-62

Running time and fault duration

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-81

3 Operation (continued)

Fault data acquisition time The P63x determines the measured fault data for a particular point in time during a fault. Depending on the protection function that recognizes a fault, the criterion for the determination of the recording start time is selected by the P63x. If, for example, the differential protection function detects a fault then the P63x determines the measured fault data at the time during the fault when the maximum differential current was measured. The measured fault data are displayed at the end of the fault. If several protection functions detect a fault then the criterion is selected on the basis of the priorities given in the table below. The selected criterion is displayed at the P63x. Priority

Function Recognizing the Fault

Acquisition Time Criterion

1

Differential protection function

Maximum differential current

2

Ground differential protection, end a

Maximum differential current (REF_1)

(Br: Restricted earth fault protection, end a)

3

Ground differential protection, end b

Maximum differential current (REF_2)

4

Ground differential protection, end c

Maximum differential current (REF_3)

5

Definite-time overcurrent protection or inverse-time overcurrent protection

Maximum restraining current

6

Functions according to the selection through m out of n parameters

End of fault

The difference in time between the start of the fault and the fault data acquisition time is determined by the P63x and displayed.

3-82

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-63

Determination of the fault data acquisition time

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-83

3 Operation (continued)

Acquisition of the fault currents The P63x stores the fault current data determined at the acquisition time. The following fault currents are stored: ¨

The maximum phase currents for each end of the transformer

¨

The residual current calculated from the phase currents

¨

The current measured by the P63x at transformer -Tx4 (x: 1, 2 or 3)

The fault currents are displayed as per-unit quantities referred to Inom.

3-84

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-64

Acquisition of the fault currents

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-85

3 Operation (continued)

Acquisition of the differential and restraining currents The P63x stores the differential and restraining current data determined at the acquisition time by the differential protection and ground differential protection functions. Moreover, the values for the second and fifth harmonic of the differential current are stored. Differential and restraining currents are stored as per-unit quantities referred to Iref.

3-86

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-65

Acquisition of the differential and restraining currents of differential protection

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-87

3 Operation (continued)

3-66

Acquisition of the differential and restraining currents of ground differential protection

Fault data reset After pressing the reset key ‘C’ on the local control , the fault data value is displayed as ‘Not measured’. However, the values are not erased and can continue to be read out through the PC and communication interfaces.

3-88

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3.19 Fault Recording (Function Group FT_RC) Start of fault recording A fault exists and therefore fault recording begins if at least one of the signals selected through an m out of n parameter is present. Moreover, fault recording is started if the Id> and IR> triggers operate. Furthermore, fault recording can also be started manually from the local control or externally through a binary signal input. Fault counting Faults are counted and identified by sequential number.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-89

3 Operation (continued)

3-67

3-90

Start of fault recording and fault counter

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

Time tag The date that is assigned to each fault by the internal clock is stored. A fault’s individual start or end signals are likewise time-tagged by the internal clock. The date and time assigned to a fault when the fault begins can be read out from the fault memory at the local control or through the PC and communication interfaces. The time information (relative to the onset of the fault) that is assigned to the signals can be retrieved from the fault memory or through the PC or communication interfaces. Fault logging Protection signals during a fault, including the signals during the settable pre-fault and post-fault times, are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific fault. A total of eight faults, each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the non-volatile fault memories. After eight faults have been logged, the oldest fault record will be overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more than 199 start or end signals have occurred during a single fault, then FT _RC: F ault m em . over f low will be entered as the last signal. If the time and date are changed during the pre-fault time, the signal FT _RC: Faulty tim e tag is generated. In addition to the fault signals, the measured fault data are also entered in the fault memory. The fault logs can be read from the local control or through the PC or communication interfaces.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-91

3 Operation (continued)

3-68

3-92

Fault memory

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

Fault data recording The following analog signals are recorded: ¨

The phase currents of all four ends of the transformer

¨

The residual current measured by the P63x at transformer -Tx4 (x: 1, 2 or 3)

¨

The voltage

The signals are recorded before, during and after a fault. The times for recording before and after the fault can be set. A maximum time period of 16.4 s (for 50 Hz) or 13.7 s (for 60 Hz) is available for recording. This period can be divided among a maximum of eight faults. The maximum recording time per fault can be set. If a fault, including the set prefault and post-fault times, lasts longer than the set maximum recording time, then recording will terminate when the set maximum recording time is reached. The pre-fault time is exactly adhered to if it is shorter than the set maximum recording time. Otherwise; the pre-fault time is set to the maximum recording time minus a sampling increment and the post-fault time is set to zero. If the maximum recording time is exceeded, the analog values for the oldest fault are overwritten, but not the binary values. If more than eight faults have occurred since the last reset, then all data for the oldest fault are overwritten. The analog data of the fault record can only be read out through the PC or communication interfaces. When the supply voltage is interrupted or after a warm restart, the values of all faults remain stored.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-93

3 Operation (continued)

3-69 Fault data recording

3-94

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3.20 Differential Protection (Function Group DIFF) The P63x is designed for the protection of transformers as well as for the protection of motors and generators and of other two-winding (P631, P632, P633, P634), threewinding (P633, P634) or four-winding (P634) arrangements. For application of the device as transformer differential protection, amplitude matching is required. This is achieved simply by setting of the reference power - generally the nominal power of the transformer - and of the primary nominal voltages for all windings of the transformer. Vector group matching is achieved by the straightforward input of the relevant vector group identification number. For special applications, zero-sequence current filtering may be deactivated. For conditions where it is possible to load the transformer with a voltage in excess of the nominal voltage, the overfluxing restraint prevents inappropriate tripping. For application as differential protection device for motors or generators, the harmonic restraint (inrush compensation) can be deactivated. The start-up of directly switched asynchronous motors represents a problem in differential protection due to transient transformer saturation caused by a displacement of the start-up current for relatively high primary time constants. Even under these unfavorable measurement conditions, the P63x exhibits an excellent stable performance due to the application of a saturation discriminator. All observations below are based on the assumption that the system current transformers are connected to the P63x in standard configuration (see Conditioning of the Measured Variables). In particular, the application as transformer differential protection device presupposes that winding ‘a’ corresponds to the high voltage side of the transformer. For a non-standard connection, the appropriate settings must be selected (see Chapter 7).

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-95

3 Operation (continued)

Enabling or disabling differential protection Differential protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control . Moreover, enabling can be done separately for each parameter subset.

3-70

3-96

Enabling or disabling differential protection

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

Amplitude matching In order to set the amplitude matching for the protected object, a reference power identical for all windings - needs to be defined. For two-winding arrangements, the nominal power will usually be the reference power. For three- or four-winding transformers, the nominal power of the highest-power winding should be set as the reference power. The individual reference currents for each winding of the protected object are then calculated by the P63x on the basis of the set reference power and the set primary nominal voltages of the transformer.

Iref ,a = Iref ,c =

S ref

Iref ,b =

3 ⋅ Vnom,a S ref

Iref ,d =

3 ⋅ Vnom,c

Sref : Iref,a, b, c or d : Vnom,a, b, c or d :

S ref 3 ⋅ Vnom,b S ref 3 ⋅ Vnom,d

reference power reference current of winding a, b, c or d nominal voltage of winding a, b, c or d

The P63x calculates the matching factors on the basis of the reference currents and the set primary nominal currents of the system transformers. k am,a =

Inom,a Iref ,a

k am,b =

Inom,b Iref ,b

k am,c =

Inom,c Iref ,c

k am,d =

Inom,d Iref ,d

with kam,a, b, c or d: Inom,a, b, c or d:

amplitude-matching factor of winding a, b, c or d primary nominal currents of the main current transformers

Reference currents and matching factors are displayed at the P63x. The P63x checks that the reference currents and matching factors are within their permissible ranges. The acceptable ranges for the reference currents are found in the Address List in the Appendix. The matching factors must satisfy the following conditions: ¨

The matching factors must always be ≤ 5.

¨

The ratio of the highest to the lower matching factors must be ≤ 3.

¨

The value of the lower matching factors must be ≥ 0.7.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-97

3 Operation (continued)

In three- or four-winding protection, the “weakest“ end, that is the end with the smallest primary nominal transformer current, is thus not associated with any restriction of the settings for the amplitude matching. Should the P63x calculate reference currents or matching factors not satisfying the above conditions then a warning will be issued and the P63x will be blocked automatically. The measured values of the phase currents of the windings of the protected object are multiplied by the relevant matching factors and are then available for further processing. Consequently, all threshold values and measured values always refer back to the relevant reference currents rather than to the transformer nominal currents or the nominal currents of the device.

3-98

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-71

Calculating and checking the matching factors

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-99

3 Operation (continued)

3-72

3-100

Amplitude matching

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

Vector group matching

Vector group matching means that the low voltage-side currents are rotated with respect to the high voltage-side currents according to the vector group of the transformer to be protected. Thereby, phase coincidence with the high voltage-side currents is restored. With the P63x, this is achieved by calculating the relevant vector difference or where appropriate, by sign inversion for the low voltage-side phase currents (end b, c or d). Care must be taken to avoid distortion of the amplitude matching by this operation. For all odd vector groups, this is achieved by means of the factor 1/ 3 . Using vector diagrams, it can be shown that the operations listed in the following table will lead to phase coincidence of the high and low voltage-side currents while maintaining the amplitude matching. In Figure 3-73, such a vector diagram is depicted for a transformer having the vector group Yd5 as an example. By subtraction of each phase current from the cyclically leading phase current and subsequent multiplication by the factor 1/ 3 , the desired matching is achieved.

3-73

Vector diagram for vector group matching with a transformer having the vector group Yd5

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-101

3 Operation (continued)

The table shows that the zero-sequence current is subtracted from the phase currents of winding a and, for all even vector groups, from the phase currents of windings b, c and d. According to the theory of symmetric components, the zero-sequence current is calculated as follows: Iam,0,z = z: Iam:

[

1 ⋅I +I +I 3 am,A,z am,B,z am,C,z

]

winding a, b, c or d amplitude-matched current

Zero-sequence filtering for the even-numbered vector groups may be deactivated separately for each winding. The following table lists the required operations for all vector groups that may occur. The indices in the formulae have the following meaning: am: s: x: y: z: x+1: x-1:

3-102

amplitude-matched amplitude- and vector group-matched phase A, B or C measuring system 1, 2 or 3 winding a, b, c or d cyclically trailing phase cyclically leading phase

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

End

ID of the vector group

Iam,x,a − Iam,0,a

a 0 = 12 1

b, c or d

I s,y ,z =

Iam,x,z − Iam,0,z

[Iam,x,z − Iam,x+1,z ]⋅

1 3

2

Iam,0,z − Iam,x +1,z

3

[Iam,x−1,z − Iam,x+1,z ]⋅

4

Iam,x −1,z − Iam,0,z

5

[Iam,x−1,z − Iam,x,z ]⋅

6

Iam,0,z − Iam,x,z

7

[Iam,x+1,z − Iam,x,z ]⋅

3

1 3

Iam,x +1,z − Iam,0,z

9

[Iam,x+1,z − Iam,x−1,z ]⋅ Iam,0,z − Iam,x −1,z

11

[Iam,x,z − Iam,x−1,z ]⋅

3

1

8

10

1

1 3

1 3

Vector group matching is via a straight-forward input of the vector group identification number provided that the phase currents of the high and low voltage side(s) are connected in standard configuration (see Conditioning of the Measured Variables). For other configurations, special considerations apply (see chapter 7). An anti-clockwise rotating field (phase sequence A-C-B) needs to be taken into by making the appropriate setting at the P63x. The P63x will then automatically form the complementary value of the set vector group ID to the number 12 (vector group ID = 12 – set ID).

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-103

3 Operation (continued)

3-74

3-104

Vector group matching and zero-sequence filtering, ends a to c

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-75

Vector group matching and zero-sequence filtering, end d

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-105

3 Operation (continued)

Tripping Characteristics The differential and restraining current variables for each measurement system are calculated from the current variables after amplitude and vector group matching. The formation of the restraining variables differs between two- and three-winding protection. The following equations are valid for uniformly defined current arrows relative to the protected equipment, that is the current arrows of all windings point either towards the protected object or away from it. Calculation of differential and restraining currents for two-winding protection: Id,y = Is,y,a + Is,y,b IR,y = 0.5 ⋅ Is,y,a − Is,y,b Calculation of differential and restraining currents for three- or four-winding protection: Id,y = Is,y,a + Is,y,b + Is,y,c + Is,y,d

[

IR,y = 0.5 ⋅ Is,y,a + Is,y,b + Is,y,c + Is,y,d

]

The tripping characteristic of the differential protection device P63x has two knees. The first knee is dependent on the setting of the basic threshold value D I F F : I d i f f > P S x and is on the load line for single-side feed. The second knee of the tripping characteristic is defined by the setting D I F F : I R , m 2 P S x . The characteristic equations for the three different ranges are given below. Figure 3-76 shows the tripping characteristic. Characteristic equation for the range 0 ≤ IR ≤ 0.5 ⋅ Idiff > : Id I > = diff Iref Iref Characteristic equation for the range 0.5 ⋅ Idiff >< IR ≤ IR,m2 : Id I I > = m1 ⋅ R + diff ⋅ (1 − 0.5 ⋅ m1 ) Iref Iref Iref

3-106

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

Characteristic equation for the range IR,m2 < IR : IR,m2 Id I I = m 2 ⋅ R + diff > ⋅ (1 − 0.5 ⋅ m1 ) + ⋅ (m1 − m 2 ) Iref Iref Iref Iref

Iref: m1:

reference current gradient of characteristic in range 0.5 ⋅ Idiff >< IR ≤ IR,m2

m2:

gradient of characteristic in range IR,m2 < IR

8.00

Id / Iref

Tripping area

2.00

m2

7 0.

Blocking area

0.3 m1 =

IR,m2 / Iref = 4.0

Id> / Iref = 0.2 0.00 I 3-76

=

12200e.DS4

4.00

Fau for lt cur sin ren gle t -sid char e f acte eed rist ic

6.00

2.00 II

4.00

6.00 IR / Iref

8.00

III

Tripping characteristic of differential protection

Rapid (high-set) differential protection function Above the adjustable threshold D I F F : I d i f f > > P S x of the differential current, the P63x will trip without taking into either the harmonic restraint or the overfluxing restraint. If the differential current exceeds the adjustable threshold D I F F : I d i f f > > > P S x >, the restraining current and the saturation discriminator are no longer taken into either, that is the P63x will trip regardless of the restraining variable and the saturation discriminator.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-107

3 Operation (continued)

3-77

3-108

Forming the differential and restraining currents for the three measuring systems

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-78

Measuring system of the P63x

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-109

3 Operation (continued)

Inrush stabilization (harmonic restraint) When an unloaded transformer is connected, the inrush current at unfavorable switching instants such as for voltage zero, may have values that exceed the transformer nominal current several times over. It takes some time for the current to assume its small stationary value. Since the high inrush current flows on the connected side only, the tripping characteristic of differential protection may give rise to a trip unless stabilizing action is taken. The fact that the inrush current has a high proportion of harmonics having twice the system frequency offers a possibility of stabilization against tripping by the inrush current. The P63x filters the differential current. The fundamental wave I(f0) and second harmonic components I(2*f0) of the differential current are determined. If the ratio I(2*f0) / I(f0) exceeds a specific adjustable value in at least one measuring system, tripping is blocked optionally in one of the following modes: ¨

Across all three measuring systems

¨

Selectively for one measuring system (see Figure 3-78)

There will be no blocking if the differential current exceeds the set threshold DIFF: Idiff>> PSx.

3-110

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-79

Inrush stabilization (harmonic restraint)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-111

3 Operation (continued)

Saturation discriminator Up to a certain limit, stability in the event of external faults is ensured by means of the bias. Due to the triple-slope tripping characteristic, the stabilization is particularly pronounced for high currents. However, as an additional safeguard for through-currents with transformer saturation, the P63x is provided with a saturation discriminator. After each zero crossing of the restraining current, the saturation discriminator monitors the occurrence of the differential current over time. For internal faults, the differential current appears after a zero crossing together with the restraining current. In the case of ing currents with transformer saturation, however, a differential current will not appear until transformer saturation begins. Accordingly, a locking signal is generated on the basis of level monitoring of the differential current as compared to the restraining current, and thus the desired through-stabilization is achieved. Locking is restricted to the measuring system where an external fault was detected. There will be no blocking if the differential current exceeds the set threshold DIFF: Idiff>>> PSx.

3-80

3-112

Saturation discriminator

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

Overfluxing restraint If the transformer is loaded with a voltage in excess of the nominal voltage, saturation effects occur. Without stabilization, these could lead to differential protection tripping. The fact that the current of the protected object under saturation conditions has a high proportion of harmonics having five times the system frequency serves as the basis of stabilization. The P63x filters the differential current and determines the fundamental component I(f0) and the fifth harmonic component I(5*f0). If the ratio I(5*f0) / I(f0) exceeds the set value D I F F : O v e r I ( 5 f 0 ) / I ( f 0 ) P S x in at least one measuring system, and if the restraining current is smaller than 4·Iref , then tripping is blocked selectively for one measuring system. There will be no blocking if the differential current exceeds the set threshold DIFF: Idiff>> PSx.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-113

3 Operation (continued)

3-81

3-114

Overfluxing restraint

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

Measured operating data of differential protection The differential and restraining currents are displayed as measured operating data provided that the set thresholds are exceeded.

3-82

Measured operating data of the differential and restraining currents

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-115

3 Operation (continued)

3.21 Ground Differential Protection (Function Groups REF_1 to REF_3) The ground differential protection function (Br.: restricted earth fault protection) can be applied to transformer windings with grounded neutral point where the neutral point-toground connection is fitted with a current transformer. The ground differential protection function is not available with the P631. For the other design versions of the P63x, one ground differential protection function per transformer winding is available for up to three ends. The P63x display shows the winding associated with a particular ground differential protection function. Connection for and operation of the ground differential protection function will now be presented with winding ‘a’ as an example. Equivalent considerations apply to windings ‘b’ and ‘c’. Ground differential protection is based on comparing the vector sum IN of the phase currents of the relevant transformer winding to the neutral-point current IY. The P63x generates the vector sum of the phase currents. For the connection, see Conditioning of the Measured Variables.

3-116

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

Enabling or disabling ground differential protection Ground differential protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control . Moreover, enabling can be done separately for each parameter subset.

3-83

Enabling or disabling ground differential protection

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-117

3 Operation (continued)

Amplitude matching In order to set the amplitude matching for the protected object, the nominal power of the transformer winding should be set as the reference power. The reference current is then calculated by the P63x on the basis of the set reference power and the set primary nominal voltage of the transformer winding.

Iref ,N,a =

S ref 3 ⋅ Vnom,a

Sref: reference power Iref,N,a: reference current of the ground differential protection function, end a Vnom,a: nominal voltage, end a

The P63x calculates the matching factor on the basis of the reference current and the set primary nominal current of the system transformer. k am,N,a =

Inom,a Iref ,N,a

k am,Y,a =

Inom,Y,a Iref ,N,a

where am: amplitude-matched Inom,a: primary nominal current of the main current transformer Inom,Y,a: primary nominal current of current transformer in the neutral-point-to-ground connections

Reference currents and matching factors are displayed at the P63x. The P63x checks that the reference current and matching factor are within their permissible ranges. The acceptable range for the reference current is found in the Address List in the Appendix. The matching factor must always be ≤ 5. Furthermore, the following conditions apply: ¨

The ratio of the matching factors must be ≤ 3.

¨

The value of the smaller matching factor must be ≥ 0.5.

Should the P63x calculate a reference current or matching factors not satisfying the above conditions then a warning will be issued and the P63x will be blocked automatically. The measured values are multiplied by the relevant matching factors and are then available for further processing. Consequently, all threshold values and measured values always refer back to the relevant reference current rather than to the transformer nominal current or the nominal current of the device.

3-118

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-84

Calculating and monitoring the matching factors

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-119

3 Operation (continued)

Tripping characteristics

From the amplitude-matched resultant currents Iam,N,a and Iam,Y,a , the differential and restraining currents are calculated as follows:

Id,N,a = Iam,N,a + Iam,Y,a IR,N,a = Iam,N,a Again, the equation for the differential current applies under the condition of uniformly defined current arrows relative to the protected object. Both current arrows, that is, point either towards the protected object or away from it. Figure 3-85 shows the tripping characteristic of the ground differential protection function. The characteristic equation is as follows: Id,N,a Iref ,N,a where Idiff>,N,a:

=

Idiff >,N,a Iref ,N,a

+ 1.005 ⋅

IR,N,a Iref ,N,a

setting R E F _ 1 : I d i f f > P S x

Id,N / Iref

cu rre nt tra ns fo rm er s

8.00

Tripping area

Id,N> / Iref = 0.2 0.00

3-85

3-120

2.00

Blocking area 12201e.DS4

2.00

=

Fa ul tc ur re nt ch ar ac te ris tic

m

5 00 . 1

fo rt ra ns ie nt

4.00

sa tu ra tio n

of th e

m ai n

6.00

4.00

6.00 IR,N / Iref

8.00

Tripping characteristics of ground differential protection

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

If the differential current exceeds the adjustable threshold REF_1: I d i f f > > > P S x , the restraining variable is no longer taken into , that is the P63x will trip regardless of the restraining variable.

3-86

Measuring system of the P63x

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-121

3 Operation (continued)

Measured operating data of ground differential protection

The differential and restraining currents are displayed as measured operating data provided that the set thresholds are exceeded.

3-87

3-122

Measured operating data of the differential and restraining currents

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3.22 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Groups DTOC1 to DTOC3) In the P631 and P632, two three-stage definite-time overcurrent protection functions (DTOC1 and DTOC2) are implemented and can be assigned to the two transformer ends. In the P633 and the P634, three DTOC functions (DTOC1, DTOC2 and DTOC3) are implemented. These can each be assigned to one of the transformer ends (a, b or c for the P633; a, b, c or d for the P634) or to the virtual transformer end formed by current summation over two -selected transformer ends. For each DTOC function, a setting parameter is provided for this assignment by the . The DTOC function will then monitor the phase currents, the negative-sequence current and the residual current for the selection. Function group DTOC1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of the DTOC protection functions. Function groups DTOC2 and DTOC3 are equivalent.

3-88

Selection of measured variables for DTOC protection (Selection of end d applies to the P634 only, selection of end c and of current summation applies to the P633 and P634 only)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-123

3 Operation (continued)

Enabling or disabling DTOC protection DTOC protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control . Moreover, enabling can be done separately for each parameter subset.

3-89

3-124

Enabling or disabling DTOC protection

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

Phase current stages The three phase currents are monitored by the P63x with three-stage functions to detect when they exceed the set thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be active. The “dynamic” thresholds are active for the set hold time of the “dynamic parameters” (see “Activation of Dynamic Parameters”); the “normal” thresholds are active when no hold time is running. If the current exceeds the set thresholds in one phase, timer stages are started. Once these stages have elapsed, a trip signal is issued. These timer stages can be blocked by way of appropriately configured binary signal inputs. The first stage of the DTOC protection function can optionally be blocked by the inrush stabilization function of differential protection.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-125

3 Operation (continued)

3-90

3-126

Phase current stages

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

Negative-sequence current stages The P63x calculates the negative-sequence current from the three phase currents based on the formulas shown below. The phase sequence (rotary field direction) setting is taken into . A-B-C (clockwise rotating field): 1 2 Ineg = ⋅ I A + a ⋅ IB + a ⋅ IC 3

(

)

A-C-B (anticlockwise rotating field): 1 2 Ineg = ⋅ I A + a ⋅ IB + a ⋅ IC 3

(

)

a = e j120° a 2 = e j240° The negative-sequence current is monitored by the P63x with three-stage functions to detect when they exceed the set thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be active. The “dynamic” thresholds are active for the set hold time of the “dynamic parameters” (see “Activation of Dynamic Parameters”); the “normal” thresholds are active when no hold time is running. If the current exceeds the set thresholds in one phase, timer stages are started. Once these stages have elapsed, a trip signal is issued. These timer stages can be blocked by way of appropriately configured binary signal inputs. The first stage of the DTOC protection function can optionally be blocked by the inrush stabilization function of differential protection.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-127

3 Operation (continued)

3-91

3-128

Negative-sequence current stages P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

Residual current stages

The residual current is monitored with three-stage functions to detect when it exceeds the set thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be active. The “dynamic” thresholds are active for the set hold time of the “dynamic parameters” (see “Activation of Dynamic Parameters”); the “normal” thresholds are active when no hold time is running. If the residual current exceeds the set thresholds, timer stages are started. Once these stages have elapsed, a signal is issued. If the operating mode of the general starting decision is set to With starting IN, a trip signal is issued as well. These timer stages can be blocked by way of appropriately configured binary signal inputs. Furthermore, the timer stages can – depending on the setting - be blocked automatically for single-pole or multi-pole startings.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-129

3 Operation (continued)

3-92

3-130

Residual current stages

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

General starting

If the current exceeds one of the set thresholds of the phase current stages, a general starting decision is issued. The can select whether the starting of the negativesequence and residual current stages should be taken into in the general starting decision. The general starting triggers a timer stage. Once this stage has elapsed, a signal is issued.

3-93

General starting

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-131

3 Operation (continued)

Counters of the DTOC protection function

The number of general startings is counted. The counter can be reset individually.

3-94

3-132

Counters of the DTOC protection function

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3.23 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Groups IDMT1 to IDMT3) In the P631 and P632, two three-stage inverse-time overcurrent protection functions (IDMT1 and IDMT2) are implemented and can be assigned to the two transformer ends. In the P633 and the P634, three IDMT functions (IDMT1, IDMT2 and IDMT3) are implemented. These can each be assigned to one of the transformer ends (a, b or c for the P633; a, b, c or d for the P634) or to the virtual transformer end formed by current summation over two -selected transformer ends. For each IDMT function, a setting parameter is provided for this assignment by the . The IDMT function will then monitor the phase currents, the negative-sequence current and the residual current for the selection. Function group IDMT1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of the IDMT protection functions. Function groups IDMT2 and IDMT3 are equivalent.

3-95

Selection of measured variables for IDMT protection

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-133

3 Operation (continued)

Enabling or disabling IDMT protection IDMT protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control . Moreover, enabling can be done separately for each parameter subset.

3-96

Enabling or disabling IDMT protection

Time-dependent characteristics The measuring systems for the evaluation of the three phase currents, the negativesequence current and the residual current operate independently and can be set separately. The can select from a multitude of characteristics. The tripping characteristics available for selection are shown in Figures 3-97 to 3-100.

3-134

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

No.

Tripping Characteristic

Formula for the Tripping Characteristic

Constants

k = 0.01 to 10.00

a

b

0.14

0.02

2 Very Inverse

13.50

1.00

3 Extremely Inverse

80.00

2.00

4 Long Time Inverse

120.00

1.00

0 Definite Time Per IEC 255-3

c

R

t=k t =k⋅

a æ I ç çI è ref

b

ö ÷ −1 ÷ ø

1 Standard Inverse

Per IEEE C37.112

Formula for the Release Characteristic

æ ö ç ÷ ç ÷ a + c÷ t = k ⋅ç b çæ I ö ÷ ÷ −1 ç çç ÷ ç I ÷ ÷ è è ref ø ø

tr = k ⋅

5 Moderately Inverse

R æ I ç çI è ref

2

ö ÷ −1 ÷ ø

0.0515

0.0200

0.1140

4.85

6 Very Inverse

19.6100

2.0000

0.4910

21.60

7 Extremely Inverse

28.2000

2.0000

0.1217

29.10

Per ANSI

æ ö ç ÷ ç ÷ a ÷ + c t = k ⋅ç ç æ I öb ÷ ÷ −1 ç çç ÷ ÷ ç I ÷ è è ref ø ø

tr = k ⋅

R æ I ç çI è ref

2

ö ÷ −1 ÷ ø

8 Normally Inverse

8.9341

2.0938 0.17966

9.00

9 Short Time Inverse

0.2663

1.2969 0.03393

0.50

10 Long Time Inverse

5.6143

1.0000 2.18592

15.75

11 RI-Type Inverse

t =k⋅

1 0.339 −

12 RXIDG-Type Inverse

0.236 æ I ö ç ÷ çI ÷ è ref ø

æ I t = k ⋅ çç 5.8 − 1.35 ⋅ ln I ref è

ö ÷ ÷ ø

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-135

3 Operation (continued)

IEC 255-3, Very Inverse

IEC 255-3, Standard Inverse 1000

1000

100

100 k=10

10

t/s

k=1 1 k=0.1 k=0.05

0.1

10

k=10

1

k=1

t/s

0.1

k=0.1 k=0.05

0.01

0.01

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

I/Iref

I/Iref

S8Z50K1A

Characteristic No. 2

Characteristic No. 1

IEC 255-3, Extremely Inverse

IEC 255-3, Long Time Inverse

1000

1000

100

100

10

k=10

10

t/s

k=10 1

k=1

t/s 1

k=0.1 k=0.05

k=1 0.1

0.01

0.1 k=0.1 k=0.05 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

I/Iref

Characteristic No. 3

3-97

3-136

S8Z50K2A

0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

I/Iref

S8Z50K3A

S8Z50K4A

Characteristic No. 4

Tripping characteristics per IEC 255-3

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

IEEE C37.112, Moderately Inverse

IEEE C37.112, Very Inverse

1000

1000

100

100

10

10

k=10

t/s

k=10

t/s 1

1

k=1

k=1

k=0.1 k=0.05

0.1

0.1

0.01

k=0.1 k=0.05

0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

I/Iref

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

I/Iref

S8Z50K5C

Characteristic No. 5

S8Z50K6C

Characteristic No. 6 IEEE C37.112, Extremely Inverse

1000

100

10

t/s

k=10

1

k=1

0.1

0.01

k=0.1 k=0.05 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

I/Iref

S8Z50K7C

Characteristic No. 7 3-98

Tripping characteristics per IEEE C37.112

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-137

3 Operation (continued)

ANSI, Normally Inverse

ANSI, Short Time Inverse

1000

1000

100

100

10

10

t/s

k=10

1

t/s 1 k=10

k=1

0.1

0.01

k=0.1 k=0.05 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

I/Iref

0.1

0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

I/Iref

S8Z50K8C

Characteristic No. 8

k=1 k=0.1 k=0.05

S8Z50K9C

Characteristic No. 9 ANSI, Long Time Inverse

1000

100 k=10 10

t/s

k=1 1 k=0.1 k=0.05

0.1

0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

I/Iref

S8Z50KAC

Characteristic No. 10 3-99

3-138

Tripping characteristics per ANSI

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

RI-Type Inverse

RXIDG-Type Inverse

1000

1000

100

100 k=10

k=10

10

10

t/s

t/s

k=1 1 k=0.1 k=0.05

0.1

k=0.1 k=0.05

0.1

0.01

0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

I/Iref

Characteristic No. 11 3-100

k=1 1

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

I/Iref

S8Z50KBA

S8Z50KCA

Characteristic No. 12

Tripping characteristics RI-Type Inverse and RXIDG-Type Inverse

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-139

3 Operation (continued)

Phase current stage

The three phase currents are monitored by the P63x to detect when they exceed the set thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be active. The “dynamic” threshold is active for the set hold time of the “dynamic parameters” (see “Activation of Dynamic Parameters”); the “normal” threshold is active when no hold time is running. The IDMT protection function issues a starting signal if 1.05 times the set reference current is exceeded in one phase. The P63x determines the highest of the three phase currents for further processing. As a function of this current and of the set characteristic, the P63x will determine the tripping time. Furthermore, a minimum trip time can be set; the trip time will not fall below this minimum independent of the magnitude of the current. The phase current stage of the IDMT protection function can optionally be blocked by the inrush stabilization function of differential protection.

3-140

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-101

Phase current stage

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-141

3 Operation (continued)

Negative-sequence current stage

The P63x calculates the negative-sequence current from the three phase currents based on the formulas shown below. The phase sequence (rotary field direction) setting is taken into . A-B-C (clockwise rotating field): 1 2 Ineg = ⋅ I A + a ⋅ IB + a ⋅ IC 3

(

)

A-C-B (anticlockwise rotating field): 1 2 Ineg = ⋅ I A + a ⋅ IB + a ⋅ IC 3

(

)

a = e j120° a 2 = e j240° The negative-sequence current is monitored by the P63x to detect when it exceeds the set thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be active. The “dynamic” thresholds are active for the set hold time of the “dynamic parameters” (see “Activation of Dynamic Parameters”); the “normal” thresholds are active when no hold time is running. The IDMT protection function issues a starting signal if 1.05 times the set reference current is exceeded. As a function of the negative-sequence current and of the set characteristic, the P63x will determine the tripping time. Moreover, a minimum trip time can be set. The trip time will not fall below this minimum independent of the magnitude of the current. The negative-sequence stage of the IDMT protection function can optionally be blocked by the inrush stabilization function of differential protection.

3-142

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-102

Negative-sequence current stage

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-143

3 Operation (continued)

Residual current stage

The residual current is monitored by the P63x to detect when it exceeds the set thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be active. The “dynamic” threshold is active for the set hold time of the “dynamic parameters” (see “Activation of Dynamic Parameters”); the “normal” threshold is active when no hold time is running. The IDMT protection function issues a starting signal if the residual current exceeds a value of 1.05 times the set reference current. As a function of the set characteristic and of the residual current, the P63x will determine the tripping time. Furthermore, a minimum trip time can be set; the trip time will not fall below this minimum independent of the magnitude of the residual current. The inverse-time stage can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input. Furthermore, the inverse-time stage can – depending on the setting - be blocked automatically for single-pole or multi-pole startings.

3-144

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-103

Residual current stage

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-145

3 Operation (continued)

Holding time

The setting for the holding time defines the period for the IDMT starting time to be stored after the starting has dropped out. If the starting time returns while the hold time elapses, the new starting time is added to the stored time. If the sum of the starting times reaches the tripping time determined by the P63x then the appropriate message is issued. If the starting time does not return while the hold time elapses then the memory storing the sum of the starting times will – in accordance with the setting - be cleared either without delay or according to the set characteristic. The phase current stage serves as an example to illustrate the effect of the holding time in Figure 3-104.

3-146

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-104

The effect of the holding time illustrated for the phase current stage as an example Case A: The determined tripping time is not reached. Case B: The determined tripping time is reached.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-147

3 Operation (continued)

General starting

If 1.05 times the set reference current is exceeded in one phase, a general starting decision is issued. The can select whether the starting of the negative-sequence and residual current stage should be taken into in the general starting decision. The general starting triggers a timer stage. Once this stage has elapsed, a signal is issued.

3-105

General starting

Counters of the IDMT protection function

The number of general startings is counted. The counter can be reset individually.

3-106

3-148

Counters of the IDMT protection function

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3.24 Thermal Overload Protection (Function Groups THRM1 and THRM2) Function THRM1 is designed for the thermal overload protection of transformers. This function is available in all devices of the P63x product family (P631, P632, P633 and P634). A second function with identical setting options (THRM2) is implemented in the P633 and P634. For each of these two functions, the protected transformer end, the measuring input for temperature acquisition and the tripping characteristics can be selected. The selection options for the protected transformer end comprise ends a and b (for the P631 and P632), ends a, b, and c (for the P633) or ends a, b, c and d (for the P634), respectively. For the P633 and P634 there is the further option of selecting the virtual transformer end formed by current summation over two -selected transformer ends. (See Figure 3-107.)

Device

P631

P632

P633

P634

Thermal overload protection functions

THRM1

THRM1

THRM1, THRM2

THRM1, THRM2

Protected transformer end

End a or b

End a or b

End a, b or c, or the virtual end

End a, b, c or d, or the virtual end

With the P633 or P634, function THRM2 can be assigned to a weaker transformer end or to a combination of two weaker transformer ends (by asg the virtual end) with an appropriate choice of tripping characteristics for function THRM2. Function group THRM1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of the thermal overload protection functions; function group THRM2 is equivalent.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-149

3 Operation (continued)

3-107

3-150

Selection of measured variables for thermal overload protection 1

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

Enabling or disabling thermal overload protection Thermal overload protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control . Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter set.

3-108

Enabling or disabling thermal overload protection 1 (THRM1)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-151

3 Operation (continued)

Tripping characteristics The maximum phase current IP,max.y of the selected transformer end serves to track a first-order thermal image according to IEC 255-8. The following parameters will govern the tripping time: ¨

The set thermal time constant (τ) of the protected object THRM1: Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx

¨

The set tripping level Θ trip set at T H R M 1 : Θ t r i p P S x

¨

The accumulated thermal load Θ P.

¨

The updated measured coolant temperature Θc for the protected object

¨

The maximum permissible coolant temperature Θc,max set at T HRM1: Max . c ool. tem p. PSx

¨

The maximum permissible object temperature Θmax set at T HRM1: Max .obj ec t tem p. PSx The object temperature is calculated from the current IP,max.y and can be displayed at T HRM1: O bj ec t tem perat., T H1. The coolant temperature is either measured via the PT 100 input or via the 20 mA input or a default temperature value is used instead. This choice is governed by the setting at T HRM1: Selec t CT A PSx . The menu point for the display of the resulting coolant temperature is T HRM1: Coolant tem p. T H1. The difference between the settings for the maximum permissible temperatures of the protected object and the coolant can be displayed at T HRM1: T m ax ,obj - T m ax ,c ool1.

The tripping characteristics are then defined by the equation:

t = τ ⋅ ln

æ I ç çI è ref

2

æ I çç è Iref

2

ö ÷÷ − Θ P ø

æ Θ c − Θ c,max ö ÷ − Θ trip ⋅ ç1 − ÷ ç Θ max − Θ c,max ø è

ö ÷ ÷ ø

Figure 3-109 shows the tripping characteristics for Θ P = 0 % and with identical settings for the maximum permissible coolant temperature and the maximum permissible object temperature. The setting for the operating mode selects an ‘absolute’ or ‘relative’ replica. If the setting is for Absolute replica, the P63x will operate with a fixed trip threshold Θtrip of 100 %.

3-152

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

θtrip / %

10000

200 1000

110

τ/min 50

100

200

110 10

1000

50

t/min

200

1

110 30

50

0.1

1

0.01

0.001

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

I/Iref D5Z50BEA

3-109

Tripping characteristic of thermal overload protection (tripping characteristics apply to Θ P = 0 % and identical settings for the maximum permissible coolant and object temperatures)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-153

3 Operation (continued)

Coolant temperature acquisition

To permit coolant temperature acquisition, the analog I/O module Y must be fitted. If this module is not available in the P63x then the setting T H R M 1 : C o o l a n t t e m p . P S x is used in the calculation of the tripping time. The setting T H R M 1 : B l . f . C T A f a u l t P S x defines whether the thermal overload protection function will be blocked in the event of a fault in the coolant temperature acquisition.

3-110

3-154

Monitoring the coolant temperature acquisition

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

Warning

A warning signal is issued when the thermal load reaches the set warning level T H R M 1 : Θ W a r n i n g P S x . Moreover, a pre-trip warning time can be defined. The time difference between the warning time and the trip time is set at T HRM1: W arning pre-trip PSx . The time remaining until the thermal overload protection function THRM1 will reach the tripping threshold can be displayed at OL_DA: Pre-trip t. lef t T HRM1. If the current falls below the default threshold of 0.1 Iref, the buffer is discharged with the set time constant T H R M 1 : T i m . c o n s t . 2 , < I b l P S x ) . The thermal replica may be reset either from the local control or via an appropriately configured binary signal input. Resetting is effective even when the thermal overload protection is disabled. Thermal overload protection can be blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-155

3 Operation (continued)

3-111

3-156

Thermal overload protection P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-112

Thermal replica reset

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-157

3 Operation (continued)

3.25 Time-Voltage Protection (Function Group V<>) The time-voltage protection function is not available with the P631. The two-stage voltage-time protection function of the P63x evaluates the fundamental wave of the phase voltages. Enabling or disabling V<> protection V<> protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control . Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter set. V<> protection readiness V<> protection is ready when it is enabled and measuring circuit monitoring has not detected a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit.

3-113

3-158

Enabling, disabling and readiness of V<> protection

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

Voltage monitoring The P63x checks the voltage to determine whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs. If the decisions of undervoltage monitoring are to be included in the trip commands, then it is recommended that transient signals be used. Otherwise the trip command would always be present when the system voltage was disconnected, and thus it would not be possible to close the circuit breaker again. Furthermore, voltage-time protection provides a window function for each timer stage. The windows are defined by the setting V<>: Vm in PSx as lower threshold for both timer stages and by the set operate value V< or V<< of the relevant timer stage and parameter subset as upper threshold. With an appropriate setting of the successive timer stages, this provision can be used to bridge short periods of voltage failure as encountered in switching operations.

3-114

Overvoltage monitoring

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3-159

3 Operation (continued)

3-115

3-160

Undervoltage monitoring

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3.26 Over-/ Underfrequency Protection (Function Group f<>) The over-/ underfrequency protection function is not available with the P631. The P63x checks the voltage to detect whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. The frequency is determined from the difference in time between the zero crossings of the voltage. The over-/ underfrequency protection function has four stages. The first stage will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of over-/ underfrequency protection. Enabling or disabling over-/ underfrequency protection Over-/ underfrequency protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control . Moreover, enabling can be done separately for each parameter subset.

3-116

Enabling, disabling and readiness of the f<> protection

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-161

3 Operation (continued)

Undervoltage blocking and evaluation time Over-/ underfrequency protection requires a measuring voltage of adequate magnitude. Over-/ underfrequency protection will be blocked without delay if the measuring voltage falls below the set threshold of the undervoltage stage. In order to avoid that the frequency stages operate as a consequence of brief frequency fluctuations or interference, the evaluation time can be set by the . The operate conditions need to be satisfied for the duration of the set evaluation time for a signal to be issued.

3-117

3-162

Undervoltage blocking and evaluation time setting

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

Operating modes of over-/ underfrequency protection For each stage of the over-/ underfrequency protection function, the can select between the following operating modes: ¨

Frequency monitoring

¨

Frequency monitoring combined with differential frequency gradient monitoring (df/dt)

¨

Frequency monitoring combined with mean frequency gradient monitoring (∆f/∆t)

Frequency monitoring Depending on the setting, the P63x checks the frequency to detect whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If an operate threshold in excess of the set nominal frequency is set, the P63x checks whether the frequency exceeds the operate threshold. If an operate threshold below the set nominal frequency is set, the P63x checks whether the frequency falls below the operate threshold. If it exceeds or falls below the set threshold, a set timer stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input. Frequency monitoring combined with differential frequency gradient monitoring (df/dt) In this operating mode of the over-/ underfrequency protection function, the frequency is additionally monitored for attaining the set frequency gradient (as well as for exceeding or falling below the set threshold). Monitoring for overfrequency is combined with monitoring for a frequency increase; monitoring for underfrequency is combined with monitoring for a frequency decrease. If both operate conditions are satisfied, a set timer stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-163

3 Operation (continued)

Frequency monitoring combined with mean frequency gradient monitoring (∆f/∆t) The frequency gradient can differ for system disturbances in individual substations and may vary in time due to power swings. Therefore it makes sense to take the mean value of the frequency gradient into for load-shedding systems. In this operating mode, frequency monitoring must be set to “underfrequency monitoring”. Monitoring the mean value of the frequency gradient is started with the starting of frequency monitoring. If the frequency decreases by the set value ∆f within the set time ∆t then the ∆t/∆f monitoring function operates without delay and generates a trip signal. If a frequency change does not lead to an operate decision of the monitoring function then the ∆t/∆f monitoring function will be blocked until the underfrequency monitoring function drops out. The trip signal can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.

3-118

3-164

Operation of frequency monitoring combined with ∆f/∆t monitoring

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-119

First stage of the over-/ underfrequency protection function

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-165

3 Operation (continued)

3.27 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT) The limit value monitoring function LIMIT supervises the measured variables subject to data acquisition in the analog measured data input. Enabling or disabling limit value monitoring The limit value monitoring function LIMIT can be disabled or enabled from the local control . Monitoring the linearized DC values The direct current that is linearized by analog measured data input is monitored by two stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If it exceeds or falls below the thresholds, a signal is issued once a set time has elapsed.

3-166

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-120

Monitoring the linearized direct current

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-167

3 Operation (continued)

Monitoring the measured temperature value The temperature that is measured by the P63x using a resistance thermometer is monitored by two stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If it exceeds or falls below the thresholds, a signal is issued once a set time has elapsed.

3-121

3-168

Monitoring the measured temperature value

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3.28 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Groups LIM_1 to LIM_3) Each of the limit value monitoring functions LIM_1, LIM_2 and LIM_3 is designed for the monitoring of the minimum and maximum phase currents for a -selected transformer end. Enabling or disabling limit value monitoring The limit value monitoring functions LIM_n can be disabled or enabled from the local control . Monitoring minimum and maximum phase currents In the P631 and P632, two limit value monitoring functions (LIM_1 and LIM_2) are implemented and can be assigned to the two transformer ends. In the P633 and the P634, three limit value monitoring functions (LIM_1, LIM_2 and LIM_3) are implemented. These can each be assigned to one of the transformer ends (a, b or c for the P633; a, b, c or d for the P634) or to the virtual transformer end formed by current summation over two -selected transformer ends. For each limit value monitoring function, a setting parameter is provided for this assignment by the . The function will then monitor the minimum and maximum phase currents for the selection. If a maximum phase current exceeds the relevant set threshold or if a minimum phase current falls below the relevant set threshold, a signal is issued once a set time has elapsed. Function group LIM_1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of the LIM_n protection functions in the following figures.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-169

3 Operation (continued)

3-122

3-170

Selection of measured variables for LIM_1 protection (Selection of end d applies to the P634 only, selection of end c and of current summation applies to the P633 and P634 only)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-123

Limit value monitoring of minimum and maximum phase current for the selected transformer end

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-171

3 Operation (continued)

3.29 Programmable Logic (Function Group LOGIC) Programmable (or -configurable) logic enables the to link binary signals within a framework of Boolean equations. Binary signals in the P63x can be linked by logical ‘OR’ or ‘AND’ operations or by additional ‘NOT’ operations by setting L O G I C : F c t . a s s i g n m . o u t p . n , where n = 1 to 32. The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of brackets. The following rule applies to the operators: ‘NOT’ before ‘AND’ before ‘OR’. A maximum of 32 elements can be processed in one Boolean equation. In addition to the signals generated by the P63x, initial conditions for governing the equations can be set from the local control , the binary signal inputs, or through the serial interfaces. Intervention in the logical operations through the binary signal inputs can occur in different ways. The binary input signals L O G I C : I n p u t n E X T (n = 1 to 16) have an updating function, whereas the input signals L O G I C : S e t n E X T (n = 1 to 8) are stored. The logic can only be controlled from the binary signal inputs that are configured for L O G I C : S e t n E X T if the corresponding reset input (L O G I C : R e s e t n E X T ) has also been configured for a binary signal input. If only one or neither of the two functions is configured, then this is interpreted as ‘Logic externally set’. If the input signals of the two binary signal inputs are implausible (such as when they both have a logic value of ‘1’), then the last plausible state remains stored in memory.

3-172

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-124

Control of logic operations via setting parameters or stored input signals

The signal LO G IC: T r igger n is a ‘triggering function’ that causes a 100 ms pulse to be issued.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-173

3 Operation (continued)

3-125

3-174

Setting options for programmable logic (shown here for output 1)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

The output signal of one equation can be processed as the input signal for another higher-order equation, and this makes it possible to have a sequence of interlinked Boolean equations. The output signal of each equation is fed to a separate timer stage that has two timer elements and a choice of operating modes. This offers the possibility of asg a freely configurable time characteristic to the output signal of each Boolean equation. In the Minimum time operating mode, the setting of timer stage t2 has no effect. Figures 3-126 to 3-130 show the time characteristics for the various timer stage operating modes.

3-126

Operating mode 1: Operate/release delay

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-175

3 Operation (continued)

3-127

Operating mode 2: Operate-delay/pulse duration

3-128

Operating mode 3: Operate/release delay, retriggerable

3-176

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3 Operation (continued)

3-129

Operating mode 4: Operate-delay/pulse duration, retriggerable

3-130

Operating mode 5: Minimum time

Through appropriate configuration it is possible to assign the function of a binary input signal to each output of a logic operation. The output of the logic operation then has the same effect as if the binary signal input to which this function has been assigned were triggered.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

3-177

3 Operation (continued)

3-131

3-178

Signal assignment to outputs of Boolean equations

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

4 Design

4 Design The P63x is available in different versions or design types and with different combinations of modules. Regardless of design, the P63x – like all other device types in the MiCOM Px30 system – is equipped with the standard local control . The local control is always located on the front of the device on the left and is covered with a tough film so that the specified degree of protection will be maintained. In addition to the essential control and display elements, a parallel display consisting of a total of 17 LED indicators is also incorporated into the local control . The meaning of the various LED indications is shown in plain text on a label strip. The PC interface (9-pin D-Sub female connector) is located under the lower covering flap of the local control . 4.1 Designs The P63x is available in the following case widths: ¨

P631 and P632 in case 40 T

¨

P633 in case 40 T or 84 T

¨

P634 in case 84 T

Each of these models is available in two case designs: ¨

Surface-mounted case

¨

Flush-mounted case

Both versions are connected in the same way via plug-in threaded terminal blocks. The threaded terminal blocks in the surface-mounted case are accessible from the front of the device after loosening the four crosshead screws on the sides (see Figure 4-1 Q), taking off the local control and hanging it in the slots in the left side (see Figure 4-1 R).

! The local control is connected to processor module P by a plug-in connecting cable. Do not bend the connecting cable. Hang the local control in the slots provided for this purpose in the left side .

The secondary circuit of operating current transformers must not be opened. If the secondary circuit of an operating current transformer is opened, there is the danger that resulting voltages may injure personnel or damage the insulation. The threaded terminal block for current transformer connection is not a shorting block. Therefore always short-circuit the current transformer before loosening the threaded terminals.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

4-1

4 Design (continued)

4-1

4-2

Surface-mounted case, removal of local control

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

4 Design (continued)

AREVA

4-2

Dimensional drawing for surface-mounted case 40 T (dimensions in mm)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

4-3

4 Design (continued)

AREVA

4-3

4-4

Dimensional drawing for surface-mounted case 84 T (dimensions in mm)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

4 Design (continued)

AREVA

4-4

Dimensional drawing for flush-mounted case 40 T, flush-mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame) (dimensions in mm)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

4-5

4 Design (continued)

AREVA

4-5

4-6

Dimensional drawing for flush-mounted case 40 T, flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame) (dimensions in mm)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

4 Design (continued)

AREVA

4-6

Dimensional drawing for flush-mounted case 84 T (dimensions in mm)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

4-7

4 Design (continued)

4.2 Modules The P63x is constructed of hardware modules that are standard throughout the system. The following table gives an overview of the modules relevant for the P63x (*: modules that are not shown in the location diagrams, ¡: optional, l: standard equipment, ¨: depending on order). Order No.

Module type and number

Index Description

Width

P631 P632 P633 P634

88511 - 4 - 0337 393 - 302 A 0336 426

H ff

Communication module 1 (for wire connection)

4T

¡

¡

¡

¡

88511 - 4 - 9650 108 - 301 A 9650 107

A ff

Communication module 1 (for glass fiber, ST connector)

4T

¡

¡

¡

¡

88511 - 4 - 0337 395 - 302 A 0336 428

G ff

Communication module 1 (for plastic fiber)

4T

¡

¡

¡

¡

88511 - 4 - 9650 455 - 301 A 9650 356

A ff

Communication module 2 (for wire connection)

4T

¡

¡

¡

¡

88511 - 4 - 9650 453 - 301 A 9650 354

A ff

Communication module 2 (for glass fiber, ST connector)

4T

¡

¡

¡

¡

88511 - 4 - 9650 454 - 301 A 9650 355

A ff

Communication module 2 (for plastic fiber)

4T

¡

¡

¡

¡

88511 - 4 - 9650 452 - 301 A 9650 353

A ff

Communication module 2 (IRIG-B only)

4T

¡

¡

¡

¡

B 0336 187

x

l

D ff * Bus module (digital) ( ) 40T case only

l

+

x

l() l (+)

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l l

l

¨

¨

B 0336 188

C ff * Bus module (digital) ( ) 84T case only

B 0337 870

D ff * Bus module (analog)

l

88511 - 4 - 9650 458 - 301 L 9650 194

A ff * Local control module

88511 - 4 - 0337 876 - 301 P 0337 875

B ff

Processor module, 25 MHz

4T

88511 - 4 - 9650 136 - 302 P 9650 135

C ff

Processor module, 33 MHz

4T

88511 - 4 - 9650 603 - 301 T 9650 310

A ff

Transformer module 6 x I (pin-term. conn.)

8T

88511 - 4 - 9650 604 - 301 T 9650 311

A ff

Transformer module 4 x I, 1 x V (pin-term. conn.)

8T

88511 - 4 - 9650 605 - 301 T 9650 312

B ff

Transformer module 3 x I (pin-term. conn.)

8T

88511 - 4 - 9650 606 - 301 T 9650 328

D ff

Transformer module 4 x I (pin-term. conn.)

8T

88511 - 4 - 9650 613 - 301 T 9650 324

A ff

Transformer module 6 x I (ring-term. conn.)

8T

88511 - 4 - 9650 614 - 301 T 9650 325

A ff

Transformer module 4 x I, 1 x V (ring-term. conn.)

8T

88511 - 4 - 9650 615 - 301 T 9650 326

B ff

Transformer module 3 x I (ring-term. conn.)

8T

88511 - 4 - 9650 616 - 301 T 9650 329

B ff

Transformer module 4 x I (ring-term. conn.)

8T

88511 - 4 - 0337 438 - 302 V 0337 437

E ff

Power supply module 24 V DC

4T

88511 - 4 - 0337 383 - 303 V 0337 191

M ff

Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC / 100 to 230 V AC

4T

88511 - 4 - 0337 401 - 301 X 0336 971

D ff

Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs and 8 output relays)

4T

88511 - 4 - 0337 384 - 301 X 0336 973

A ff

Binary I/O module (6 output relays)

4T

88511 - 4 - 0337 857 - 301 X 0337 612

A ff

Binary I/O module (24 binary inputs)

4T

88511 - 4 - 9650 821 - 301 X 9650 341

B ff

Binary I/O module (6 output relays, 4 of these with thyristor)

4T

88511 - 4 - 0337 680 - 301 Y 0337 406

A ff

Analog I/O module (+) 84T case only

4T

¨ ¨

¨ ¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨ ¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨ (+)

¨

¨

¨

1 Required for protocol as per IEC 60870-5-103; without IRIG-B 2 Required for protocol as per IEC 60870-5-103/IEC 870-5-101/Modbus/DNP 3.0; with IRIG-B

4-8

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

4 Design (continued)

The space available for the modules measures 4 H in height by 40 T or 84 T in width depending on the case width of the device (H = 44.45 mm, T = 5.08 mm). The location of the individual modules and the position of the threaded terminal blocks in the P63x are shown in the location diagrams on the following pages.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

4-9

4 Design (continued)

4-7

4-10

Location diagram P631 in case 40 T

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

4 Design (continued)

4-8

Location diagram P632 in case 40 T

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

4-11

4 Design (continued)

4-9

4-12

Location diagram P633 in case 40 T

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

4 Design (continued)

4-10 Location diagram P633 in case 84 T

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

4-13

4 Design (continued)

4-11 Location diagram P634 in case 84 T

4-14

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

5 Installation and Connection

5 Installation and Connection 5.1 Unpacking and Packing All P63x units are packaged separately in their own cartons and shipped inside outer packaging. Use special care when opening cartons and unpacking units, and do not use force. In addition, make sure to remove from the inside carton the ing Documents supplied with each individual unit. The design revision level of each module included in the unit when shipped can be determined from the list of components. This list should be carefully saved. After unpacking each unit, inspect it visually to make sure it is in proper mechanical condition. If the P63x needs to be shipped, both inner and outer packaging must be used. If the original packaging is no longer available, make sure that packaging conforms to DIN ISO 2248 specifications for a drop height ≤ 0.8 m. 5.2 Checking the Nominal Data and the Design Version The nominal data and design type of the P63x can be determined by consulting the type identification label (see Figure 5-1). One type identification label is located under the upper covering flap of the front and another is on the outside of the unit on a side . Another copy of the type identification label is affixed to the outside of the P63x packaging.

P634

P634-74991196-301-401-601-801

Unom / NE,nom = 50 ... 130 V UH,nom = 48

AREVA

5-1

Inom = 1A / 5 A IE,nom =

... 250 V DC, 100 ... 230 V AC

Made in

Diagram IEP,nom =

UE,nom = 24

Specification EN 60255-6 / IEC 255-6

P634.401

xx.yy

fnom = 50/60 Hz

... 250 V DC

CE

F 6.xxxxxx.y

P63x type identification label; illustrated for the example of a P634 with order number P634-74991196-301-401-601-801

The data shown on the type identification label include the nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom (‘UH,nom ’), the nominal input voltage Vin,nom (‘UE,nom ’). The P63x design version can be determined from the order number. A breakdown of the order number is given in Chapter 14 of this manual and in the ing Documents supplied with the unit.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

5-1

5 Installation and Connection (continued)

5.3 Location Requirements The P63x has been designed to conform to EN 60255-6. Therefore it is important when choosing the installation location to make sure that it provides the conditions specified in the Chapter on Technical Data. Several important conditions are listed below. Climatic conditions Ambient temperature:

-5 °C to +55 °C [+23°F to +131°F]

Air pressure:

800 to 1100 hPa

Relative humidity:

The relative humidity must not result in the formation of either condensed water or ice in the P63x.

Ambient air:

The ambient air must not be significantly polluted by dust, smoke, gases or vapors, or salt.

Vibration stress:

10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g

Mechanical conditions 2

Earthquake resistance: 5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 5 m/s , 3 x 1 cycle Electrical conditions for auxiliary voltage for the power supply Operating range:

0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,nom

Electromagnetic conditions Appropriate measures taken in substations must correspond to the state of the art (see, for example, the VDEW ring binder entitled "Schutztechnik" [Protective Systems], Section 8, June 1992 edition, which includes recommendations for measures to reduce transient overvoltage in secondary lines in high voltage substations).

5-2

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

5 Installation and Connection (continued)

5.4 Installation The dimensions and mounting dimensions for surface-mounted cases are given in Chapter 4. When the P63x is surface-mounted on a , the leads to the P63x are normally run along the front side of the mounting plane. If the wiring is to be in the back, an opening can be provided below (as shown in Figures 5-2 to 5-3) and above the surface-mounted case (equivalent to these figures).

5-2

Opening for running the connecting leads to the 40 T surface-mounted case (dimensions in mm)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

5-3

5 Installation and Connection (continued)

5-3

5-4

Opening for running the connecting leads to the 84 T surface-mounted case (dimensions in mm)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

5 Installation and Connection (continued)

The flush-mounted case is designed to be flush-mounted in a control . The dimensions and mounting dimensions are given in Chapter 4. When the P63x is mounted in a cabinet door, special sealing measures are necessary to provide the degree of protection required for the cabinet (IP 51). Figures 5-4 to 5-6 show the required cutouts for flush-mounted cases of different case widths.

5-4

cutout for the 40 T flush-mounted case, flush-mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame) (dimensions in mm)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

5-5

5 Installation and Connection (continued)

5-5

5-6

cutout for the 40 T flush-mounted case, flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame) (dimensions in mm)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

5 Installation and Connection (continued)

5-6

cutout for the 84 T flush-mounted case, flush-mount method 1 (dimensions in mm)

Prior to flush mounting of the P63x using flush-mount method 1, the local control needs to be removed in the following manner: ¨

Remove the upper and lower covering flap . (Turn the upper/lower flap by 180° up/down. Take hold of the middle part and bend the flap. The side fastenings can now be unhinged.)

¨

Undo the M3 bolts (see Figure 5-7 and 5-8).

¨

Take off the local control .

! The local control is connected to processor module P by a plug-in connecting cable. Note the correct position of the connector. Do not bend the connecting cable. Next, undo the lower M4 bolts completely and loosen the upper M4 bolts (see Figures 5-7 and 5-8). Now hang the P63x into the cutout from behind ed by the upper M4 bolts. Tighten all M4 bolts. Mount the local control .

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

5-7

5 Installation and Connection (continued)

5-7

5-8

Installation of the 40 T case without cover frame (flush-mount method 1)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

5 Installation and Connection (continued)

5-8

Installation of the 84 T case without cover frame (flush-mount method 1)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

5-9

5 Installation and Connection (continued)

Flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame) is only an option for the 40 T case width. When installing units in accordance with flush-mount method 2, proceed as follows:

5-9

5-10

¨

Remove the bolts shown in Figure 5-9, Q, and mount the enclosed angle bracket using these bolts.

¨

Slide the unit into the opening from the front.

¨

Fasten the unit to the control using the enclosed M6 bolts (see Figure 5-10).

¨

Assemble the cover frame and snap it onto the mounting bolts.

Mounting the angle brackets

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

5 Installation and Connection (continued)

5-10

Installation of the 40 T case with cover frame (flush-mount method 2)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

5-11

5 Installation and Connection (continued)

A rack mounting kit can be used to combine the 40 T case with a second subrack to form a 19” mounting rack (see Figure 5-11). The extra subrack can be another device or an empty subrack with a blind front . Fit the 19” mounting rack as shown in Figure 5-12.

5-11

5-12

Combining 40 T flush-mounted cases to form a 19" mounting rack

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

5 Installation and Connection (continued)

5-12

Fitting a 19" mounting rack

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

5-13

5 Installation and Connection (continued)

5.5 Protective Grounding The unit must be reliably grounded to meet protective equipment grounding requirements. The surface-mounted case is grounded using the appropriate bolt and nut as the ground connection. The flush-mounted case must be grounded in the area of the rear sidepieces at the location provided. The cross-sectional area of this ground conductor must also conform to applicable national standards. A minimum conductor 2 cross section of 2.5 mm is required. In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal on the power supply module (identified by the letters “PE” on the terminal connection diagram) is also required for proper operation of the unit. The cross-sectional area of this ground conductor must 2 also conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section of 1.5 mm is required. The grounding connection at both locations must be low-inductance, that is as short as possible.

5-13

5-14

Installing the PE terminal

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

5 Installation and Connection (continued)

5.6 Connection The P63x must be connected in accordance with the terminal connection diagram indicated on the type identification label. The terminal connection diagram is included among the ing Documents supplied with the unit. The terminal connection diagrams that apply to the P63x are also found in the Appendix to this manual. Copper leads having a 2.5 mm2 cross-section are generally suitable as the connecting leads between the current transformers and the P63x. Under certain conditions the connecting leads between the main current transformers and the P63x must be short and have a larger cross-section in order to handle the allowable burden on the main current 2 transformers. Copper leads having a 1.5 mm cross section are adequate for connecting the binary signal inputs, the signaling and triggering circuits, and the power supply input. All connections run into the system must always have a defined potential. Connections that are pre-wired but not used should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections. 5.6.1 Connecting the Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits Power supply Before connecting the auxiliary voltage VA for the P63x power supply, make sure that the nominal value of the auxiliary device voltage agrees with the nominal value of the auxiliary system voltage. Current-measuring inputs When connecting the system transformers, check to make sure the secondary nominal currents of the system and the unit agree.

The secondary circuit of operating current transformers must not be opened. If the secondary circuit of an operating current transformer is opened, there is the danger that resulting voltages may injure personnel or damage the insulation. The threaded terminal block for current transformer connection is not a shorting block. Therefore always short-circuit the current transformer before loosening the threaded terminals.

Connecting the measuring circuits The system current transformers must be connected in accordance with the standard schematic diagram shown in Figure 5-14. It is essential that the grounding configuration shown in the diagram be followed. If a connection is in opposition, this can be taken into when making the settings (see Chapter 7).

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

5-15

5 Installation and Connection (continued)

5-14

5-16

Standard schematic diagram for the P63x P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

5 Installation and Connection (continued)

Connecting the resistance thermometer A resistance thermometer can be connected if the unit is fitted with analog module Y. The analog I/O module input is designed for connection of a PT 100 resistance thermometer. The PT 100 should be connected using the 3-wire method (see Figure 5-15). No supply conductor compensation is required in this case.

5-15

Connecting a PT 100 using the 3-wire method

Connecting the binary inputs and output relays The binary inputs and output relays are freely configurable. The terminal connection diagrams include a polarity indication for the connection of the binary signal inputs. This is merely a recommendation.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

5-17

5 Installation and Connection (continued)

5.6.2 Connecting the IRIG-B Interface An optional IRIG-B interface is available for time synchronization. Connection is by means of a BNC plug. The connecting cable should be a coaxial cable with a 50 Ω surge impedance. 5.6.3 Connecting the Serial Interfaces PC interface The PC interface is provided in order to operate the unit from a personal computer (PC).

! The PC interface is not designed for permanent connection. Consequently the socket does not have the extra insulation from circuits connected to the system that is required per VDE 0106 Part 101.

Communication interface The communication interface is provided for permanent connection of the unit to a control system for substations or to a central substation unit. The unit is connected either by a special connector with optical fibers or an RS 485 interface with twisted copper wires, depending on the type of communication interface. The selection and assembly of an appropriately cut fiber-optic connecting cable requires special knowledge and expertise and is therefore not covered in this operating manual.

! The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the supply voltage for the unit is shut off.

The RS 485 interface must be connected to other units is by a 2-pole twisted conductor cable. Additional instructions for connecting the communication interface can be found in the manual entitled ‘Bus Technology’.

! Some design versions of communication module A have two transmission channels. The software of the P63x version –301 –401 –601 s channel 1 only.

5-18

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

6 Local Control

6 Local Control Local control All data required for operation of the protection device are entered from the local control , and the data important for system management are read out there as well. The following tasks can be handled from the local control : ¨

Readout and modification of settings

¨

Readout of cyclically updated measured operating data and logic state signals

¨

Readout of operating data logs and of monitoring signal logs

¨

Readout of event logs after overload situations, ground faults, or short-circuits in the power system

¨

Resetting of the device and triggering of additional control functions designed to testing and commissioning tasks

In addition, control via the PC interface is also possible. This requires a suitable PC and the operating program S&R-103 for Windows.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

6-1

6 Local Control (continued)

6.1 Display and Keypad Control and display elements The local control consists of an LCD display containing 4 x 20 alphanumeric characters, seven function keys positioned below the display, and 17 LED indicators.

TRIP

ALARM

OUT OF SERVICE

HEALTHY

C

= CLEAR = READ

G

= ENTER

C G

EDIT MODE

6-1

6-2

View of the local control

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

6 Local Control (continued)

Display levels All data relevant for operation as well as the device settings are displayed on two levels. At the level, data such as measured operating data are displayed in display s that provide a quick overview of the current state of the bay. The menu tree level below the level allows the to select all data points (settings, signals, measured variables, etc.) and to change them, if appropriate. To access a selected event recording from either the level or from any other point in the menu tree, press the READ key .

Measured Value s

Recordings Oper/Rec/OP_RC Operat. data record.

Voltage A-B prim. 20.7 kV Voltage B-C prim. 20.6 kV

Parameters

Operation

Events

Device ID

Cyclic measurements

Event counters

Configuration parameters

+

C

Function parameters

Global General functions

Control and testing Operating data recording

Measured fault data Event recordings

Measured operating data Physical state signals

Parameter subset 1

Logic state signals

Parameter subset ...

Menu tree 6-2

Display s and menu tree

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

6-3

6 Local Control (continued)

Display s The P63x can display ‘Measured Value s’ that can be called up at any given time, as appropriate. Selected measured values are displayed on the Measured Value s. The system condition determines which is called up (examples are the Operation and the Fault ). Only the Measured Value s relevant for the design version of the given unit and its associated range of functions are actually available. The Operation is always available. Menu tree and data points All data points (setting values, signals, measured values, etc.) are selected using a menu tree. As the navigates through the menu tree, the first two lines of the LCD display always show the branch of the menu tree that is active, as selected by the . The data points are accessed at the lowest level of a menu tree branch. They are displayed either with their plain text description or in numerically coded form, as selected by the . The value associated with the selected data point, its meaning, and its unit of measurement are displayed in the line below. List data points List data points are a special category. In contrast to other data points, list data points generally have more than one value element associated with them. This category includes tripping matrices, programmable logic functions, and event logs. When a list data point is selected, the symbol ‘↓‘ is displayed in the bottom line of the LCD display, indicating that there is another level below the displayed level. The individual value elements of a list data point are found at the lower level. In the case of a list parameter, the individual value elements are linked by operators such as ‘OR’.

6-4

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

6 Local Control (continued)

Keys ¨

‘Up’ and ‘Down’ Keys / Level: By pressing the ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys, the can switch between the Measured Value s. Menu Tree Level: By pressing the ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys, the can navigate up and down through the menu tree in a vertical direction. If the unit is in input mode, the ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys have a different function. Input mode: Parameter values can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE. By pressing the ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys, the can then change the parameter value. (‘Up’ key: the next higher value is selected. ‘Down’ key: the next lower value is selected.) With list parameters, the can change the logic operator of the value element by pressing the ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys.

¨

‘Left’ and ‘Right’ Keys Menu Tree Level: By pressing the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys, the can navigate through the menu tree in a horizontal direction. If the unit is in input mode, the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys have a different function. Input mode: Parameter values can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE. When the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys are pressed, the cursor positioned below one of the digits in the change-enabled value moves to the next digit to the right or left. (‘Left’ key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the left. ‘Right’ key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the right.) In the case of a list parameter, the can navigate through the list of items available for selection by pressing the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys.

¨

ENTER Key Level: By pressing the ENTER key at the level, the can go to the menu tree. Menu Tree Level: To enter the input mode, press the ENTER key. Press the ENTER key a second time to accept the changes as entered and leave the input mode. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE signals that the input mode is active.

¨

CLEAR Key C Press the CLEAR key to reset the LED indicators and clear all measured event data. The records in the recording memories are not affected by this action. Input mode: Press the CLEAR key to reject the changes entered and leave the input mode.

¨

READ Key Press the READ key to access a selected event recording from either the level or from any other point in the menu tree.

/

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

6-5

6 Local Control (continued)

The following charts, which show the individual control steps, specify the displays that can be changed by pressing specific keys. In these charts, a small black square to the right of the ENTER key indicates that the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on. The examples shown here do not necessarily apply to the device type described in this manual; they merely serve to illustrate the control principles involved. 6.2 Changing Between Display Levels After start-up of the device, the menu tree level is displayed. Control Step / Description Going from the menu tree level to the level

Control Action

Display

0 From the menu tree level, the can go to

Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Device on-line No (=off)

the level from any position within the menu tree.

1 First press the ‘up’ key and hold it down while pressing the CLEAR key.

+

C

Voltage C-A prim. 20.8 kV Current A prim. 415 A

Note: It is important to press the ‘up’ key first and release it last to avoid unintentional resetting of stored data. Going from the level to the menu tree level

0 Example of a Measured Value .

Voltage C-A prim. 20.8 kV Current A prim. 415 A

1 By pressing the ENTER key the can go

XX YYY

from the level to the menu tree level.

After the set return time has elapsed (setting in menu tree: “Par/Conf/LOC), the display will automatically switch to the level if a Measured Value has been configured.

6-6

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

6 Local Control (continued)

6.3 Illumination of the Display If none of the control keys is pressed, the display illumination will switch off once the set return time has elapsed (‘return time illumination’ setting in the menu tree at ‘Par/Conf/LOC’). The display illumination is turned on again by pressing one of the control keys. In this case the control action that is normally triggered by the key will not be executed. Reactivation of display illumination is also possible by way of a binary input. If continuous illumination is desired, the can set the ‘return time illumination’ function to ‘blocked’. 6.4 Control at the Level The measured values to be displayed on the Measured Value s can first be selected at ‘Par/Conf/LOC’ in the menu tree. The can select different sets of measured values for the Operation , the Overload , the Ground Fault , and the Fault . Only the Measured Value s relevant for the design version of the given unit and its associated range of functions are actually available. The Operation can be selected at any time. Please see ‘Setting a List Parameter’ for instructions regarding selection. If the has selected M A I N : W i t h o u t f u n c t i o n for a , then this will be inactive. The Measured Value s are called up in accordance with system conditions. If, for example, the unit detects an overload or a ground fault, then the corresponding Measured Value will be displayed as long as the overload or ground fault situation exists. If the unit detects a fault, then the Fault is displayed and remains active until the measured fault values are reset – by pressing the CLEAR key C , for example. Control Step / Description

Control Action

0 Up to six selected measured values can be

Voltage A-B prim. 20.7 kV Voltage B-C prim. 20.6 kV

displayed simultaneously on the .

1 If more than two measured values have been selected, the can scroll through the measured values page by page by pressing the ‘up’/’down’ keys. Likewise, the next page of the Measured Value can be displayed after the set hold time for the s has elapsed (set in the menu tree at ‘Par/Conf/LOC’).

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

Display

or

Voltage C-A prim. 20.8 kV Current A prim. 415 A

6-7

6 Local Control (continued)

6.5 6.5.1

Control at the Menu Tree Level Navigation in the Menu Tree

Folders and function groups All data points are grouped in function groups according to the function they are associated with and are also organized in different folders based on practical control requirements. The menu tree begins with the device type at the top and then branches out below into the three main folders entitled Parameters, Operation, and Events, which form the first folder level. Below the first folder level are two more folder levels, so that the entire folder structure consists of three main branches and a maximum of three folder levels. At the bottom of each branch of folders, below the folder levels, are the various function groups in which the individual data points are combined.

Unit type

Folder plane 1

PX yyy

PX yyy Parameters

Folder plane 2

Folder plane 3

Function groups

Data points

6-3

6-8

PX yyy Operation

PX yyy Events

Oper/ Cyclic measurements

Oper/Cycl/ Meas. operating data

Oper/Cycl/Data/ MAIN

Oper/Cycl/Data/MAIN Date 01.01.99 dd.mm.yy

Basic menu tree structure

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

6 Local Control (continued)

6.5.2

Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode

The display on the local control can be switched between address mode and plain text mode. In the address mode the display shows setting parameters, signals, and measured values in numerically coded form, that is, as addresses. In plain text mode the setting parameters, signals, and measured values are displayed in the form of plain text descriptions. In either case, control is guided by the menu tree. The active branch of the menu tree is displayed in plain text in both modes. In the following examples, the display is shown in only plain text mode. Control Step / Description

Control Action

0 In this example, the switches from plain

Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Device on-line No (=off)

text mode to address mode.

1 To switch from address mode to plain text

C

+

mode or vice versa, press the CLEAR key C or and either the ‘left’ key or the ‘right’ key simultaneously. This can be done at any point C + in the menu tree.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

Display

Par/Func/Glob/MAIN 003.030 0

6-9

6 Local Control (continued)

6.5.3

Change-Enabling Function

Although it is possible to select any data point in the menu tree and read the associated value by pressing the keys, it is not possible to switch directly to the input mode. This safeguard prevents unintended changes in the settings. There are two ways to enter the input mode. Global change-enabling function ¨

To activate the global change-enabling function, set the ‘Param. change enabl.’ parameter to ‘Yes’ (menu tree: ‘Oper/CtrlTest/LOC’). The change can only be made after the has been entered. Thereafter, all further changes – with the exception of specially protected control actions (see the section entitled ‘-Protected Control Actions’) – are enabled without entering the .

¨

input prior to any parameter change.

Selective change-enabling function

The consists of a pre-defined sequential key combination entered within a specific time interval. The following example is based on the factory-set . If the has been changed by the (see the section entitled ‘Changing the ’), the following description (next page) will apply analogously.

6-10

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

6 Local Control (continued)

Control Step / Description

Control Action

0 In the menu tree ‘Oper/CtrlTest/LOC’ select the ‘Param. change enabl.’ parameter.

Display

Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. change enabl. No

1 Press the ENTER key.

Eight asterisks (*) appear in the fourth line of the display.

Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. change enabl. No ********

2 Press the following keys in sequence:

Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. change enabl. No *

‘Left’

‘Right’

‘Up’

‘Down’ The display will change as shown in the column on the right. Now press the ENTER key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This indicates that the setting can now be changed by pressing the ‘up’ or ’down’ keys.

Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. change enabl. No *

Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. change enabl. No * Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. change enabl. No * Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. change enabl. No

If an invalid has been entered, the display shown in Step 1 appears.

3 Change the setting to ‘Yes’.

Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. change enabl. Yes

4 Press the ENTER key again.

Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. change enabl. Yes

The LED indicator will go out. The unit is enabled for further parameter changes.

The same procedure applies to any parameter change unless the global change-enabling function has been activated. This method is recommended for a single parameter change only. If several settings are to be changed, then the global change-enabling function is preferable. In the following examples, the global change-enabling function has been activated.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

6-11

6 Local Control (continued)

Automatic return The automatic return function prevents the change-enabling function from remaining activated after a change of settings has been completed. Once the set return time (menu tree ‘Par/Conf/LOC’) has elapsed, the change-enabling function is automatically deactivated, and the display switches to a Measured Value corresponding to the current system condition. The return time is restarted when any of the control keys is pressed. Forced return The return described above can be forced from the local control by first pressing the ‘up’ key and then holding it down while pressing the CLEAR key. Note:

It is important to press the ‘up’ key first and release it last in order to avoid unintentional deletion of stored data.

Even when the change-enabling function is activated, not all parameters can be changed. For some settings it is also necessary to disable the protective function (menu tree: Par/Func/Glob/MAIN, “Protection enabled”). Such settings include the configuration parameters, by means of which the device interfaces can be adapted to the system. The following entries in the ”Change” column of the address list (see appendix) indicate whether values can be changed or not: ¨

"on": The value can be changed even when the protective function is enabled.

¨

"off": The value can only be changed when the protective function is disabled.

¨

"-": The value can be read out but cannot be changed.

The device is factory-set so that the protective function is disabled.

6-12

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

6 Local Control (continued)

6.5.4

Changing Parameters

If all the conditions for a value change are satisfied (see above), the desired setting can be entered. Control Step / Description

Control Action

0 Example of a display.

Display

Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. change enabl. Yes

In this example the change-enabling function is activated and the protective function is disabled, if necessary.

1 Select the desired parameter by pressing

Par/Conf/LOC Autom. return time 50000 s

the keys.

2 Press the ENTER key.

The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. The last digit of the value is highlighted by a cursor (underlined).

Par/Conf/LOC Autom. return time 50000 s

3 Press the ‘left’ or ’right’ keys to move the

Par/Conf/LOC Autom. return time 50000 s

cursor to the left or right.

4 Change the value highlighted by the cursor

Par/Conf/LOC Autom. return time 50010 s

by pressing the ‘up’ and ’down’ keys. In the meantime the device will continue to operate with the old value.

5 Press the ENTER key.

Par/Conf/LOC Autom. return time 50010 s

The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out and the device will now operate with the new value. Press the keys to select another setting parameter for a value change.

6 If you wish to reject the new setting while you are still entering it (LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR key. The LED indicator will go out and the device will continue to operate with the old value. A further parameter can be selected for a value change by pressing the keys.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

C

Par/Conf/LOC Autom. return time 50000 s

6-13

6 Local Control (continued)

6.5.5

Setting a List Parameter

Using list parameters, the is able to select several elements from a list in order to perform tasks such as defining a trip command or defining the measured values that will be displayed on Measured Value s. The maximum possible number ’m’ that can be selected out of the total number ’n’ of the set is given in the address list in the ’Remarks’ column. As a rule, the selected elements are linked by an ‘OR’ operator. Other operators (NOT, OR, AND, NOT OR and NOT AND) are available in the LOGIC function group for linking the selected list items. In this way binary signals and binary input signals can be processed in a Boolean equation tailored to meet requirements. For the DNP 3.0 communication protocol, the defines the class of a parameter instead of asg operators. The definition of a trip command shall be used here as an example to illustrate the setting of a list parameter. Control Step / Description

0 Select a list parameter (in this example, the parameter 'Fct.assign.trip cmd.' at ‘Par/Func/Glob/ MAIN’ in the menu tree). The down arrow (â) indicates that a list parameter has been selected.

Display

Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd.

1 Press the ‘down’ key.

The first function and the first selected signal will appear in the third and fourth lines, respectively. The symbol ‘#01’ in the display indicates the first item of the selection. If ‘MAIN: Without function’ appears for the first item, then this means that no function assignment has been made yet.

Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd. #01 DIST Trip zone 1

2 Scroll through the list of assigned functions

Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd. OR #02 DIST Trip zone 2

by pressing the ‘right’ and ’left’ keys.

Once the end of the list is reached, the display shown on the right will appear.

3 Press the ENTER key at any position in the list. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up.

4 Scroll through the assignable functions by pressing the ‘right’ and ‘left’ keys in the input mode.

5 Select the operator or the class using the ‘up’ and ’down’ keys. In this particular case, only the ‘OR’ operator can be selected. There is no limitation on the selection of classes.

6-14

Control Action

Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd. #05 MAIN ????? Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd. #02 DIST Trip zone 2 Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd. #02 DIST Trip zone 4 Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd. OR #02 DIST Trip zone 4

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

6 Local Control (continued)

Control Step / Description

6 Press the ENTER key.

The LED indicator will go out. The assignment has been made. The unit will now operate with the new settings.

Control Action C

Display

Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd. OR #02 DIST Trip zone 4

If no operator has been selected, the ‘OR’ operator is always assigned automatically when the ENTER key is pressed. There is no automatic assignment of classes.

7 Press the ‘up’ key to exit the list at any point

Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd.

in the list.

8 If you wish to reject the new setting while you are still entering it (LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR key. The LED indicator will go out.

C

Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd. OR #02 DIST Trip zone 2

Deleting a List Parameter If ‘MAIN: Without function’ is assigned to a given item, then all the following items are deleted. If this occurs for item #01, everything is deleted.

6.5.6

Memory Readout

After a memory is entered, the memory can be read out at the entry point. It is not necessary to activate the change-enabling function or even to disable the protective function. Inadvertent clearing of a memory at the entry point is not possible. The following memories are available: ¨

In the menu tree ‘Oper/Rec/OP_RC’: Operating data memory

¨

In the menu tree ‘Oper/Rec/MT_RC’: Monitoring signal memory

¨

Event memories n

In the menu tree ‘Events/Rec/FT_RC’: Fault memories 1 to 8

n

In the menu tree ‘Events/Rec/OL_RC’: Overload memories 1 to 8

n

In the menu tree ‘Events/Rec/GF_RC’: Ground fault memories 1 to 8

Not all of these event memories are present in each unit. A given unit may contain only some of them or even none at all, depending on the device type.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

6-15

6 Local Control (continued)

Readout of the operating data memory The operating data memory contains stored signals of actions that occur during operation, such as the enabling or disabling of a device function. A maximum of 100 entries is possible, after which the oldest entry is overwritten. Control Step / Description

0 Select the entry point for the operating data memory.

1 Press the ‘down’ key to enter the operating data memory. The latest entry is displayed.

2 Press the ‘left’ key repeatedly to display the entries one after the other in chronological order. Once the end of the operating data memory has been reached, pressing the ‘left’ key again will have no effect.

3 Press the ‘right’ key to display the previous

Display

Oper/Rec/OP_RC Operat. data record.

Oper/Rec/OP_RC 01.01.97 11:33 ARC Enabled No Oper/Rec/OP_RC 01.01.97 10:01 PSIG Enabled Yes

entry.

Oper/Rec/OP_RC 01.01.97 11:33 ARC Enabled No

4 Press the ‘up’ key at any point within the

Oper/Rec/OP_RC Operat. data record.

operating data memory to return to the entry point.

6-16

Control Action

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

6 Local Control (continued)

Readout of the monitoring signal memory If the unit detects an internal fault in the course of internal self-monitoring routines or if it detects power system conditions that prevent flawless functioning of the unit, then an entry is made in the monitoring signal memory. A maximum of 30 entries is possible. After that an ‘overflow’ signal is issued. Control Step / Description

0 Select the entry point for the monitoring signal memory.

1 Press the ‘down’ key to enter the monitoring signal memory. The oldest entry is displayed.

2 Press the ‘right’ key repeatedly to display the entries one after the other in chronological order. If more than 30 monitoring signals have been entered since the last reset, the ‘overflow’ signal is displayed as the last entry.

3 Press the ‘left’ key to display the previous entry.

4 If the ‘down’ key is held down while a monitoring signal is being displayed, the following additional information will be displayed: First:

Time when the signal first occurred

Active:

The fault is still being detected (Yes) or is no longer detected (No) by the self-monitoring function.

Reset:

The fault was no longer detected by the self-monitoring function and has been reset (Yes).

Number:

The signal occurred x times.

5 Press the ‘up’ key at any point within the monitoring signal memory to return to the entry point.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

Control Action

Display

Oper/Rec/MT_RC Mon. signal record.

Mon. signal record. 01.01.97 13:33 SFMON Checksum error param

Mon. signal record. 01.01.97 10:01 SFMON Exception oper. syst.

Mon. signal record. 01.01.97 13:33 SFMON Checksum error param

Mon. signal record. 01.01.97 13:33 SFMON Checksum error param

First: 13:33:59.744 Active: Yes Reset: No Number: 5

Betr/Aufz/ÜW_AZ Überwach.protokoll

6-17

6 Local Control (continued)

Readout of the event memories There are eight event memories for each type of event. The latest event is stored in event memory 1, the previous one in event memory 2, and so forth. Readout of event memories is illustrated using the fault memory as an example. Control Step / Description

0 Select the entry point for the first fault memory, for example. If the memory contains entries, the third line of the display will show the date and time the fault began. If the third line is blank, then there are no entries in the fault memory.

1 Press the ‘down’ key to enter the fault memory. First, the fault number is shown. In this example it is the 22nd fault since the last reset.

2 Press the ‘right’ key repeatedly to see first the measured fault data and then the binary signals in chronological order. The time shown in the second line is the relative time, measured from the onset of the fault, at which the value was measured or the binary signal started or ended. Once the end of the fault has been reached (after the ‘right’ key has been pressed repeatedly), pressing the ‘right’ key again will have no effect.

3 Press the ‘left’ key to see the previous measured value or the previous signal.

4 Press the ‘up’ key at any point within the fault memory to return to the entry point.

6-18

Control Action

Display

Events/Rec/FT_RC Fault recording 1 01.01.99 10:00:33

Fault recording 1 FT_RC Event 22

Fault recording 1 200 ms FT_DA Running time 0.17 s

Fault recording 1 0 ms FT_RC Record. in progress Start

Fault recording 1 241 ms FT_RC Record. in progress End Fault recording 1 0 ms FT_RC Record. in progress Start Events/Rec/FT_RC Fault recording 1 01.01.99 10:00:33

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

6 Local Control (continued)

6.5.7

Resetting

All information memories – including the event memories and the monitoring signal memory – and also the LED indicators can be reset manually. In addition, the LED indicators are automatically cleared and initialized at the onset of a new fault – provided that the appropriate operating mode has been selected – so that they always indicate the latest fault. The LED indicators can also be reset manually by pressing the CLEAR key, which is always possible in the standard control mode. This action also triggers an LED indicator test and an LCD display test. The event memories are not affected by this action, so that inadvertent deletion of the records associated with the reset signal pattern is reliably prevented. Because of the ring structure of the event memories, the data for eight consecutive events are updated automatically so that manual resetting should not be necessary, in principle. If the event memories need to be cleared completely, however, as would be the case after functional testing, this can be done after selecting the appropriate parameter. The resetting procedure will now be illustrated using the fault memory as an example. In this example the global change-enabling function has already been activated. Control Step / Description

Control Action

Display

0 Select the reset parameter.

Line 3 of the display shows the number of faults since the last reset, 10 in this example.

Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC Reset recording 10

1 Press the ENTER key.

The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up.

Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC Reset recording 10 Don't execute

2 Press the ‘up’ or ’down’ keys to change the

Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC Reset recording 10 Execute

setting to ‘Execute’.

3 Press the ENTER key.

Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC Reset recording 0

The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out. The value in line 3 is reset to ‘0’.

4 To cancel the intended clearing of the fault recordings after leaving the standard control mode (the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE LED is on), press the CLEAR key. The LED indicator will go out, and the fault recordings remain stored in the device unchanged. Any parameter can be selected again for a value change by pressing the keys.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

C

Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC Reset recording 10

6-19

6 Local Control (continued)

6.5.8

-Protected Control Actions

Certain actions from the local control (such as a manual trip command for testing purposes) can only be carried out by entering a . This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when the global change-enabling function has been activated. The consists of a pre-defined sequential key combination entered within a specific time interval. The following example illustrates the -protected output of a manual trip command using the factory-set . If the has been changed by the (see the section entitled ‘Changing the ’), the following description will apply analogously. Control Step / Description

Control Action

0 In the menu tree ‘Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN’,

Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. trip cmd. Don't execute

select the parameter ‘Man. trip cmd. ’.

1 Press the ENTER key.

Eight asterisks (*) appear in the fourth line of the display.

2 Press the following keys in sequence: ‘left’

‘right’

‘up’

‘down’ The display will change as shown in the column on the right. Now press the ENTER key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This indicates that the setting can now be changed by pressing the ‘up’ or ’down’ keys.

3 Change the setting to ‘Execute’.

6-20

Display

C

Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. trip cmd. Don't execute ******** Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. trip cmd. Don't execute *

Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. trip cmd. Don't execute * Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. trip cmd. Don't execute * Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. trip cmd Don't execute * Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. trip cmd. Don't execute

Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. trip cmd. Execute

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

6 Local Control (continued)

Control Step / Description

Control Action

4 Press the ENTER key again.

Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. trip cmd. Don't execute

The LED indicator will go out. The unit will execute the command.

5 As long as the LED indicator labeled EDIT

C

Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. trip cmd. Don't execute

MODE is on, the control action can be terminated by pressing the CLEAR key. The LED indicator will go out.

6.5.9

Display

Changing the

The consists of a combination of keys that must be entered sequentially within a specific time interval. The ‘left’,’right’, ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys may be used to define the and represent the numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4, respectively:

3 1

2 4

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

6-21

6 Local Control (continued)

The can be changed by the at any time. The procedure for this change is described below. The starting point is the factory-set . Control Step / Description

0 In the menu tree ‘Par/Conf/LOC’ select the parameter ‘’.

Control Action

Display

Par/Conf/LOC ********

1 Press the ENTER key.

Eight asterisks appear in the fourth line of the display.

Par/Conf/LOC ******** ********

2 Press the ‘left’, ’right’, ‘up’ and ’down’ keys to

Par/Conf/LOC ******** *

enter the valid . The display will change as shown in the column on the right.

Par/Conf/LOC ******** *

Par/Conf/LOC ******** *

Par/Conf/LOC ******** *

3 Now press the ENTER key.

The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. The third line shows an underscore character ( _ ) as the prompt for entering a new .

Par/Conf/LOC _

4 Enter the new , which in this

Par/Conf/LOC *

example is done by pressing the ‘up’ key followed by the ‘down’ key.

Par/Conf/LOC **

5 Press the ENTER key again.

Asterisks appear in the third line, and a cursor (underscore) in the fourth line prompts the to enter the new again.

6-22

Par/Conf/LOC ** _

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

6 Local Control (continued)

Control Step / Description

Control Action

6 Re-enter the .

Display

Par/Conf/LOC ** *

Par/Conf/LOC ** **

7a Press the ENTER key again.

If the has been re-entered correctly, the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE goes out and the display appears as shown on the right. The new is now valid.

Par/Conf/LOC ********

7b If the has been re-entered

Par/Conf/LOC ** _

incorrectly, the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE remains on and the display shown on the right appears. The needs to be re-entered. It is also possible to cancel the change in by pressing the CLEAR key (see Step 8).

8 The change in can be canceled at any time before Step 7 by pressing the CLEAR key. If this is done, the original continues to be valid.

C

Par/Conf/LOC ********

Operation from the local control without protection is also possible. To select this option, immediately press the ENTER key a second time in steps 4 and 6 without entering anything else. This will configure the local control without protection, and no control actions involving changes will be possible until the global change-enabling function has been activated (see the section entitled ‘ChangeEnabling Function’).

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

6-23

6 Local Control (continued)

If the configured has been forgotten, it can be called up on the LCD display as described below. The procedure involves turning the device off and then on again. Control Step / Description

Control Action

Display

0 Turn off the device.

1

Turn the device on again. At the very beginning of device startup, press the four directional keys (‘left’, ‘right’, ‘up’ and ‘down’) at the same time and hold them down.

2

When this condition is detected during startup, the is displayed.

TEST

1234

3

After the four keys are released, startup will continue.

6-24

TEST

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

7 Settings

7 Settings 7.1 Parameters The P63x must be adjusted to the system and to the protected equipment by means of appropriate settings. This section gives instructions for determining the settings located in the folder entitled ‘Parameters’ in the menu tree. The sequence in which the settings are listed and described in this chapter corresponds to their sequence in the menu tree. The Address List in the Appendix lists all parameters, along with setting ranges, incrementation, or selection tables. The units are supplied with the default setting (underlined value in the “Range of Values” column in the Address List). The default settings given in the Address List are also activated after a cold restart. The P63x is blocked in that case. All settings must be reentered after a cold restart.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7-1

7 Settings (continued)

7.1.1 Device Identification Device

DVICE: Device type

000 000

The device type is displayed. This display cannot be altered. DVICE: Software version

002 120

Software version for the device. This display cannot be altered. DVICE: SW date

002 122

Date the software was created. This display cannot be altered. DVICE: SW version communic.

002 103

Software version of the communication unit. This display cannot be altered. DVICE: Language version

002 123

Language version for the device. This display cannot be altered. DVICE: Text vers.data model

002 121

Using the ‘text replacement tool’ provided by the Operating Program (DP 362 or S&R-103), the can change the parameter descriptors (plain text designations) and them into the device. These customized data models contain an identifier defined by the while preparing the data model. This identifier is displayed at this point in the menu tree. Standard data models have the identifier ‘0’ (factory-set default). DVICE: F number

002 124

The F number is the serial number of the device. This display cannot be altered. DVICE: Order No.

000 001

Order number of the device. This number cannot be altered by the .

7-2

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

DVICE: Order ext. No. 1 DVICE: Order ext. No. 2 DVICE: Order ext. No. 3 DVICE: Order ext. No. 4 DVICE: Order ext. No. 5 DVICE: Order ext. No. 6 DVICE: Order ext. No. 7 DVICE: Order ext. No. 8 DVICE: Order ext. No. 9 DVICE: Order ext. No. 10 DVICE: Order ext. No. 11 DVICE: Order ext. No. 12 DVICE: Order ext. No. 13 DVICE: Order ext. No. 14 DVICE: Order ext. No. 15 DVICE: Order ext. No. 16 DVICE: Order ext. No. 17 DVICE: Order ext. No. 18 DVICE: Order ext. No. 19 DVICE: Order ext. No. 20 DVICE: Order ext. No. 21 DVICE: Order ext. No. 22 DVICE: Order ext. No. 23 DVICE: Order ext. No. 24 DVICE: Order ext. No. 25 DVICE: Order ext. No. 26 DVICE: Order ext. No. 27

000 003 000 004 000 005 000 006 000 007 000 008 000 009 000 010 000 011 000 012 000 013 000 014 000 015 000 016 000 017 000 018 000 019 000 020 000 021 000 022 000 023 000 024 000 025 000 026 000 027 000 028 000 029

The order extension number for the device.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7-3

7 Settings (continued)

DVICE: Module var. slot 1 DVICE: Module var. slot 2 DVICE: Module var. slot 3 DVICE: Module var. slot 4 DVICE: Module var. slot 5 DVICE: Module var. slot 6 DVICE: Module var. slot 7 DVICE: Module var. slot 8 DVICE: Module var. slot 9 DVICE: Module var. slot 10 DVICE: Module var. slot 11 DVICE: Module var. slot 12 DVICE: Module var. slot 13 DVICE: Module var. slot 14 DVICE: Module var. slot 15 DVICE: Module var. slot 16 DVICE: Module var. slot 17 DVICE: Module var. slot 18 DVICE: Module var. slot 19 DVICE: Module var. slot 20 DVICE: Module var. slot 21

086 050 086 051 086 052 086 053 086 054 086 055 086 056 086 057 086 058 086 059 086 060 086 061 086 062 086 063 086 064 086 065 086 066 086 067 086 068 086 069 086 070

Stock number for the module fitted in the respective slot. The display always shows the actual component configuration at any given time. DVICE: Module vers. slot 1 DVICE: Module vers. slot 2 DVICE: Module vers. slot 3 DVICE: Module vers. slot 4 DVICE: Module vers. slot 5 DVICE: Module vers. slot 6 DVICE: Module vers. slot 7 DVICE: Module vers. slot 8 DVICE: Module vers. slot 9 DVICE: Module vers. slot 10 DVICE: Module vers. slot 11 DVICE: Module vers. slot 12 DVICE: Module vers. slot 13 DVICE: Module vers. slot 14 DVICE: Module vers. slot 15 DVICE: Module vers. slot 16 DVICE: Module vers. slot 17 DVICE: Module vers. slot 18 DVICE: Module vers. slot 19 DVICE: Module vers. slot 20 DVICE: Module vers. slot 21

086 193 086 194 086 195 086 196 086 197 086 198 086 199 086 200 086 201 086 202 086 203 086 204 086 205 086 206 086 207 086 208 086 209 086 210 086 211 086 212 086 213

Index letter specifying the version of the module fitted in the respective slot.

7-4

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

DVICE: Variant of module A

086 047

Stock number of module A in this design version. DVICE: Variant of module L

086 048

Stock number of module L in this design version. DVICE: Version of module A

086 190

Index letter specifying the version of module A. DVICE: Version of module L

086 191

Index letter specifying the version of module L. DVICE: Variant of module B

086 049

Item number of digital bus module B in this design version. DVICE: Version of module B

086 192

Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B. DVICE: Variant module B (a)

086 046

Stock number of the analog bus module B in this design version. DVICE: Version module B (a)

086 189

Index letter specifying the version of the analog bus module B. DVICE: Customer ID data 1 DVICE: Customer ID data 2 DVICE: Customer ID data 3 DVICE: Customer ID data 4 DVICE: Customer ID data 5 DVICE: Customer ID data 6 DVICE: Customer ID data 7 DVICE: Customer ID data 8

000 040 000 041 000 042 000 043 000 044 000 045 000 046 000 047

Set your numerically coded data here for your records. DVICE: Device ID

000 035

ID code for use by the operating software (DP 362 or S&R-103). Further instructions on this setting are given in the description of the respective operating program. DVICE: Substation ID

000 036

ID code for use by the PC programs for operating and setting (FPC, DP 362 or S&R-103). Further instructions on this setting are given in the description of the respective operating program. DVICE: Feeder ID

000 037

ID code for use by the PC programs for operating and setting (FPC, DP 362 or S&R-103). Further instructions on this setting are given in the description of the respective operating program. DVICE: Device 1 DVICE: Device 2

000 048 000 049

ID code for use by the PC programs for operating and setting (FPC, DP 362 or S&R-103). Further instructions on this setting are given in the description of the respective operating program.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7-5

7 Settings (continued)

7.1.2 Configuration Parameters Local control

LOC: Language (tongue)

003 020

Language in which texts will be displayed on the local control . LOC: Decimal delimiter

003 021

Character to be used as decimal delimiter on the local control . LOC:

003 035

The to be used for changing settings from the local control can be defined here. Further information on changing the is given in Chapter 6. LOC: Assignment read key

080 110

Selection of the event recording to be displayed when the read key is pressed. LOC: Fct. Operation

053 007

Fig. 3-2

053 005

Fig. 3-4

053 003

Fig. 3-3

031 075

Fig. 3-2

Definition of the values to be displayed on the Measured Value referred to as the Operation . LOC: Fct. Overload Definition of the values to be displayed on the Overload . LOC: Fct. Fault Definition of the values to be displayed on the Fault . LOC: Hold-time for s

Setting for the time period for which a is displayed before the unit switches to the next . This setting is only relevant if more values are selected for display than can be shown on the LCD display. LOC: Autom. return time

003 014

Fig. 3-2

If the does not press a key on the local control during this set time period, the change-enabling function is deactivated and the Operation is called up provided that values have been assigned to the Operation and that there is no event. LOC: Return time illumin.

003 023

If the does not press a key on the local control during this set time period, then the backlighting of the LCD display is switched off.

7-6

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

PC link

PC:

Name of manufacturer

003 183

Fig. 3-5

003 068

Fig. 3-5

003 069

Fig. 3-5

Setting for the name of the device manufacturer. Note: This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility. PC: PC:

Bay address Device address

Bay and device addresses are used to address the device in communication via the PC interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses. PC:

Baud rate

003 081

Fig. 3-5

003 181

Fig. 3-5

Baud rate of the PC interface. PC:

Parity bit

Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the PC connected to the P63x. PC:

Spontan. sig. enable

003 187

Fig. 3-5

Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the PC interface. PC:

Transm.enab.cycl.dat

003 084

Fig. 3-5

Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the PC interface. PC:

Cycl. data ILS tel.

003 185

Fig. 3-5

003 055

Fig. 3-5

Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a -defined telegram via the PC interface. PC:

Delta V

A measured voltage value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. PC:

Delta I

003 056

Fig. 3-5

A measured current value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. PC:

Delta f

003 057

Fig. 3-5

The measured frequency value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the set delta from the last measured value transmitted. PC:

Delta meas.v.ILS tel

003 155

Fig. 3-5

003 058

Fig. 3-5

The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. PC:

Delta t

All measured data are transmitted again through the PC interface after this time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been triggered by the other delta conditions.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7-7

7 Settings (continued)

Communication link

Note The abbreviation ASDU stands for ‘Application Service Data Unit’. COMM1: Function group COMM1

056 026

Canceling function group COMM1 or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. COMM1: General enable

003 170

Fig. 3-7, 3-8,3-9, 3-10,3-11

003 215

Fig. 3-6

003 216

Fig. 3-6

003 217

Fig. 3-6

003 220

Fig. 3-6

003 231

Fig. 3-6

003 167

Fig. 3-6

Disabling or enabling the communication interface. COMM1: Basic IEC870-5 enabl Common settings for enabling all protocols based on IEC 870-5-xxx. COMM1: Addit. -101 enable Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the protocol based on IEC 870-5-101. COMM1: Addit. ILS enable Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the ILS protocol. COMM1: MODBUS enable Enabling settings relevant for the MODBUS protocol. COMM1: DNP3 enable Enabling settings relevant for the DNP 3.0 protocol. COMM1: Communicat. protocol

Select the communication protocol that shall be used for the communication interface. COMM1: MODBUS prot. variant

003 214

Fig. 3-10

Select between the AREVA D and the AREVA variant of the MODBUS protocol. Note:

This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.

COMM1: Line idle state

003 165

Fig. 3-7, 3-8,3-9, 3-10,3-11

003 071

Fig. 3-7, 3-8,3-9, 3-10,3-11

003 171

Fig. 3-7, 3-8,3-9, 3-10,3-11

Setting for the line idle state indication. COMM1: Baud rate Baud rate of the communication interface. COMM1: Parity bit

Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control unit connected to the P63x. COMM1: Dead time monitoring

003 176

Fig. 3-7, 3-8,3-9, 3-10,3-11

The P63x monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no pause within a telegram exceeds 33 bits. This monitoring function can be disabled if it is not required. Note: 7-8

This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

COMM1: Mon. time polling

003 202

Fig. 3-7, 3-8,3-9, 3-10,3-11

The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be less than the time set here. COMM1: Octet comm. address

003 072

Fig. 3-7, 3-8,3-9,3-11

The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses. Note:

The former designation for 'COMM1: Octet comm. address' was 'ILSA: Bay address'

COMM1: Oct.2 comm.addr.DNP3

003 240

Fig. 3-11

In the DNP 3.0 protocol, a 16 bit address is used to identify the devices. The address set here is the higher-order octet. The address set under C O M M 1 : O c t e t c o m m . a d d r e s s is the lower-order octet of the DNP address. Note:

This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.

COMM1: Test monitor on

003 166

Fig. 3-7, 3-8,3-9, 3-10,3-11

003 161

Fig. 3-7, 3-8,3-9

003 073

Fig. 3-7, 3-8,3-9

Setting specifying whether data shall be recorded for service activities. COMM1: Name of manufacturer Setting for the name of the device manufacturer. Notes: This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility. This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is set. COMM1: Octet address ASDU

The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses. Notes: The former designation for 'COMM1: Octet address ASDU' was 'ILSA: Device address'. This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is set. COMM1: Spontan. sig. enable

003 177

Fig. 3-7, 3-8,3-9

Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication interface. Note:

This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is set.

COMM1: Transm.enab.cycl.dat

003 074

Fig. 3-7, 3-8,3-9

Enabling of cyclic transmission of measured values via the communication interface. Note:

This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is set.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7-9

7 Settings (continued)

COMM1: Cycl. data ILS tel.

003 175

Fig. 3-7, 3-8,3-9

Selection of the measured values transmitted in a -defined telegram via the communication interface. Note:

This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is set.

COMM1: Delta V

003 050

Fig. 3-7, 3-8,3-9

A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. Note:

This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is set.

COMM1: Delta I

003 051

Fig. 3-7, 3-8,3-9

A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. Note:

This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is set.

COMM1: Delta f

003 052

Fig. 3-7, 3-8,3-9

The measured frequency is transmitted via the communication interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. Note:

This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is set.

COMM1: Delta meas.v.ILS tel

003 150

Fig. 3-7, 3-8,3-9

003 053

Fig. 3-7, 3-8,3-9

The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. Note:

This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is set.

COMM1: Delta t

All measured data are transmitted again through the communication interface after this time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been triggered by the other delta conditions. Note:

This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is set.

COMM1: Contin. general scan

003 077

Fig. 3-7, 3-8,3-9

A continuous or background general scan means that the P63x transmits all settings, signals, and monitoring signals through the communication interface during slow periods when there is not much activity. This ensures that there will be data consistency with a connected control system. The time to be set defines the minimum time difference between two telegrams. Note:

This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is set.

COMM1: Comm. address length

003 201

Fig. 3-8

003 200

Fig. 3-8

003 192

Fig. 3-8

Setting for the communication address length. Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set. COMM1: Octet 2 comm. addr. Setting for the length of the higher-order communication address. Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set. COMM1: Cause transm. length Setting for the length of the cause of transmission. Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set. 7-10

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

COMM1: Address length ASDU

003 193

Fig. 3-8

Setting for the length of the common address for identification of telegram structures. Note:

This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.

COMM1: Octet 2 addr. ASDU

003 194

Fig. 3-8

Setting for the length of the common higher-order address for identification of telegram structures. Note:

This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.

COMM1: Addr.length inf.obj.

003 196

Fig. 3-8

Setting for the length of the address for information objects. Note:

This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.

COMM1: Oct.3 addr. inf.obj.

003 197

Fig. 3-8

Setting for the length of the higher-order address for information objects. Note:

This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.

COMM1: Inf.No.<->funct.type

003 195

Fig. 3-8

Setting specifying whether information numbers and function type shall be reversed in the object address. Note:

This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.

COMM1: Time tag length

003 198

Fig. 3-8

Setting for the time tag length. Note:

This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.

COMM1: ASDU1 / ASDU20 conv.

003 190

Fig. 3-8

Setting specifying whether telegram structure 1 or 20 shall be converted as a single signal or double signal. Note:

This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.

COMM1: ASDU2 conversion

003 191

Fig. 3-8

Setting specifying whether telegram structure 2 shall be converted as a single signal or double signal. Note:

This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.

COMM1: Initializ. signal

003 199

Fig. 3-8

Setting specifying whether an initialization signal shall be issued. Note:

This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.

COMM1: Balanced operation

003 226

Fig. 3-8

Setting specifying whether communication shall be operated in full duplex mode (simultaneous transmission and reception). Note:

This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7-11

7 Settings (continued)

COMM1: Direction bit

003 227

Fig. 3-8

Setting for the control direction. As a rule, this value should be set to ‘1’ in the control center and to ‘0’ in the substation. Note:

This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.

COMM1: Time-out interval

003 228

Fig. 3-8

Setting for the maximum time before the status signal is issued for the acknowledge command. Note:

This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.

COMM1: Reg.asg. selec. cmds

003 210

Fig. 3-10

MODBUS s in the range 00301 to 00400 are assigned to the selected commands. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first command is given the no. 00301, the second the no. 00302, etc. Note:

This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is set.

COMM1: Reg.asg. selec. sig.

003 211

Fig. 3-10

MODBUS s in the range 10301 to 10400 are assigned to the selected signals. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first signal is given the no. 10301, the second the no. 10302, etc. Note:

This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is set.

COMM1: Reg.asg. sel. m.val.

003 212

Fig. 3-10

MODBUS s in the range 30301 to 30400 are assigned to the selected measured values. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first measured value is given the no. 30301, the second the no. 30302, etc. Note:

This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is set.

COMM1: Reg.asg. sel. param.

003 213

Fig. 3-10

MODBUS s in the range 40301 to 40400 are assigned to the selected parameters. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first measured value is given the no. 40301, the second the no. 40302, etc. Note:

This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is set.

COMM1: Delta t (MODBUS)

003 152

Fig. 3-10

All MODBUS s are transmitted again through the communication interface after this time has elapsed. Note:

This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is set.

COMM1: Autom.event confirm.

003 249

Fig. 3-10

Setting as to whether an event confirmation by the master is necessary to delete an event from the “event queue“. Note:

7-12

This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

COMM1: Phys. Charact. Delay

003 241

Fig. 3-11

Number of bits to be awaited from receiving the "Requests" to sending the "Response". Note:

This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.

COMM1: Phys. Char. Timeout

003 242

Fig. 3-11

Number of bits that can be missing in the telegram without receive interrupt. Note:

This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.

COMM1: Link Confirm. Mode

003 243

Fig. 3-11

Setting for the acknowledgement mode for confirmation within the link layer. Note:

This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.

COMM1: Link Confirm.Timeout

003 244

Fig. 3-11

Setting for the link layer timeout period. Within the link layer, the master needs to acknowledge (confirm) within this period. Note:

This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.

COMM1: Link Max. Retries

003 245

Fig. 3-11

Number of repetitions performed within the link layer after the occurrence of errors during transmission (such as failure to acknowledge). Note:

This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.

COMM1: Appl.Confirm.Timeout

003 246

Fig. 3-11

Setting for the application layer timeout period. Within the application layer, the master needs to acknowledge (confirm) within this period. Note:

This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.

COMM1: Appl. Need Time Del.

003 247

Fig. 3-11

Within the time interval set here, the slave cyclically issues a clock synchronization request to the master. Note:

This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.

COMM1: Ind./cl. bin. inputs

003 232

Fig. 3-11

Selection of data points and data classes for object 1 – binary inputs. Indices are assigned in the sequence of the selection and beginning with 0. Note:

This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.

COMM1: Ind./cl. bin.outputs

003 233

Fig. 3-11

Selection of data points and data classes for object 10 – binary outputs. Indices are assigned in the sequence of the selection and beginning with 0. Note:

This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.

COMM1: Ind./cl. anap.

003 235

Fig. 3-11

Selection of data points and data classes for object 30 – anaputs. Indices are assigned in the sequence of the selection and beginning with 0. Note:

This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7-13

7 Settings (continued)

COMM1: Ind./cl. analog outp

003 236

Fig. 3-11

Selection of data points and data classes for object 40 – analog outputs. Indices are assigned in the sequence of the selection and beginning with 0. Note:

This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.

COMM1: Delta t (DNP3)

003 248

Fig. 3-11

Cycle time of updating the DNP objects 30 (anaputs). Note:

This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.

COMM1: Delta meas.v. (DNP3)

003 250

Fig. 3-11

Initialization value of the thresholds for the transmission of measured data in object 30. The threshold values may be changed separately by the master for each measured value by writing to object 34, "Anaput Reporting Deadband". Note: IRIG-B interface

This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.

IRIGB: Function group IRIGB

056 072

Canceling function group IRIGB or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. IRIGB: General enable

023 200

Fig. 3-12

Disabling and enabling the IRIG-B interface function.

7-14

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

Binary inputs The P63x has optical coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the system. The number and connection schemes for the available binary inputs are shown in the terminal connection diagrams. The Address List in the Appendix gives information about the configuration options for all binary inputs. The P63x identifies the fitted modules during startup. If a given binary I/O module is not fitted or has fewer binary signal inputs than the maximum number possible at this slot, then the configuration addresses for the missing binary signal inputs are automatically hidden in the menu tree. When configuring binary inputs one should keep in mind the fact that the same function can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated from several control points having different signal voltages. In order to ensure that the device will recognize the input signals, the triggering signals must persist for at least 30 ms. The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The can specify whether the presence (active ‘high’ mode) or absence (active ‘low’ mode) of a voltage shall be interpreted as the logic ‘1’ signal. INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP:

Fct. assignm. U 701 Fct. assignm. U 702 Fct. assignm. U 703 Fct. assignm. U 704 Fct. assignm. U 705 Fct. assignm. U 706 Fct. assignm. U 801 Fct. assignm. U 802 Fct. assignm. U 803 Fct. assignm. U 804 Fct. assignm. U 805 Fct. assignm. U 806 Fct. assignm. U 807 Fct. assignm. U 808 Fct. assignm. U 809 Fct. assignm. U 810 Fct. assignm. U 811 Fct. assignm. U 812 Fct. assignm. U 813 Fct. assignm. U 814 Fct. assignm. U 815 Fct. assignm. U 816 Fct. assignm. U 817 Fct. assignm. U 818 Fct. assignm. U 819 Fct. assignm. U 820 Fct. assignm. U 821 Fct. assignm. U 822 Fct. assignm. U 823 Fct. assignm. U 824

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

152 109 152 112 152 115 152 118 152 121 152 124 184 002 184 006 184 010 184 014 184 018 184 022 184 026 184 030 184 034 184 038 184 042 184 046 184 050 184 054 184 058 184 062 184 066 184 070 184 074 184 078 184 082 184 086 184 090 184 094

7-15

7 Settings (continued)

INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP:

Fct. assignm. U 901 Fct. assignm. U 902 Fct. assignm. U 903 Fct. assignm. U 904 Fct. assignm. U 1001 Fct. assignm. U 1002 Fct. assignm. U 1003 Fct. assignm. U 1004 Fct. assignm. U 1005 Fct. assignm. U 1006 Fct. assignm. U 1201 Fct. assignm. U 1202 Fct. assignm. U 1203 Fct. assignm. U 1204 Fct. assignm. U 1401 Fct. assignm. U 1402 Fct. assignm. U 1403 Fct. assignm. U 1404 Fct. assignm. U 1405 Fct. assignm. U 1406 Fct. assignm. U 1407 Fct. assignm. U 1408 Fct. assignm. U 1409 Fct. assignm. U 1410 Fct. assignm. U 1411 Fct. assignm. U 1412 Fct. assignm. U 1413 Fct. assignm. U 1414 Fct. assignm. U 1415 Fct. assignm. U 1416 Fct. assignm. U 1417 Fct. assignm. U 1418 Fct. assignm. U 1419 Fct. assignm. U 1420 Fct. assignm. U 1421 Fct. assignm. U 1422 Fct. assignm. U 1423 Fct. assignm. U 1424 Fct. assignm. U 1601 Fct. assignm. U 1602 Fct. assignm. U 1603 Fct. assignm. U 1604 Fct. assignm. U 1605 Fct. assignm. U 1606 Fct. assignm. U 2001 Fct. assignm. U 2002 Fct. assignm. U 2003 Fct. assignm. U 2004

152 145 152 148 152 151 152 154 152 163 152 166 152 169 152 172 152 175 152 178 152 199 152 202 152 205 152 208 190 002 190 006 190 010 190 014 190 018 190 022 190 026 190 030 190 034 190 038 190 042 190 046 190 050 190 054 190 058 190 062 190 066 190 070 190 074 190 078 190 082 190 086 190 090 190 094 192 002 192 006 192 010 192 014 192 018 192 022 153 087 153 090 153 093 153 096

Assignment of functions to binary signal inputs.

7-16

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP:

Oper. mode U 701 Oper. mode U 702 Oper. mode U 703 Oper. mode U 704 Oper. mode U 705 Oper. mode U 706 Oper. mode U 801 Oper. mode U 802 Oper. mode U 803 Oper. mode U 804 Oper. mode U 805 Oper. mode U 806 Oper. mode U 807 Oper. mode U 808 Oper. mode U 809 Oper. mode U 810 Oper. mode U 811 Oper. mode U 812 Oper. mode U 813 Oper. mode U 814 Oper. mode U 815 Oper. mode U 816 Oper. mode U 817 Oper. mode U 818 Oper. mode U 819 Oper. mode U 820 Oper. mode U 821 Oper. mode U 822 Oper. mode U 823 Oper. mode U 824 Oper. mode U 901 Oper. mode U 902 Oper. mode U 903 Oper. mode U 904 Oper. mode U 1001 Oper. mode U 1002 Oper. mode U 1003 Oper. mode U 1004 Oper. mode U 1005 Oper. mode U 1006

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

152 110 152 113 152 116 152 119 152 122 152 125 184 003 184 007 184 011 184 015 184 019 184 023 184 027 184 031 184 035 184 039 184 043 184 047 184 051 184 055 184 059 184 063 184 067 184 071 184 075 184 079 184 083 184 087 184 091 184 095 152 146 152 149 152 152 152 155 152 164 152 167 152 179 152 173 152 176 152 179

7-17

7 Settings (continued)

INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP:

Oper. mode U 1201 Oper. mode U 1202 Oper. mode U 1203 Oper. mode U 1204 Oper. mode U 1401 Oper. mode U 1402 Oper. mode U 1403 Oper. mode U 1404 Oper. mode U 1405 Oper. mode U 1406 Oper. mode U 1407 Oper. mode U 1408 Oper. mode U 1409 Oper. mode U 1410 Oper. mode U 1411 Oper. mode U 1412 Oper. mode U 1413 Oper. mode U 1414 Oper. mode U 1415 Oper. mode U 1416 Oper. mode U 1417 Oper. mode U 1418 Oper. mode U 1419 Oper. mode U 1420 Oper. mode U 1421 Oper. mode U 1422 Oper. mode U 1423 Oper. mode U 1424 Oper. mode U 1601 Oper. mode U 1602 Oper. mode U 1603 Oper. mode U 1604 Oper. mode U 1605 Oper. mode U 1606 Oper. mode U 2001 Oper. mode U 2002 Oper. mode U 2003 Oper. mode U 2004

152 200 152 203 152 206 152 209 190 003 190 007 190 011 190 015 190 019 190 023 190 027 190 031 190 035 190 039 190 043 190 047 190 051 190 055 190 059 190 063 190 067 190 071 190 075 190 079 190 083 190 087 190 091 190 095 192 003 192 007 192 011 192 015 192 019 192 023 153 088 153 091 153 094 153 097

Selection of operating mode for binary signal inputs.

7-18

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

Measured data input

MEASI: Function group MEASI

056 030

Canceling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. MEASI: General enable

011 100

Fig. 3-14

037 190

Fig. 3-17

037 191

Fig. 3-17

Disabling or enabling analog measured data input. MEASI: Enable IDC p.u. Setting for the minimum current that must flow in order for the P63x to display a measured value > 0 (zero suppression). MEASI: IDC< open circuit

If the input current falls below the set threshold, the P63x will issue an ‘open circuit’ signal. MEASI: IDC 1 MEASI: IDC 2 MEASI: IDC 3 MEASI: IDC 4 MEASI: IDC 5 MEASI: IDC 6 MEASI: IDC 7 MEASI: IDC 8 MEASI: IDC 9 MEASI: IDC 10 MEASI: IDC 11 MEASI: IDC 12 MEASI: IDC 13 MEASI: IDC 14 MEASI: IDC 15 MEASI: IDC 16 MEASI: IDC 17 MEASI: IDC 18 MEASI: IDC 19 MEASI: IDC 20

037 150

Fig. 3-17

037 152

Fig. 3-17

037 154

Fig. 3-17

037 156

Fig. 3-17

037 158

Fig. 3-17

037 160

Fig. 3-17

037 162

Fig. 3-17

037 164

Fig. 3-17

037 166

Fig. 3-17

037 168

Fig. 3-17

037 170

Fig. 3-17

037 172

Fig. 3-17

037 174

Fig. 3-17

037 176

Fig. 3-17

037 178

Fig. 3-17

037 180

Fig. 3-17

037 182

Fig. 3-17

037 184

Fig. 3-17

037 186

Fig. 3-17

037 188

Fig. 3-17

Setting for the input currents IDC xx that will pair up with the linearized values IDC,lin xx to form the interpolation points of the characteristic for the linearization of direct current inputs.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7-19

7 Settings (continued)

MEASI: IDC,lin 1 MEASI: IDC,lin 2 MEASI: IDC,lin 3 MEASI: IDC,lin 4 MEASI: IDC,lin 5 MEASI: IDC,lin 6 MEASI: IDC,lin 7 MEASI: IDC,lin 8 MEASI: IDC,lin 9 MEASI: IDC,lin 10 MEASI: IDC,lin 11 MEASI: IDC,lin 12 MEASI: IDC,lin 13 MEASI: IDC,lin 14 MEASI: IDC,lin 15 MEASI: IDC,lin 16 MEASI: IDC,lin 17 MEASI: IDC,lin 18 MEASI: IDC,lin 19 MEASI: IDC,lin 20

037 151

Fig. 3-17

037 153

Fig. 3-17

037 155

Fig. 3-17

037 157

Fig. 3-17

037 159

Fig. 3-17

037 161

Fig. 3-17

037 163

Fig. 3-17

037 165

Fig. 3-17

037 167

Fig. 3-17

037 169

Fig. 3-17

037 171

Fig. 3-17

037 173

Fig. 3-17

037 175

Fig. 3-17

037 177

Fig. 3-17

037 179

Fig. 3-17

037 181

Fig. 3-17

037 183

Fig. 3-17

037 185

Fig. 3-17

037 187

Fig. 3-17

037 189

Fig. 3-17

Setting for the input currents IDC,lin xx that will pair up with the linearized values IDC xx to form the interpolation points of the characteristic for the linearization of direct current inputs. MEASI: Scaled val. IDC,lin1

037 192

Fig. 3-18

037 193

Fig. 3-18

Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin 1. MEASI: Scaled val.IDC,lin20 Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin 20.

7-20

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

Binary outputs The P63x has output relays for the output of binary signals. The number and connection schemes for the available output relays are shown in the terminal connection diagrams. The Address List in the Appendix gives information about the configuration options for all binary outputs. The P63x identifies the fitted modules during startup. If a given binary I/O module is not fitted or has fewer output relays than the maximum number possible at that slot, then the configuration addresses for the missing output relays are automatically hidden in the menu tree. The data for the all-or-nothing relays permits them to be used either as command relays or as signal relays. One signal can also be assigned to several output relays simultaneously for the purpose of multiplication. An operating mode can be defined for each output relay. Depending on the selected operating mode, the output relay will operate in either an energize-on-signal (ES) mode or a normally-energized (NE) mode and in either a latching or non-latching mode. For output relays operating in latching mode, the operating mode setting also determines when latching will be canceled. Note:

For relays with make s, the energize-on-signal (ES) mode corresponds to normally-open operation. The normally-energized (NE) mode means that the polarity of the driving signal is inverted, such that a logic "0" maintains the relay normally-closed. For relays with changeover s, these more common descriptions are not applicable.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7-21

7 Settings (continued)

OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP:

Fct. assignm. K 701 Fct. assignm. K 702 Fct. assignm. K 703 Fct. assignm. K 704 Fct. assignm. K 705 Fct. assignm. K 706 Fct. assignm. K 707 Fct. assignm. K 708 Fct. assignm. K 801 Fct. assignm. K 802 Fct. assignm. K 901 Fct. assignm. K 902 Fct. assignm. K 903 Fct. assignm. K 904 Fct. assignm. K 905 Fct. assignm. K 906 Fct. assignm. K 907 Fct. assignm. K 908 Fct. assignm. K 1001 Fct. assignm. K 1002 Fct. assignm. K 1003 Fct. assignm. K 1004 Fct. assignm. K 1005 Fct. assignm. K 1006 Fct. assignm. K 1007 Fct. assignm. K 1008 Fct. assignm. K 1201 Fct. assignm. K 1202 Fct. assignm. K 1601 Fct. assignm. K 1602 Fct. assignm. K 1603 Fct. assignm. K 1604 Fct. assignm. K 1605 Fct. assignm. K 1606 Fct. assignm. K 1607 Fct. assignm. K 1608 Fct. assignm. K 1801 Fct. assignm. K 1802 Fct. assignm. K 1803 Fct. assignm. K 1804 Fct. assignm. K 1805 Fct. assignm. K 1806 Fct. assignm. K 2001 Fct. assignm. K 2002 Fct. assignm. K 2003 Fct. assignm. K 2004 Fct. assignm. K 2005 Fct. assignm. K 2006 Fct. assignm. K 2007 Fct. assignm. K 2008

150 145 150 148 150 151 150 154 150 157 150 160 150 163 150 166 150 169 150 172 150 193 150 196 150 199 150 202 150 205 150 208 150 211 150 214 150 217 150 220 150 223 150 226 150 229 150 232 150 235 150 238 151 009 151 012 171 002 171 006 171 010 171 014 171 018 171 022 171 026 171 030 173 002 173 006 173 010 173 014 173 018 173 022 151 201 151 204 151 207 151 210 151 213 151 216 151 219 151 222

Assignment of functions to output relays.

7-22

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP:

Oper. mode K 701 Oper. mode K 702 Oper. mode K 703 Oper. mode K 704 Oper. mode K 705 Oper. mode K 706 Oper. mode K 707 Oper. mode K 708 Oper. mode K 801 Oper. mode K 802 Oper. mode K 901 Oper. mode K 902 Oper. mode K 903 Oper. mode K 904 Oper. mode K 905 Oper. mode K 906 Oper. mode K 907 Oper. mode K 908 Oper. mode K 1001 Oper. mode K 1002 Oper. mode K 1003 Oper. mode K 1004 Oper. mode K 1005 Oper. mode K 1006 Oper. mode K 1007 Oper. mode K 1008 Oper. mode K 1201 Oper. mode K 1202 Oper. mode K 1601 Oper. mode K 1602 Oper. mode K 1603 Oper. mode K 1604 Oper. mode K 1605 Oper. mode K 1606 Oper. mode K 1607 Oper. mode K 1608 Oper. mode K 1801 Oper. mode K 1802 Oper. mode K 1803 Oper. mode K 1804 Oper. mode K 1805 Oper. mode K 1806 Oper. mode K 2001 Oper. mode K 2002 Oper. mode K 2003 Oper. mode K 2004 Oper. mode K 2005 Oper. mode K 2006 Oper. mode K 2007 Oper. mode K 2008

150 146 150 149 150 152 150 155 150 158 150 161 150 164 150 167 150 170 150 173 150 194 150 197 150 200 150 203 150 206 150 209 150 212 150 215 150 218 150 221 150 224 150 227 150 230 150 233 150 236 150 239 151 010 151 013 171 003 171 007 171 011 171 015 171 019 171 023 171 027 171 031 173 003 173 007 173 011 173 015 173 019 173 023 151 202 151 205 151 208 151 211 151 214 151 217 151 220 151 223

Selection of operating mode for output relays.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7-23

7 Settings (continued)

Measured data output

MEASO: Function group MEASO

056 020

Canceling function group MEASO or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. MEASO: General enable

031 074

Fig. 3-22

053 002

Fig. 3-25

010 010

Fig. 3-25

Disabling and enabling the measured data output function. MEASO: Fct. assignm. BCD Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in BCD-coded form. MEASO: Hold time output BCD

Setting for the time period for transmission of the selected measured value in BCD-coded form. MEASO: Scale BCD Scaling factor setting for the measured value to be transmitted in BCDcoded form. The scaling factor is calculated according to the following formula: M x,max scaling factor = M x,scal

where: M x,scal :

scaled measured value

M x,max :

maximum transmitted value for the selected measured value

MEASO: Fct. assignm. A-1 MEASO: Fct. assignm. A-2

016 082

Fig. 3-25

053 000

Fig. 3-27

053 001

Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in analog form. MEASO: Hold time output A-1 MEASO: Hold time output A-2

010 114

Fig. 3-27

010 115

Setting for the time period for output of the selected measured value. MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-1 MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-2

037 104

Fig. 3-27

037 110

Setting for the minimum scaled measured value to be output. The value to be set is calculated according to the following formula: M x,scal,min =

M x,min M x,RL

where: Mx,min :

minimum transmitted value of the selected measured value

M x,RL :

range limit of the selected measured value

MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-1 MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-2

037 105

Fig. 3-27

037 111

Setting for the scaled measured value for output that defines the knee point of the characteristic. The value to be set is calculated according to the following formula: M x,knee M x,scal,knee = M x,RL

7-24

where: M x,knee :

knee point value to be transmitted for selected measured value

M x,RL :

range limit value of selected measured value P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-1 MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-2

037 106

Fig. 3-27

037 112

Setting for the maximum scaled measured value to be output. The value to be set is calculated according to the following formula: M x,max M x,scal,max = M x,RL where: Mx,max :

maximum value to be transmitted for selected measured value

M x,RL :

range limit value of selected measured value

MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-1 MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-2

037 107

Fig. 3-27

037 113

Setting for the output current that is output for measured values smaller than or equal to the minimum measured value to be transmitted. MEASO: AnOut knee point A-1 MEASO: AnOut knee point A-2

037 108

Fig. 3-27

037 114

Setting for the output current that is output if the measured value is in the knee point of the characteristic. MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-1 MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-2

037 109

Fig. 3-27

037 115

Setting for the output current that is output for measured values smaller than or equal to the maximum measured value to be transmitted. MEASO: Output value 1

037 120

MEASO: Output value 2

037 121

MEASO: Output value 3

037 122

Fig. 3-25, 3-27 Fig. 3-25, 3-27 Fig. 3-25, 3-27

Measured values of external devices, which must be scaled to 0 to 100%, can be output.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7-25

7 Settings (continued)

LED indicators

The P63x has a total of 17 LED indicators for parallel display of binary signals. The Address List in the Appendix gives information about the configuration options for all LED indicators. The following table provides an overview.

LED indicator

Description on the label strip as supplied

Configuration

H1

‘HEALTHY’

Not configurable. H 1 signals the operational readiness of the device (supply voltage present).

H 17

‘EDIT MODE’

Not configurable. H 17 signals the fact that the is in the ‘EDIT MODE’. In this mode, parameter values can be changed. (See the section entitled ‘Display and Keypad’ in Chapter 6.)

H2

‘OUT OF SERVICE’

Permanently assigned to the function M A IN : B l oc k ed /f au l t y.

H3

‘ALARM’

Permanently assigned to the function S F MO N : W ar nin g ( L E D) .

H4

‘TRIP’

The factory-set configuration is shown in the Terminal Connection Diagrams. These diagrams are found in the appendix to this manual or in the ing Documents shipped with the device.

H 5 to H 16

----

The has the option of asg functions to these LED indicators. The arrangement of the LED indicators on the local control is illustrated in the dimensional drawings of Chapter 4. An operating mode can be defined for each LED indicator. Depending on the selected operating mode, the output relay will operate in either energize-on-signal (ES) mode or normally-energized (NE) mode and in either latching or non-latching mode. For LED indicators operating in latching mode, the operating mode setting also determines when latching will be canceled. Note:

For relays with make s, the energize-on-signal (ES) mode corresponds to normally-open operation. The normally-energized (NE) mode means that the polarity of the driving signal is inverted, such that a logic "0" maintains the relay normally-closed. For relays with changeover s, these more common descriptions are not applicable.

085 001 LED: Fct. assignm. H 2 Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 2 (‘OUT OF SERVICE’). The M A I N : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y function is permanently assigned to this LED. 085 004 LED: Fct. assignm. H 3

Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 3 (‘ALARM’). The S F M O N : W a r n i n g ( L E D ) function is permanently assigned to this LED.

7-26

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED:

Fct. assignm. H 4 Fct. assignm. H 5 Fct. assignm. H 6 Fct. assignm. H 7 Fct. assignm. H 8 Fct. assignm. H 9 Fct. assignm. H 10 Fct. assignm. H 11 Fct. assignm. H 12 Fct. assignm. H 13 Fct. assignm. H 14 Fct. assignm. H 15 Fct. assignm. H 16

085 007 085 010 085 013 085 016 085 019 085 022 085 025 085 028 085 031 085 034 085 037 085 040 085 043

Assignment of functions to LED indicators. LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED:

Operating mode H 2 Operating mode H 3 Operating mode H 4 Operating mode H 5 Operating mode H 6 Operating mode H 7 Operating mode H 8 Operating mode H 9 Operating mode H 10 Operating mode H 11 Operating mode H 12 Operating mode H 13 Operating mode H 14 Operating mode H 15 Operating mode H 16

085 002 085 005 085 008 085 011 085 014 085 017 085 020 085 023 085 026 085 029 085 032 085 035 085 038 085 041 085 044

Selection of operating mode for LED indicators. Fault recording

FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 1 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 2 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 3 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 4 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 5 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 6 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 7 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 8 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 9 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann.10 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann.11 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann.12 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann.13 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann.14 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann.15 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann.16

035 160 035 161 035 162 035 163 035 164 035 165 035 166 035 167 035 168 035 169 035 170 035 171 035 172 035 173 035 174 035 175

The specifies the channel on which each physical variable is recorded.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7-27

7 Settings (continued)

Canceling a protection function

The can adapt the device to the requirements of a particular high-voltage system by including the relevant protection functions in the device configuration and canceling all others (removing them from the device configuration). The following conditions must be met before canceling a protection function: ¨

The protection function in question must be disabled.

¨

None of the functions of the protection function to be cancelled may be assigned to a binary input.

¨

None of the signals of the protection function may be assigned to a binary output or an LED indicator.

¨

None of the signals of the protection function may be linked to other signals by way of an ‘m out of n’ parameter.

The protection function to which a parameter, a signal, or a measured value belongs is defined by the function group designation (example: ‘LIMIT’). Differential protection

DIFF: Function group DIFF

056 027

Canceling function group DIFF or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. Ground differential protection REF_1: Function group REF_1 (Br.: Restricted earth fault pr.) REF_2: Function group REF_2 REF_3: Function group REF_3

056 037 056 038 056 039

Canceling function groups REF_1 to REF_3 or including them in the configuration. If a function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. Note:

Definite-time overcurrent protection

Ground differential protection is not available with the P631. Function group REF_3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.

DTOC1: Function group DTOC1

056 031

DTOC2: Function group DTOC2 DTOC3: Function group DTOC3

056 032 056 053

Canceling function groups DTOC1 to DTOC3 or including them in the configuration. If a function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. Note:

7-28

Function group DTOC3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

Inverse-time overcurrent protection

IDMT1: Function group IDMT1

056 051

IDMT2: Function group IDMT2 IDMT3: Function group IDMT3

056 061 056 071

Canceling function groups IDMT1 to IDMT3 or including them in the configuration. If a function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. Note:

Thermal overload protection

Function group IDMT3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.

THRM1: Function group THRM1 THRM2: Function group THRM2

056 054 056 055

Canceling function groups THR_1 to THRM_2 or including them in the configuration. If a function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. Note:

Time-voltage protection

Function group THRM_2 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.

V<>: Function group V<>

056 010

Canceling function group V<> or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. Note: Over-/underfrequency protection

Time-voltage protection protection is not available with the P631.

f<>: Function group f<>

056 033

Canceling function group f<> or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. Note: Limit value monitoring

Over-/underfrequency is not available with the P631.

LIMIT: Function group LIMIT

056 025

Canceling function group LIMIT or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. LIM_1: Function group LIM_1 LIM_2: Function group LIM_2 LIM_3: Function group LIM_3

056 042 056 043 056 050

Canceling function groups LIM_1 to LIM_3 or including them in the configuration. If a function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. Note:

Logic

Function group LIM_3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.

LOGIC: Function group LOGIC

056 017

Canceling function group LOGIC or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7-29

7 Settings (continued)

7.1.3 Function Parameters 7.1.3.1 Global PC link

PC:

Command blocking

003 182

Fig. 3-5

When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at the PC interface. PC:

Sig./meas.val.block.

003 086

Fig. 3-5

003 172

Fig. 3-6

003 076

Fig. 3-7, 3-8,3-9

021 014

Fig. 3-20

003 030

Fig. 3-43

003 012

Fig. 3-53

010 030

Fig. 3-119

010 049

Fig. 3-74

When signal and measured value blocking is activated, no signals or measured data are transmitted through the PC interface. Communication link

COMM1: Command block.

When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at the communication interface. COMM1: Sig./meas.block.

When signal and measured value blocking is activated, no signals or measured data are transmitted through the communication interface. Binary outputs

OUTP: Outp.rel.block

When this blocking is activated, all output relays are blocked. Main functions

MAIN: Protection enabled

Switching the device off-line or on-line. Parameters marked ‘off’ in the Address List can only be changed when the device is off-line. MAIN: Test mode

When the test mode is activated, signals or measured data for PC and communication interfaces are labeled ‘test mode’. MAIN: Nominal frequ. fnom

Setting for the nominal frequency of the protected system. MAIN: Phase sequence

Setting for the phase sequence (rotary field direction), either A-B-C or A-C-B (clockwise or anti-clockwise). MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN:

Inom C.T.prim.,end a Inom C.T.prim.,end b Inom C.T.prim.,end c Inom C.T.prim.,end d

019 020

Fig. 3-33

019 021

Fig. 3-33

019 022

Fig. 3-33

019 026

Fig. 3-33

019 027

Fig. 3-35

019 028

Fig. 3-35

019 029

Fig. 3-35

Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer (phase currents) of end a, b, c or d. MAIN: Inom C.T.Yprim,end a MAIN: Inom C.T.Yprim,end b MAIN: Inom C.T.Yprim,end c

Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer at the neutral-point-to-ground connection.

7-30

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

MAIN: Vnom V.T. prim.

010 002

Fig. 3-38

MAIN: Inom device, end a

010 024

Fig. 3-38, 3-30a,3-30b

MAIN: Inom device, end b MAIN: Inom device, end c MAIN: Inom device, end d

010 025

Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer.

010 029 010 047

Setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for measurement of the phase currents of ends a,b, c and d. This current corresponds to the nominal current of the device. MAIN: Vnom V.T. sec.

010 009

Fig. 3-38

MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IP,a

010 140

Fig. 3-38, 3-30a,3-30b

MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IP,b MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IP,c MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IP,d

010 150

Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for voltage measurement.

010 160 010 170

Instead of ing for connection reversal applied to one end in the settings for DIFF : V ec t or g r p . e nds z1 - z2 (where z1-z2 stands for ab, a-c or a-d), it is possible to for it in the settings for connection of the measuring circuits. The connection of the neutral/point current circuits, ends a to d, is set here as Standard if in accordance with the connection scheme shown in Chapter 5, else as Opposite. MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IY,a

010 141

MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IY,b MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IY,c

010 151

Fig. 3-38, 3-30a,3-30b

010 161

Connection reversal applied to one end is ed for it in the settings for connection of the measuring circuits. The connection of the phase current circuits, ends a to c, is set here as Standard if in accordance with the connection scheme shown in Chapter 5, else as Opposite. MAIN: Meas. value rel. IP

011 030

Fig. 3-33, 3-37

011 031

Fig. 3-35, 3-36,3-37

011 036

Fig. 3-35

Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the measured operating values of the phase currents to be displayed. MAIN: Meas. value rel. IN

Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the measured operating value of the residual current to be displayed. MAIN: Meas. value rel. IY

Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the measured operating values of the currents in the neutral-point-to-ground connection to be displayed. MAIN: Meas. value rel. V

011 032

Fig. 3-38

010 113

Fig. 3-33, 3-34

Setting for the minimum voltage that must be exceeded in order for the measured operating values of the voltage to be displayed. MAIN: Settl. t. IP,max,del

Setting for the time after which the delayed maximum current display shall reach 95% of the maximum current IP,max.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7-31

7 Settings (continued)

MAIN: Fct.assign. block. 1

021 021

Fig. 3-45

Assignment of functions that will be blocked together when blocking input 1 (M A I N : B l o c k i n g 1 E X T ) is activated. 021 022 Fig. 3-45 MAIN: Fct.assign. block. 2 Assignment of functions to be blocked together if blocking input 2 ( M A I N: B loc k i n g 2 EX T ) is activated. MAIN: Fct.assign. block. 3

021 048

Fig. 3-45

Assignment of functions to be blocked together if blocking input 3 ( M A I N: B loc k i n g 3 EX T ) is activated. MAIN: Fct.assign. block. 4

021 049

Fig. 3-45

Assignment of functions to be blocked together if blocking input 4 ( M A I N: B loc k i n g 4 EX T ) is activated. MAIN: Trip cmd.block.

021 012

Fig. 3-49

021 001

Fig. 3-49

021 002

Fig. 3-49

021 046

Fig. 3-49

021 047

Fig. 3-49

021 003

Fig. 3-49

021 004

Fig. 3-49

021 032

Fig. 3-49

021 033

Fig. 3-49

021 023

Fig. 3-49

021 024

Fig. 3-49

021 025

Fig. 3-49

021 026

Fig. 3-49

021 031

Fig. 3-46

Blocking of the trip commands from the local control . MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.1

Assignment of the signals that trigger trip command 1. MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.2

Assignment of the signals that trigger trip command 2. MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.3

Assignment of the signals that trigger trip command 3. MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.4

Assignment of the signals that trigger trip command 4. MAIN: Min.dur. trip cmd. 1

Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 1. MAIN: Min.dur. trip cmd. 2

Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 2. MAIN: Min.dur. trip cmd. 3

Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 3. MAIN: Min.dur. trip cmd. 4

Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 4. MAIN: Latching trip cmd. 1

Specification as to whether trip command 1 should latch. MAIN: Latching trip cmd. 2

Specification as to whether trip command 2 should latch. MAIN: Latching trip cmd. 3

Specification as to whether trip command 3 should latch. MAIN: Latching trip cmd. 4

Specification as to whether trip command 4 should latch. MAIN: Fct. assign. fault

Selection of the signals whose appearance shall result in a ‘Blocked/faulty’ indication. Signals that lead to blocking of the device are not configurable and always result in a ‘Blocked/faulty’ indication.

7-32

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

Parameter subset selection

PSS: Control via

003 100

Fig. 3-54

003 060

Fig. 3-54

003 063

Fig. 3-54

If parameter subset selection is to be handled from the integrated local control rather than via the binary signal inputs, choose the ‘Yes’ setting. PSS: Param.subs.sel.

Selection of the parameter subset from the local control . PSS: Keep time

The setting of this timer stage is relevant only if parameter subset selection is carried out via the binary signal inputs. Any voltage-free pause that may occur during selection is bridged. If, after this time period has elapsed, no binary signal input has yet been set, then the parameter subset selected from the local control shall apply. Self-monitoring

SFMON: Fct. assign. warning

021 030

Fig. 3-55

This setting defines the monitoring signals that will be entered in the monitoring signal memory. Signals resulting from internal device faults are not configurable and always result in a warning. Fault recording

FT_RC: Fct. assig. trigger

003 085

Fig. 3-67

016 018

Fig. 3-67

This setting defines the signals that will trigger fault recording. FT_RC: Id>

This setting defines the threshold value of the differential current that will trigger fault recording. FT_RC: IR>

016 019

Fig. 3-67

This setting defines the threshold value of the restraining current that will trigger fault recording. FT_RC: Pre-fault time

003 078

Fig. 3-69

Setting for the time during which data will be recorded before the onset of a fault (pre-fault recording time). FT_RC: Post-fault time

003 079

Fig. 3-69

003 075

Fig. 3-69

Setting for the time during which data will be recorded after the end of a fault (post-fault recording time). FT_RC: Max. recording time

Setting for the maximum recording time per fault. This includes pre-fault and post-fault recording times. 7.1.3.2 General Functions Main functions

MAIN: Vnom prim., end a

019 017

Fig. 3-71, 3-84

019 018

Fig. 3-71

019 019

Fig. 3-71

019 037

Fig. 3-71

Setting for the primary nominal voltage of end a of the transformer. MAIN: Vnom prim., end b

Setting for the primary nominal voltage of end b of the transformer. MAIN: Vnom prim., end c

Setting for the primary nominal voltage of end c of the transformer. MAIN: Vnom prim., end d

Setting for the primary nominal voltage of end d of the transformer.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7-33

7 Settings (continued)

MAIN: Evaluation IN, end a

016 096

Fig. 3-31

This setting specifies which current will be used by the P63x as the residual current: either the calculated residual current based on the sum of the phase currents or the residual current measured at the fourth transformer. MAIN: Evaluation IN, end b

016 097

Fig. 3-31

This setting specifies which current will be used by the P63x as the residual current: either the calculated residual current based on the sum of the phase currents or the residual current measured at the fourth transformer. MAIN: Evaluation IN, end c

016 098

Fig. 3-31

This setting specifies which current will be used by the P63x as the residual current: either the calculated residual current based on the sum of the phase currents or the residual current measured at the fourth transformer. MAIN: Current summation

019 099

Fig. 3-32

For two ends of the transformer, the currents for each phase and the residual currents can be combined. This setting specifies the transformer ends to be involved. Note:

This setting is available for the P633 and the P634 only.

MAIN: Hold time dyn.param.

018 009

Fig. 3-44

Setting for the hold time of the “dynamic parameters”. During this period, the „dynamic“ thresholds are active in place of the “normal“ thresholds. Differential protection

DIFF: General enable

019 080

Fig. 3-70

019 016

Fig. 3-71

019 023

Fig. 3-71

019 024

Fig. 3-71

019 025

Fig. 3-71

019 038

Fig. 3-71

004 105

Fig. 3-71

004 106

Fig. 3-71

004 127

Fig. 3-71

004 168

Fig. 3-71

Disabling and enabling the differential protection function. DIFF: Reference power Sref

Setting for the reference power, usually the nominal transformer power. DIFF: Ref. curr. Iref,a

Display of the reference current calculated by the P63x for end a. DIFF: Ref. curr. Iref,b

Display of the reference current calculated by the P63x for end b. DIFF: Ref. curr. Iref,c

Display of the reference current calculated by the P63x for end c. DIFF: Ref. curr. Iref,d

Display of the reference current calculated by the P63x for end d. DIFF: Matching fact. kam,a

Display of the matching factor calculated by the P63x for end a. DIFF: Matching fact. kam,b

Display of the matching factor calculated by the P63x for end b. DIFF: Matching fact. kam,c

Display of the matching factor calculated by the P63x for end c. DIFF: Matching fact. kam,d

Display of the matching factor calculated by the P63x for end d.

7-34

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

DIFF: Vector grp. ends a-b DIFF: Vector grp. ends a-c DIFF: Vector grp. ends a-d

019 010

Fig. 3-74

019 011

Fig. 3-74

019 014

Fig. 3-75

For standard connection of the P63x (see Chapter 5), the vector group ID needs to be entered. For connection reversal applied to one individual end, this can be taken into in setting. The following algorithms apply: Setting = ID + 6 If the addition results in a value > 12 then: Setting = (ID + 6) – 12 If the phase currents of the low and high voltage sides are exchanged or if the connection of the measuring circuits is not ed for by the settings at MA IN : C on n .m eas ,c i r c . IP , z (where z is end a,b,c or d) then the algorithm is: Setting = 12 – ID If an anti-clockwise rotating field is present (phase sequence A-C-B) then this should be entered as a setting at the P63x. In this case, the P63x will automatically form the complementary value of the set vector group ID to the number 12 (vector group ID = 12 – set ID). For application of the P63x as machine protection, the setting must be 0 or 6 depending on the current transformer connection. DIFF: Meas. value rel. Id

011 037

Fig. 3-82

Setting for the minimum differential current that must be exceeded in order for the P63x to display the differential currents as measured operating data. DIFF: Meas. value rel. IR

011 038

Fig. 3-82

Setting for the minimum restraining current that must be exceeded in order for the P63x to display the restraining currents as measured operating data. Ground differential protection

REF_1: General enable REF_2: General enable REF_3: General enable

019 050

Fig. 3-83

019 150 019 250

Disabling and enabling the ground differential protection function. Note:

Function group REF_3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.

REF_1: Select. meas. input REF_2: Select. meas. input REF_3: Select. meas. input

019 100 019 101 019 102

Display of the measuring input that provides the measured variables evaluated by the ground differential protection function. REF_1: Reference power Sref REF_2: Reference power Sref REF_3: Reference power Sref

019 031

Fig. 3-84

019 032 019 033

Setting for the reference power, usually the nominal transformer power for the relevant transformer end. REF_1: Ref. current Iref REF_2: Ref. current Iref REF_3: Ref. current Iref

019 034

Fig. 3-84

019 035 019 036

Display of the reference current calculated by the P63x.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7-35

7 Settings (continued)

REF_1: Matching fact. kam,N REF_2: Matching fact. kam,N REF_3: Matching fact. kam,N

004 160

Fig. 3-84

004 161 004 162

Display of the matching factor calculated by the P63x for the vector sum of the phase currents. REF_1: Matching fact.kam,Y REF_2: Matching fact.kam,Y REF_3: Matching fact. kam,Y

004 163

Fig. 3-84

004 164 004 165

Display of the matching factor calculated by the P63x for the neutral-point current. REF_1: Meas. value rel. Id REF_2: Meas. value rel. Id REF_3: Meas. value rel. Id

011 039

Fig. 3-87

011 044 011 045

Setting for the minimum differential current that must be exceeded in order for the P63x to display the differential currents as measured operating data. REF_1: Meas. value rel. IR REF_2: Meas. value rel. IR REF_3: Meas. value rel. IR

011 040

Fig. 3-87

011 046 011 047

Setting for the minimum restraining current that must be exceeded in order for the P63x to display the restraining currents as measured operating data. Definite-time overcurrent protection

DTOC1: General enable

031 135

DTOC2: General enable DTOC3: General enable

031 136

Fig. 3-89

031 139

Disabling and enabling the definite-time overcurrent protection function. Note:

Function group DTOC3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.

DTOC1: Select. meas. input DTOC2: Select. meas. input DTOC3: Select. meas. input

019 103

Fig. 3-88

019 104 019 105

Selection of the measuring input that provides the measured variables monitored by the definite-time overcurrent protection function. Inverse-time overcurrent protection

IDMT1: General enable

031 141

IDMT2: General enable IDMT3: General enable

031 142

Fig. 3-96

031 143

Disabling and enabling the inverse-time overcurrent protection function. Note:

Function group IDMT3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.

IDMT1: Select. meas. input IDMT2: Select. meas. input IDMT3: Select. meas. input

019 106

Fig. 3-95

019 116 019 126

Selection of the measuring input that provides the measured variables monitored by the inverse-time overcurrent protection function.

7-36

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

Thermal overload protection

THRM1: General enable THRM2: General enable

031 144

Fig. 3-108

031 145

Disabling and enabling the thermal overload protection function. Note:

Function group THRM2 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.

THRM1: Select. meas. input THRM2: Select. meas. input

019 109

Fig. 3-107

019 110

Selection of the current relevant for thermal overload protection. Select from the currents measured at the measuring input for end a, b, c, d. For the P633 and the P634, there is an additional option, namely the selection of the value obtained according to the setting at M A I N: C ur r en t s um m ati o n. THRM1: Operating mode THRM2: Operating mode

039 121

Fig. 3-111

039 181

Setting for the operating mode of thermal overload protection. Select between Absolute replica and Relative replica. THRM1: Tmax,obj-Tmax,cool 1 THRM2: Tmax,obj-Tmax,cool 2

004 152 004 172

Display of the difference between the settings for the maximum permissible temperatures of the protected object and the coolant. Time-voltage protection

V<>: General enable

023 030

Fig. 3-113

023 031

Fig. 3-116

Disabling and enabling the time-voltage protection function. Note: Over-/underfrequency protection

Time-voltage protection is not available with the P631.

f<>: General enable

Disabling and enabling the over-/underfrequency protection function. Note:

Over-/underfrequency protection is not available with the P631.

f<>: Evaluation time

018 201

Fig. 3-117

Setting for the evaluation time. The operate conditions must be met for this length of time for a signal to be issued. f<>: Undervolt. block. V<

018 200

Fig. 3-117

Setting for the threshold of the undervoltage blocking. If the voltage falls below this threshold, the over-/underfrequency protection function will be blocked.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7-37

7 Settings (continued)

Limit value monitoring

LIMIT: General enable

014 010

Fig. 3-120

014 110

Fig. 3-120

Enabling or disabling limit value monitoring. LIMIT: IDC,lin>

Setting for operate value IDClin> for monitoring the linearized direct current. LIMIT: IDC,lin>>

014 111

Fig. 3-120

014 112

Fig. 3-120

014 113

Fig. 3-120

014 114

Fig. 3-120

Setting for operate value IDClin>> for monitoring the linearized direct current. LIMIT: tIDC,lin>

Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDClin>. LIMIT: tIDC,lin>>

Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDClin>>. LIMIT: IDC,lin<

Setting for operate value IDClin< for monitoring the linearized direct current. LIMIT: IDC,lin<<

014 115

Fig. 3-120

014 116

Fig. 3-120

014 117

Fig. 3-120

014 100

Fig. 3-121

014 101

Fig. 3-121

014 103

Fig. 3-121

014 104

Fig. 3-121

014 105

Fig. 3-121

014 106

Fig. 3-121

014 107

Fig. 3-121

014 108

Fig. 3-121

014 014

Fig. 3-123

Setting for operate value IDClin<< for monitoring the linearized direct current. LIMIT: tIDC,lin<

Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDClin<. LIMIT: tIDC,lin<<

Setting for the operate delay of the undercurrent stage IDClin<<. LIMIT: T>

Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>. LIMIT: T>>

Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>>. LIMIT: tT>

Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>. LIMIT: tT>>

Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>>. LIMIT: T<

Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<. LIMIT: T<<

Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<<. LIMIT: tT<

Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<. LIMIT: tT<<

Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<<. LIM_1: General enable LIM_2: General enable LIM_3: General enable

014 015 014 017

Disabling and enabling the limit value monitoring function. Note:

7-38

Function group LIM_3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

LIM_1: Select. meas. input LIM_2: Select. meas. input LIM_3: Select. meas. input

019 111

Fig. 3-122

019 112 019 113

Selection of the measuring input that provides the measured variables monitored by limit value monitoring function 1, 2 or 3, respectively. LIM_1: I> LIM_2: I> LIM_3: I>

015 116

Fig. 3-123

016 116 017 114

Setting for the operate value of I>. LIM_1: I>> LIM_2: I>> LIM_3: I>>

015 117

Fig. 3-123

016 117 017 117

Setting for the operate value of I>.> LIM_1: tI> LIM_2: tI> LIM_3: tI>

015 120

Fig. 3-123

016 120 017 120

Setting for the operate delay of I>. LIM_1: tI>> LIM_2: tI>> LIM_3: tI>>

015 121

Fig. 3-123

016 121 017 121

Setting for the operate delay of I>>. LIM_1: I< LIM_2: I< LIM_3: I<

015 118

Fig. 3-123

016 118 017 118

Setting for the operate value of I<. LIM_1: I<< LIM_2: I<< LIM_3: I<<

015 119

Fig. 3-123

016 119 017 119

Setting for the operate value of I<<. LIM_1: tI< LIM_2: tI< LIM_3: tI<

015 122

Fig. 3-123

016 122 017 122

Setting for the operate delay of I<. LIM_1: tI<< LIM_2: tI<< LIM_3: tI<<

015 123

Fig. 3-123

016 123 017 123

Setting for the operate delay of I<<.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7-39

7 Settings (continued)

Logic

LOGIC: General enable

031 099

Fig. 3-125

LOGIC: Set 1

034 030

Fig. 3-124, 3-125

LOGIC: Set 2 LOGIC: Set 3 LOGIC: Set 4 LOGIC: Set 5 LOGIC: Set 6 LOGIC: Set 7 LOGIC: Set 8

034 031

Disabling or enabling the logic function.

034 032 034 033 034 034 034 035 034 036 034 037

Fig. 3-125

030 000

Fig. 3-125

These settings define the static input conditions for the logic function. LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 1 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 2 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 3 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 4 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 5 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 6 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 7 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 8 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 9 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.10 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.11 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.12 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.13 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.14 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.15 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.16 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.17 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.18 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.19 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.20 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.21 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.22 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.23 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.24 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.25 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.26 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.27 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.28 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.29 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.30 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.31 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.32

030 004 030 008 030 012 030 016 030 020 030 024 030 028 030 032 030 036 030 040 030 044 030 048 030 052 030 056 030 060 030 064 030 068 030 072 030 076 030 080 030 084 030 088 030 092 030 096 031 000 031 004 031 008 031 012 031 016 031 020 031 024

These settings assign functions to the outputs.

7-40

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 1 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 2 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 3 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 4 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 5 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 6 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 7 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 8 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 9 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 10 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 11 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 12 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 13 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 14 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 15 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 16 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 17 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 18 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 19 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 20 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 21 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 22 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 23 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 24 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 25 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 26 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 27 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 28 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 29 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 30 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 31 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 32

030 001

Fig. 3-125

030 005 030 009 030 013 030 017 030 021 030 025 030 029 030 033 030 037 030 041 030 045 030 049 030 053 030 057 030 061 030 065 030 069 030 073 030 077 030 081 030 085 030 089 030 093 030 097 031 001 031 005 031 009 031 013 031 017 031 021 031 025

These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7-41

7 Settings (continued)

LOGIC: Time t1 output 1 LOGIC: Time t1 output 2 LOGIC: Time t1 output 3 LOGIC: Time t1 output 4 LOGIC: Time t1 output 5 LOGIC: Time t1 output 6 LOGIC: Time t1 output 7 LOGIC: Time t1 output 8 LOGIC: Time t1 output 9 LOGIC: Time t1 output 10 LOGIC: Time t1 output 11 LOGIC: Time t1 output 12 LOGIC: Time t1 output 13 LOGIC: Time t1 output 14 LOGIC: Time t1 output 15 LOGIC: Time t1 output 16 LOGIC: Time t1 output 17 LOGIC: Time t1 output 18 LOGIC: Time t1 output 19 LOGIC: Time t1 output 20 LOGIC: Time t1 output 21 LOGIC: Time t1 output 22 LOGIC: Time t1 output 23 LOGIC: Time t1 output 24 LOGIC: Time t1 output 25 LOGIC: Time t1 output 26 LOGIC: Time t1 output 27 LOGIC: Time t1 output 28 LOGIC: Time t1 output 29 LOGIC: Time t1 output 30 LOGIC: Time t1 output 31 LOGIC: Time t1 output 32

030 002

Fig. 3-125

030 006 030 010 030 014 030 018 030 022 030 026 030 030 030 034 030 038 030 042 030 046 030 050 030 054 030 058 030 062 030 066 030 070 030 074 030 078 030 082 030 086 030 090 030 094 030 098 031 002 031 006 031 010 031 014 031 018 031 022 031 026

Settings for timer stage t1 of the respective outputs.

7-42

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

LOGIC: Time t2 output 1 LOGIC: Time t2 output 2 LOGIC: Time t2 output 3 LOGIC: Time t2 output 4 LOGIC: Time t2 output 5 LOGIC: Time t2 output 6 LOGIC: Time t2 output 7 LOGIC: Time t2 output 8 LOGIC: Time t2 output 9 LOGIC: Time t2 output 10 LOGIC: Time t2 output 11 LOGIC: Time t2 output 12 LOGIC: Time t2 output 13 LOGIC: Time t2 output 14 LOGIC: Time t2 output 15 LOGIC: Time t2 output 16 LOGIC: Time t2 output 17 LOGIC: Time t2 output 18 LOGIC: Time t2 output 19 LOGIC: Time t2 output 20 LOGIC: Time t2 output 21 LOGIC: Time t2 output 22 LOGIC: Time t2 output 23 LOGIC: Time t2 output 24 LOGIC: Time t2 output 25 LOGIC: Time t2 output 26 LOGIC: Time t2 output 27 LOGIC: Time t2 output 28 LOGIC: Time t2 output 29 LOGIC: Time t2 output 30 LOGIC: Time t2 output 31 LOGIC: Time t2 output 32

030 003

Fig. 3-125

030 007 030 011 030 015 030 019 030 023 030 027 030 031 030 035 030 039 030 043 030 047 030 051 030 055 030 059 030 063 030 067 030 071 030 075 030 079 030 083 030 087 030 091 030 095 030 099 031 003 031 007 031 011 031 015 031 019 031 023 031 027

Settings for timer stage t2 of the respective outputs. Note:

This setting has no effect in the ‘minimum time’ operating mode.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7-43

7 Settings (continued)

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 1 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 2 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 3 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 4 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 5 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 6 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 7 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 8 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 9 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 10 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 11 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 12 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 13 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 14 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 15 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 16 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 17 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 18 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 19 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 20 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 21 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 22 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 23 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 24 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 25 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 26 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 27 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 28 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 29 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 30 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 31 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 32

044 000

Fig. 3-131

044 002 044 004 044 006 044 008 044 010 044 012 044 014 044 016 044 018 044 020 044 022 044 024 044 026 044 028 044 030 044 032 044 034 044 036 044 038 044 040 044 042 044 044 044 046 044 048 044 050 044 052 044 054 044 056 044 058 044 060 044 062

These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of the logic equation.

7-44

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 1(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 2(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 3(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 4(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 5(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 6(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 7(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 8(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 9(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.10(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.11(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.12(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.13(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.14(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.15(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.16(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.17(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.18(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.19(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.20(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.21(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.22(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.23(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.24(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.25(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.26(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.27(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.28(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.29(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.30(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.31(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.32(t)

044 001

Fig. 3-131

044 003 044 005 044 007 044 009 044 011 044 013 044 015 044 017 044 019 044 021 044 023 044 025 044 027 044 029 044 031 044 033 044 035 044 037 044 039 044 041 044 043 044 045 044 047 044 049 044 051 044 053 044 055 044 057 044 059 044 061 044 063

These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of the logic equation.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7-45

7 Settings (continued)

7.1.3.3 Parameter Subsets Differential protection

DIFF: Enable

PSx

072 152 073 152 074 152 075 152

Fig. 3-70

This setting specifies the parameter subset to be enabled for differential protection. DIFF: Idiff>

PSx

072 142 073 142 074 142 075 142

Fig. 3-78

Operate value of the differential protection function as referred to the reference current of the relevant transformer end. DIFF: Idiff>>

PSx

072 143 073 143 074 143 075 143

Fig. 3-78

Threshold value of the differential current for deactivation of the inrush stabilization function (harmonic restraint) and of the overfluxing restraint. If the threshold is set too high, it is possible for the P63x not to trip in the presence of internal faults with transformer saturation.

Note:

DIFF: Idiff>>>

PSx

072 144 073 144 074 144 075 144

Fig. 3-78

Threshold value of the differential current for tripping by the differential protection function independent of restraining variable, harmonic restraint, overfluxing restraint and saturation detector. Note: If the threshold is set too low, the P63x can trip in the presence of external faults with transformer saturation. DIFF: m1

PSx

072 145 073 145 074 145 075 145

Fig. 3-78

Gradient of the tripping characteristic of differential protection in the range 0.5 ⋅ Idiff >< IR ≤ IR,m 2 . DIFF: m2

PSx

072 146 073 146 074 146 075 146

Fig. 3-78

Gradient of the tripping characteristic of differential protection in the range IR > IR,m2

.

DIFF: IR,m2

PSx

072 147 073 147 074 147 075 147

Fig. 3-78

This setting defines the second knee of the tripping characteristic. Above this knee, the gradient is m2. DIFF: Op.mode harm.bl. PSx

072 148 073 148 074 148 075 148

Fig. 3-78

Setting for the operating mode of the inrush stabilization function (harmonic blocking or harmonic restraint). For application of the P63x as machine protection, the harmonic restraint can be deactivated by way of this setting. For application of the P63x as transformer protection, the can select whether the harmonic restraint should operate in cross-blocking mode or selectively for one measuring system. DIFF: RushI(2f0)/I(f0) PSx

072 159 073 159 074 159 075 159

Fig. 3-79

Operate value of the inrush stabilization function (harmonic restraint) of differential protection, as ratio of the second harmonic component to the fundamental wave for the differential current, in percent. DIFF: 0-seq. filt.a en.PSx

072 155 073 155 074 155 075 155

Fig. 3-74

Enabling or disabling the zero-sequence filtering of winding a. DIFF: 0-seq. filt.b en.PSx

072 156 073 156 074 156 075 156

Fig. 3-74

Enabling or disabling the zero-sequence filtering of winding b.

7-46

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

DIFF: 0-seq. filt.c en.PSx

072 157 073 157 074 157 075 157

Fig. 3-74

Enabling or disabling the zero-sequence filtering of winding c. DIFF: 0-seq. filt.d en.PSx

072 154 073 154 074 154 075 154

Fig. 3-75

Enabling or disabling the zero-sequence filtering of winding d. DIFF: Overflux.bl. en. PSx

072 158 073 158 074 158 075 158

Fig. 3-81

072 160 073 160 074 160 075 160

Fig. 3-81

Enabling or disabling the overfluxing restraint. DIFF: OverI(5f0)/(f0) PSx

Operate value of the overfluxing restraint of differential protection as ratio of the fifth harmonic component to the fundamental wave for the differential current, in percent. Ground differential protection

REF_1: Enable REF_2: Enable REF_3: Enable

PSx PSx PSx

072 141 073 141 074 141 075 141

Fig. 3-83

072 161 073 161 074 161 075 161 072 031 073 031 074 031 075 031

This setting specifies the parameter subset to be enabled for ground differential protection. REF_1: Idiff> REF_2: Idiff> REF_3: Idiff>

PSx PSx PSx

072 150 073 150 074 150 075 150

Fig. 3-86

072 170 073 170 074 170 075 170 072 040 073 040 074 040 075 040

Operate value of the ground differential protection function as referred to the reference current of the relevant transformer end. REF_1: Idiff>>> REF_2: Idiff>>> REF_3: Idiff>>>

PSx PSx PSx

072 151 073 151 074 151 075 151

Fig. 3-86

072 171 073 171 074 171 075 171 072 041 073 041 074 041 075 041

Threshold value of the differential current for tripping by the ground differential protection function independent of the restraining variable. Definite-time overcurrent protection

DTOC1: Enable DTOC2: Enable DTOC3: Enable

PSx PSx PSx

076 050 077 050 078 050 079 050

Fig. 3-89

076 070 077 070 078 070 079 070 076 180 077 180 078 180 079 180

This setting specifies the parameter subset to be enabled for definite-time overcurrent protection. DTOC1: Block tim.st. IN PSx DTOC2: Block tim.st. IN PSx DTOC3: Block tim.st. IN PSx

076 067 077 067 078 067 079 067

Fig. 3-92

076 087 077 087 078 087 079 087 076 108 077 108 078 108 079 108

This setting defines whether blocking of the residual current stages will take place for single-pole or multi-pole phase current starting. DTOC1: Gen.starting modePSx DTOC2: Gen.starting modePSx DTOC3: Gen.starting modePSx

076 066 077 066 078 066 079 066

Fig. 3-93

076 086 077 086 078 086 079 086 076 106 077 106 078 106 079 106

This setting defines whether starting of the negative-sequence and residual current stages will involved in the formation of the general starting signal of DTOC protection. DTOC1: tGS DTOC2: tGS DTOC3: tGS

PSx PSx PSx

076 065 077 065 078 065 079 065

Fig. 3-93

076 085 077 085 078 085 079 085 076 107 077 107 078 107 079 107

Setting for the operate delay of the general starting signal of DTOC protection.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7-47

7 Settings (continued)

DTOC1: Rush restr.enabl PSx DTOC2: Rush restr.enabl PSx DTOC3: Rush restr.enabl PSx

076 063 077 063 078 063 079 063

Fig. 3-90

076 083 077 083 078 083 079 083 076 193 077 193 078 193 079 193

Setting as to whether the inrush stabilization function (harmonic restraint) of differential protection shall be able to block the definite-time overcurrent protection function. DTOC1: I> DTOC2: I> DTOC3: I>

PSx PSx PSx

076 051 077 051 078 051 079 051

Fig. 3-90

076 071 077 071 078 071 079 071 076 081 077 081 078 081 079 081

Setting for the operate value I>. DTOC1: I>> DTOC2: I>> DTOC3: I>>

PSx PSx PSx

076 052 077 052 078 052 079 052

Fig. 3-90

076 072 077 072 078 072 079 072 076 082 077 082 078 082 079 082

Setting for the operate value I>>. DTOC1: I>>> DTOC2: I>>> DTOC3: I>>>

PSx PSx PSx

076 053 077 053 078 053 079 053

Fig. 3-90

076 163 077 163 078 163 079 163 076 183 077 183 078 183 079 183

Setting for the operate value I>>>. DTOC1: I> dynamic DTOC2: I> dynamic DTOC3: I> dynamic

PSx PSx PSx

076 151 077 151 078 151 079 151

Fig. 3-90

076 161 077 161 078 161 079 161 076 181 077 181 078 181 079 181

Setting for the operate value I> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing. DTOC1: I>> dynamic DTOC2: I>> dynamic DTOC3: I>> dynamic

PSx PSx PSx

076 152 077 152 078 152 079 152

Fig. 3-90

076 162 077 162 078 162 079 162 076 182 077 182 078 182 079 182

Setting for the operate value I>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing. DTOC1: I>>> dynamic DTOC2: I>>> dynamic DTOC3: I>>> dynamic

PSx PSx PSx

076 153 077 153 078 153 079 153

Fig. 3-90

076 173 077 173 078 173 079 173 076 109 077 109 078 109 079 109

Setting for the operate value I>>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing. DTOC1: tI> DTOC2: tI> DTOC3: tI>

PSx PSx PSx

076 057 077 057 078 057 079 057

Fig. 3-90

076 077 077 077 078 077 079 077 076 187 077 187 078 187 079 187

Setting for the operate delay of the I> stage. DTOC1: tI>> DTOC2: tI>> DTOC3: tI>>

PSx PSx PSx

076 058 077 058 078 058 079 058

Fig. 3-90

076 078 077 078 078 078 079 078 076 188 077 188 078 188 079 188

Setting for the operate delay of the I>> stage. DTOC1: tI>>> DTOC2: tI>>> DTOC3: tI>>>

PSx PSx PSx

076 059 077 059 078 059 079 059

Fig. 3-90

076 169 077 169 078 169 079 169 076 189 077 189 078 189 079 189

Setting for the operate delay of the I>>> stage.

7-48

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

DTOC1: Ineg> DTOC2: Ineg> DTOC3: Ineg>

PSx PSx PSx

076 197 077 197 078 197 079 197

Fig. 3-91

076 207 077 207 078 207 079 207 076 217 077 217 078 217 079 217

Setting for the operate value of the Ineg> stage. DTOC1: Ineg>> DTOC2: Ineg>> DTOC3: Ineg>>

PSx PSx PSx

076 198 077 198 078 198 079 198

Fig. 3-91

076 208 077 208 078 208 079 208 076 218 077 218 078 218 079 218

Setting for the operate value of the Ineg>> stage. DTOC1: Ineg>>> DTOC2: Ineg>>> DTOC3: Ineg>>>

PSx PSx PSx

076 199 077 199 078 199 079 199

Fig. 3-91

076 209 077 209 078 209 079 209 076 219 077 219 078 219 079 219

Setting for the operate value of the Ineg>>> stage. DTOC1: Ineg> dynamic DTOC2: Ineg> dynamic DTOC3: Ineg> dynamic

PSx PSx PSx

076 200 077 200 078 200 079 200

Fig. 3-91

076 210 077 210 078 210 079 210 076 220 077 220 078 220 079 220

Setting for the operate value of the Ineg> stage in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing. DTOC1: Ineg>> dynamic PSx DTOC2: Ineg>> dynamic PSx DTOC3: Ineg>> dynamic PSx

076 201 077 201 078 201 079 201

Fig. 3-91

076 211 077 211 078 211 079 211 076 221 077 221 078 221 079 221

Setting for the operate value of the Ineg>> stage in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing. DTOC1: Ineg>>> dynamic PSx DTOC2: Ineg>>> dynamic PSx DTOC3: Ineg>>> dynamic PSx

076 202 077 202 078 202 079 202

Fig. 3-91

076 212 077 212 078 212 079 212 076 222 077 222 078 222 079 222

Setting for the operate value of the Ineg>>> stage in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing. DTOC1: tIneg> DTOC2: tIneg> DTOC3: tIneg>

PSx PSx PSx

076 203 077 203 078 203 079 203

Fig. 3-91

076 213 077 213 078 213 079 213 076 223 077 223 078 223 079 223

Setting for the operate delay of the Ineg> stage. DTOC1: tIneg>> DTOC2: tIneg>> DTOC3: tIneg>>

PSx PSx PSx

076 204 077 204 078 204 079 204

Fig. 3-91

076 214 077 214 078 214 079 214 076 224 077 224 078 224 079 224

Setting for the operate delay of the Ineg>> stage. DTOC1: tIneg>>> DTOC2: tIneg>>> DTOC3: tIneg>>>

PSx PSx PSx

076 205 077 205 078 205 079 205

Fig. 3-91

076 215 077 215 078 215 079 215 076 225 077 225 078 225 079 225

Setting for the operate delay of the Ineg>>> stage. DTOC1: IN> DTOC2: IN> DTOC3: IN>

PSx PSx PSx

076 054 077 054 078 054 079 054

Fig. 3-92

076 164 077 164 078 164 079 164 076 184 077 184 078 184 079 184

Setting for the operate value IN>.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7-49

7 Settings (continued)

DTOC1: IN>> DTOC2: IN>> DTOC3: IN>>

PSx PSx PSx

076 055 077 055 078 055 079 055

Fig. 3-92

076 165 077 165 078 165 079 165 076 185 077 185 078 185 079 185

Setting for the operate value IN>>. DTOC1: IN>>> DTOC2: IN>>> DTOC3: IN>>>

PSx PSx PSx

076 056 077 056 078 056 079 056

Fig. 3-92

076 166 077 166 078 166 079 166 076 186 077 186 078 186 079 186

Setting for the operate value IN>>>. DTOC1: IN> dynamic DTOC2: IN> dynamic DTOC3: IN> dynamic

PSx PSx PSx

076 154 077 154 078 154 079 154

Fig. 3-92

076 174 077 174 078 174 079 174 076 194 077 194 078 194 079 194

Setting for the operate value IN> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing. DTOC1: IN>> dynamic DTOC2: IN>> dynamic DTOC3: IN>> dynamic

PSx PSx PSx

076 155 077 155 078 155 079 155

Fig. 3-92

076 175 077 175 078 175 079 175 076 195 077 195 078 195 079 195

Setting for the operate value IN>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing. DTOC1: IN>>> dynamic DTOC2: IN>>> dynamic DTOC3: IN>>> dynamic

PSx PSx PSx

076 156 077 156 078 156 079 156

Fig. 3-92

076 176 077 176 078 176 079 176 076 196 077 196 078 196 079 196

Setting for the operate value IN>>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing. DTOC1: tIN> DTOC2: tIN> DTOC3: tIN>

PSx PSx PSx

076 060 077 060 078 060 079 060

Fig. 3-92

076 170 077 170 078 170 079 170 076 190 077 190 078 190 079 190

Setting for the operate delay of the IN> stage. DTOC1: tIN>> DTOC2: tIN>> DTOC3: tIN>>

PSx PSx PSx

076 061 077 061 078 061 079 061

Fig. 3-92

076 171 077 171 078 171 079 171 076 191 077 191 078 191 079 191

Setting for the operate delay of the IN>> stage. DTOC1: tIN>>> DTOC2: tIN>>> DTOC3: tIN>>>

PSx PSx PSx

076 062 077 062 078 062 079 062

Fig. 3-92

076 172 077 172 078 172 079 172 076 192 077 192 078 192 079 192

Setting for the operate delay of the IN>>> stage.

7-50

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

Inverse-time overcurrent protection

IDMT1: Enable

PSx

081 050 082 050 083 050 084 050

IDMT2: Enable IDMT3: Enable

PSx PSx

081 170 082 170 083 170 084 170

Fig. 3-96

081 190 082 190 083 190 084 190

This setting specifies the parameter subset to be enabled for inverse-time overcurrent protection. IDMT1: Block tim.st. IN PSx IDMT2: Block tim.st. IN PSx IDMT3: Block tim.st. IN PSx

081 068 082 068 083 068 084 068

Fig. 3-103

081 188 082 188 083 188 084 188 081 208 082 208 083 208 084 208

This setting defines whether blocking of the residual current stages will take place for single-pole or multi-pole phase current starting. IDMT1: Gen.starting modePSx

081 059 082 059 083 059 084 059

IDMT2: Gen.starting modePSx IDMT3: Gen.starting modePSx

081 179 082 179 083 179 084 179

Fig. 3-102, 3-103, 3-105

081 199 082 199 083 199 084 199

This setting defines whether starting of the negative-sequence and residual current stages will result in the formation of the general starting signal of IDMT protection. IDMT1: tGS IDMT2: tGS IDMT3: tGS

PSx PSx PSx

081 058 082 058 083 058 084 058

Fig. 3-105

081 178 082 178 083 178 084 178 081 198 082 198 083 198 084 198

Setting for the operate delay of the general starting signal of IDMT protection. IDMT1: Rush restr.enabl PSx

081 060 082 060 083 060 084 060

IDMT2: Rush restr.enabl PSx IDMT3: Rush restr.enabl PSx

081 180 082 180 083 180 084 180

Fig. 3-101, 3-102

081 200 082 200 083 200 084 200

Setting as to whether the inrush restraint of differential protection shall be able to block the inverse-time overcurrent protection function. IDMT1: Iref,P IDMT2: Iref,P IDMT3: Iref,P

PSx PSx PSx

081 051 082 051 083 051 084 051

Fig. 3-101

081 171 082 171 083 171 084 171 081 191 082 191 083 191 084 191

Setting for the reference current (phase current system). IDMT1: Iref,P dynamic PSx IDMT2: Iref,P dynamic PSx IDMT3: Iref,P dynamic PSx

081 052 082 052 083 052 084 052

Fig. 3-101

081 172 082 172 083 172 084 172 081 192 082 192 083 192 084 192

Setting for the reference current (phase current system) in dynamic mode. This threshold value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing. IDMT1: Characteristic P PSx IDMT2: Characteristic P PSx IDMT3: Characteristic P PSx

081 053 082 053 083 053 084 053

Fig. 3-101

081 173 082 173 083 173 084 173 081 193 082 193 083 193 084 193

Setting for the tripping characteristic (phase current system). IDMT1: Factor kt,P IDMT2: Factor kt,P IDMT3: Factor kt,P

PSx PSx PSx

081 054 082 054 083 054 084 054

Fig. 3-101

081 174 082 174 083 174 084 174 081 194 082 194 083 194 084 194

Setting for factor kt,P of the starting characteristic (phase current system).

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7-51

7 Settings (continued)

IDMT1: Min. trip t. P PSx IDMT2: Min. trip t. P PSx IDMT3: Min. trip t. P PSx

081 057 082 057 083 057 084 057

Fig. 3-101

081 177 082 177 083 177 084 177 081 197 082 197 083 197 084 197

Setting for the minimum trip time (phase current system). IDMT1: Hold time P IDMT2: Hold time P IDMT3: Hold time P

PSx PSx PSx

081 055 082 055 083 055 084 055

Fig. 3-101

081 175 082 175 083 175 084 175 081 195 082 195 083 195 084 195

Setting for the hold time for storing the starting time once the starting has dropped out (phase current system). IDMT1: Release P IDMT2: Release P IDMT3: Release P

PSx PSx PSx

081 056 082 056 083 056 084 056

Fig. 3-101

081 176 082 176 083 176 084 176 081 196 082 196 083 196 084 196

Setting for the release characteristic (phase current system). IDMT1: Iref,neg IDMT2: Iref,neg IDMT3: Iref,neg

PSx PSx PSx

081 111 082 111 083 111 084 111

Fig. 3-102

081 121 082 121 083 121 084 121 081 131 082 131 083 131 084 131

Setting for the reference current (negative-sequence current system). IDMT1: Iref,neg dynamic PSx IDMT2: Iref,neg dynamic PSx IDMT3: Iref,neg dynamic PSx

081 112 082 112 083 112 084 112

Fig. 3-102

081 122 082 122 083 122 084 122 081 132 082 132 083 132 084 132

Setting for the reference current (negative-sequence current system). This value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing.. IDMT1: Character. neg. PSx IDMT2: Character. neg. PSx IDMT3: Character. neg. PSx

081 113 082 113 083 113 084 113

Fig. 3-102

081 123 082 123 083 123 084 123 081 133 082 133 083 133 084 133

Setting for the tripping characteristic (negative-sequence current system). IDMT1: Factor kt,neg IDMT2: Factor kt,neg IDMT3: Factor kt,neg

PSx PSx PSx

081 114 082 114 083 114 084 114

Fig. 3-102

081 124 082 124 083 124 084 124 081 134 082 134 083 134 084 134

Setting for factor kt,P of the starting characteristic (negative-sequence current system). IDMT1: Min. trip t. neg PSx IDMT2: Min. trip t. neg PSx IDMT3: Min. trip t. neg PSx

081 117 082 117 083 117 084 117

Fig. 3-102

081 127 082 127 083 127 084 127 081 137 082 137 083 137 084 137

Setting for the minimum trip time characteristic (negative-sequence current system). IDMT1: Hold time neg IDMT2: Hold time neg IDMT3: Hold time neg

PSx PSx PSx

081 115 082 115 083 115 084 115

Fig. 3-102

081 125 082 125 083 125 084 125 081 135 082 135 083 135 084 135

Setting for the hold time for storing the starting time once the starting has dropped out characteristic (negative-sequence current system). IDMT1: Release neg IDMT2: Release neg IDMT3: Release neg

PSx PSx PSx

081 116 082 116 083 116 084 116

Fig. 3-102

081 126 082 126 083 126 084 126 081 136 082 136 083 136 084 136

Setting for the release characteristic((negative-sequence current system).

7-52

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

IDMT1: Iref,N IDMT2: Iref,N IDMT3: Iref,N

PSx PSx PSx

081 061 082 061 083 061 084 061

Fig. 3-103

081 181 082 181 083 181 084 181 081 201 082 201 083 201 084 201

Setting for the reference current (residual current system). IDMT1: Iref,N dynamic PSx IDMT2: Iref,N dynamic PSx IDMT3: Iref,N dynamic PSx

081 062 082 062 083 062 084 062

Fig. 3-103

081 182 082 182 083 182 084 182 081 202 082 202 083 202 084 202

Setting for the reference current (residual current system) in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing. IDMT1: Characteristic N PSx IDMT2: Characteristic N PSx IDMT3: Characteristic N PSx

081 063 082 063 083 063 084 063

Fig. 3-103

081 183 082 183 083 183 084 183 081 203 082 203 083 203 084 203

Setting for the tripping characteristic (residual current system). IDMT1: Factor kt,N IDMT2: Factor kt,N IDMT3: Factor kt,N

PSx PSx PSx

081 064 082 064 083 064 084 064

Fig. 3-103

081 184 082 184 083 184 084 184 081 204 082 204 083 204 084 204

Setting for factor kt,N of the starting characteristic (residual current system). IDMT1: Min. trip t. N PSx IDMT2: Min. trip t. N PSx IDMT3: Min. trip t. N PSx

081 067 082 067 083 067 084 067

Fig. 3-103

081 187 082 187 083 187 084 187 081 207 082 207 083 207 084 207

Setting for the minimum trip time (residual current system). IDMT1: Hold time N IDMT2: Hold time N IDMT3: Hold time N

PSx PSx PSx

081 065 082 065 083 065 084 065

Fig. 3-103

081 185 082 185 083 185 084 185 081 205 082 205 083 205 084 205

Setting for the hold time for storing the starting time once the starting has dropped out (residual current system). IDMT1: Release N IDMT2: Release N IDMT3: Release N

PSx PSx PSx

081 066 082 066 083 066 084 066

Fig. 3-103

081 186 082 186 083 186 084 186 081 206 082 206 083 206 084 206

Setting for the release characteristic (residual current system).

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7-53

7 Settings (continued)

Thermal overload protection

THRM1: Enable THRM2: Enable

PSx PSx

081 070 082 070 083 070 084 070

Fig. 3-108

081 090 082 090 083 090 084 090

This setting specifies the parameter subset to be enabled for thermal overload protection. THRM1: Iref THRM2: Iref

PSx PSx

081 074 082 074 083 074 084 074

Fig. 3-111

081 094 082 094 083 094 084 094

Setting for the reference current. THRM1: Factor kP THRM2: Factor kP

PSx PSx

081 075 082 075 083 075 084 075

Fig. 3-111

081 095 082 095 083 095 084 095

The starting factor k must be set in accordance with the maximum permissible continuous thermal current of the protected object: I therm,prot.object k= Inom,prot.object THRM1: Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx THRM2: Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx

081 082 082 082 083 082 084 082

Fig. 3-111

081 102 082 102 083 102 084 102

Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object with current flow. THRM1: Tim.const.2,
081 083 082 083 083 083 084 083

Fig. 3-111

081 103 082 103 083 103 084 103

Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object without current flow. This setting option is only relevant when machines are running. In all other cases time constant 2 must be set equal to time constant 1. THRM1: Max.object temp. PSx THRM2: Max.object temp. PSx

081 077 082 077 083 077 084 077

Fig. 3-111

081 097 082 097 083 097 084 097

Setting for the maximum permissible temperature of the protected object. THRM1: Max. cool. temp. PSx THRM2: Max. cool. temp. PSx

081 080 082 080 083 080 084 080

Fig. 3-111

081 100 082 100 083 100 084 100

Setting for the maximum permissible temperature of the coolant. Note:

This setting is only effective if the coolant temperature is measured via the PT100 or the 20mA input.

THRM1: Select CTA THRM2: Select CTA

PSx PSx

081 072 082 072 083 072 084 072

Fig. 3-110

081 092 082 092 083 092 084 092

Select the mode of the coolant temperature acquisition. Select from: ¨ No data acquisition. A default temperature value is used instead. ¨ Data acquisition via the PT 100 input ¨ Data acquisition via the 20 mA input. THRM1: Coolant temp. THRM2: Coolant temp.

PSx PSx

081 081 082 081 083 081 084 081

Fig. 3-111

081 101 082 101 083 101 084 101

Setting for the coolant temperature to be used for calculation of the trip time if there is no data acquisition for the coolant temperature. THRM1: Bl. f. CTA fault PSx THRM2: Bl.f. CTA fault PSx

081 073 082 073 083 073 084 073

Fig. 3-110

081 093 082 093 083 093 084 093

This setting specifies whether the thermal overload protection function will be blocked in the event of faulty coolant temperature acquisition.

7-54

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

THRM1: Θ warning THRM2: Θ warning

PSx PSx

081 079 082 079 083 079 084 079

Fig. 3-111

081 099 082 099 083 099 084 099

Setting for the operate value of the warning stage. THRM1: Θ trip THRM2: Θ trip

PSx PSx

081 076 082 076 083 076 084 076

Fig. 3-111

081 096 082 096 083 096 084 096

Setting for the operate value of the trip stage. Note:

If the operating mode has been set to Absolute replica, the setting here will be automatically set to 100% and this parameter is hidden as far as the local control is concerned.

THRM1: Hysteres. Θ,trip PSx THRM2: Hysteres. Θ,trip PSx

081 078 082 078 083 078 084 078

Fig. 3-111

081 098 082 098 083 098 084 098

Setting for the hysteresis of the trip stage. THRM1: Warning pre-trip PSx THRM2: Warning pre-trip PSx

081 085 082 085 083 085 084 085

Fig. 3-111

081 105 082 105 083 105 084 105

A warning will be given in advance of the trip. The time difference between the warning time and the trip time is set here.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7-55

7 Settings (continued)

Time-voltage protection

V<>: Enable

PSx

076 000 077 000 078 000 079 000

Fig. 3-113

The time-voltage protection will be enabled in the parameter subset selected with this setting. V<>: V>

PSx

076 003 077 003 078 003 079 003

Fig. 3-114

076 004 077 004 078 004 079 004

Fig. 3-114

076 005 077 005 078 005 079 005

Fig. 3-114

Setting for the operate value V>. V<>: V>>

PSx

Setting for the operate value V>>. V<>: tV>

PSx

Setting for the operate delay of time-overvoltage stage V>. V<>: tV>>

PSx

076 006 077 006 078 006 079 006

Fig. 3-114

Setting for the operate delay of time-overvoltage stage V>>. V<>: V<

PSx

076 007 077 007 078 007 079 007

Fig. 3-115

076 008 077 008 078 008 079 008

Fig. 3-115

076 046 077 046 078 046 079 046

Fig. 3-115

076 009 077 009 078 009 079 009

Fig. 3-115

Setting for the operate value V<. V<>: V<<

PSx

Setting for the operate value V<<. V<>: Vmin>

PSx

Setting for the operate value Vmin>. V<>: tV<

PSx

Setting for the operate delay of time-undervoltage stage V<. V<>: tV<<

PSx

076 010 077 010 078 010 079 010

Fig. 3-115

Setting for the operate delay of time-undervoltage stage V<<. V<>: tTransient

PSx

076 029 077 029 078 029 079 029

Fig. 3-115

Setting for the time limit of the signals generated by the time-undervoltage stages. V<>: Hyst. V<> meas. PSx

076 048 077 048 078 048 079 048

Fig. 3-114

Setting for the hysteresis of the trigger stages for measured-voltage monitoring.

7-56

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7 Settings (continued)

Over-/underfrequency protection

f<>: Enable

PSx

018 196 018 197 018 198 018 199

Fig. 3-116

This setting specifies the parameter subset to be enabled for over/underfrequency protection. f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>:

Oper. mode f1 Oper. mode f2 Oper. mode f3 Oper. mode f4

PSx PSx PSx PSx

018 120 018 121 018 122 018 123

Fig. 3-119

018 144 018 145 018 146 018 147 018 168 018 169 018 170 018 171 018 192 018 193 018 194 018 195

Setting for the operating mode of the timer stages of over-/underfrequency protection. f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>:

f1 f2 f3 f4

PSx PSx PSx PSx

018 100 018 101 018 102 018 103

Fig. 3-119

018 124 018 125 018 126 018 127 018 148 018 149 018 150 018 151 018 172 018 173 018 174 018 175

Setting for the frequency threshold. The over-/underfrequency protection function operates if one of the following two conditions applies: q The threshold is higher than the set nominal frequency and the frequency exceeds this threshold. q The threshold is lower than the set nominal frequency and the frequency falls below this threshold. Depending on the selected operating mode, a signal will be issued without further monitoring or, alternatively, further monitoring mechanisms will be triggered. f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>:

tf1 tf2 tf3 tf4

PSx PSx PSx PSx

018 104 018 105 018 106 018 107

Fig. 3-119

018 128 018 129 018 130 018 131 018 152 018 153 018 154 018 155 018 176 018 177 018 178 018 179

Setting for the operate delay of over-/underfrequency protection f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>:

df1/dt df2/dt df3/dt df4/dt

PSx PSx PSx PSx

018 108 018 109 018 110 018 111

Fig. 3-119

018 132 018 133 018 134 018 135 018 156 018 157 018 158 018 159 018 180 018 181 018 182 018 183

Setting for the frequency gradient to be monitored. Note: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>:

This setting is ineffective unless the operating mode f with df/dt has been selected. Delta f1 Delta f2 Delta f3 Delta f4

PSx PSx PSx PSx

018 112 018 113 018 114 018 115

Fig. 3-119

018 136 018 137 018 138 018 139 018 160 018 161 018 162 018 163 018 184 018 185 018 186 018 187

Setting for delta f. Note:

This setting is ineffective unless the operating mode f w. Delta f/Delta t has been selected.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

7-57

7 Settings (continued)

f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>:

Delta t1 Delta t2 Delta t3 Delta t4

PSx PSx PSx PSx

018 116 018 117 018 118 018 119

Fig. 3-119

018 140 018 141 018 142 018 143 018 164 018 165 018 166 018 167 018 188 018 189 018 190 018 191

Setting for delta t. Note:

7-58

This setting is ineffective unless the operating mode f w. Delta f/Delta t has been selected.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8 Information and Control Functions

8 Information and Control Functions 8.1 Operation 8.1.1 Cyclic Values 8.1.1.1 Measured Operating Data Measured data input

MEASI: Current IDC

004 134

Fig. 3-17

004 135

Fig. 3-17

004 136

Fig. 3-17

004 180

Fig. 3-18

004 133

Fig. 3-19

005 100

Fig. 3-27

Display of the input current. MEASI: Current IDC p.u. Display of the input current referred to IDC,nom. MEASI: Curr. IDC,lin. p.u. Display of the linearized input current referred to IDC,nom. MEASI: Scaled value IDC,lin Display of the scaled linearized value. MEASI: Temperature Display of the temperature measured by the resistance thermometer. Measured data output

MEASO: Current A-1 MEASO: Current A-2

005 099

Display of the output current for analog measured value output (A-1: channel 1, A-2: channel 2) Main functions

MAIN: Date

003 090

Fig. 3-51

003 091

Fig. 3-51

003 095

Fig. 3-51

Date display. Note:

The date can also be set here.

MAIN: Time of day Display of the time of day. Note:

The time can also be set here.

MAIN: Time switching

Setting for standard time or daylight saving time. This setting is necessary in order to avoid misinterpretation of the times assigned to signals and event data that can be read out through the PC or communication interfaces. MAIN: Frequency f

004 040

Fig. 3-39

005 101

Fig. 3-33

005 102

Fig. 3-33

005 103

Fig. 3-33

005 115

Fig. 3-33

Display of system frequency. MAIN: Curr. IP,max,a prim. Display of the maximum phase current as a primary quantity, end a. MAIN: Curr. IP,max,b prim. Display of the maximum phase current as a primary quantity, end b. MAIN: Curr. IP,max,c prim. Display of the maximum phase current as a primary quantity, end c. MAIN: Curr. IP,max,d prim. Display of the maximum phase current as a primary quantity, end d. P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8-1

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN:

IP,max prim.,delay a IP,max prim.,delay b IP,max prim.,delay c IP,max prim.,delay d

005 162

Fig. 3-33

006 162

Fig. 3-33

007 162

Fig. 3-33

008 162

Fig. 3-33

Display of the delayed maximum current of end a, b, c or d, respectively, as a primary quantity. MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN:

IP,max prim.stored a IP,max prim.stored b IP,max prim.stored c IP,max prim.stored d

005 161

Fig. 3-33

006 161

Fig. 3-33

007 161

Fig. 3-33

008 161

Fig. 3-33

Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current of end a, b, c or d, respectively, as a primary quantity. MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN:

Current Imin,a prim. Current Imin,b prim. Current Imin,c prim. Current Imin,d prim.

005 104

Fig. 3-33

005 105

Fig. 3-33

005 106

Fig. 3-33

005 117

Fig. 3-33

Display of the minimum phase current of end a, b, c or d, respectively, as a primary quantity. MAIN: Current IA,a prim.

005 021

Fig. 3-33

006 021

Fig. 3-33

007 021

Fig. 3-33

005 022

Fig. 3-33

006 022

Fig. 3-33

007 022

Fig. 3-33

005 023

Fig. 3-33

006 023

Fig. 3-33

007 023

Fig. 3-33

005 024

Fig. 3-33

006 024

Fig. 3-33

007 024

Fig. 3-33

Display of phase current A as a primary quantity, end a. MAIN: Current IB,a prim. Display of phase current B as a primary quantity, end a. MAIN: Current IC,a prim. Display of phase current C as a primary quantity, end a. MAIN: Current IA,b prim. Display of phase current A as a primary quantity, end b. MAIN: Current IB,b prim. Display of phase current B as a primary quantity, end b. MAIN: Current IC,b prim. Display of phase current C as a primary quantity, end b. MAIN: Current IA,c prim. Display of phase current A as a primary quantity, end c. MAIN: Current IB,c prim. Display of phase current B as a primary quantity, end c. MAIN: Current IC,c prim. Display of phase current C as a primary quantity, end c. MAIN: Current IA,d prim. Display of phase current A as a primary quantity, end d. MAIN: Current IB,d prim. Display of phase current B as a primary quantity, end d. MAIN: Current IC,d prim. Display of phase current C as a primary quantity, end d.

8-2

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

MAIN: Current IN,a prim.

005 121

Fig. 3-35

Display of the residual current calculated by the P63x from the sum of the phase currents, end a, as a primary quantity. MAIN: Current IN,b prim.

005 122

Fig. 3-35

Display of the residual current calculated by the P63x from the sum of the phase currents, end b, as a primary quantity. MAIN: Current IN,c prim.

005 123

Fig. 3-35

Display of the residual current calculated by the P63x from the sum of the phase currents, end c, as a primary quantity. MAIN: Current IN,d prim.

005 124

Fig. 3-36

Display of the residual current calculated by the P63x from the sum of the phase currents, end d, as a primary quantity. MAIN: Current IY,a prim.

005 131

Fig. 3-35

Display of the current measured by the P63x at transformer T14, end a, as a primary quantity. MAIN: Current IY,b prim.

005 132

Fig. 3-35

Display of the current measured by the P63x at transformer T24, end b, as a primary quantity. MAIN: Current IY,c prim.

005 133

Fig. 3-35

Display of the current measured by the P63x at transformer T34, end c, as a primary quantity. MAIN: Voltage V prim.

005 018

Fig. 3-38

005 111

Fig. 3-33, 3-34

005 112

Fig. 3-33, 3-34

005 113

Fig. 3-33, 3-34

005 116

Fig. 3-33, 3-34

Display of the voltage measured by the P63x, as a primary quantity. MAIN: Curr. IP,max,a p.u. Display of the maximum phase current, end a, as referred to Inom. MAIN: Curr. IP,max,b p.u. Display of the maximum phase current, end b, as referred to Inom. MAIN: Curr. IP,max,c p.u. Display of the maximum phase current, end c, as referred to Inom. MAIN: Curr. IP,max,d p.u. Display of the maximum phase current, end d, as referred to Inom.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8-3

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

MAIN: IP,max p.u.,delay a

005 163

Fig. 3-33, 3-34

Display of the delayed maximum phase current, end a, as referred to Inom. MAIN: IP,max p.u.,delay b

006 163

Fig. 3-33, 3-34

Display of the delayed maximum phase current, end b, as referred to Inom. MAIN: IP,max p.u.,delay c

007 163

Fig. 3-33, 3-34

Display of the delayed maximum phase current, end c, as referred to Inom. MAIN: IP,max p.u.,delay d

008 163

Fig. 3-33, 3-34

Display of the delayed maximum phase current, end d, as referred to Inom. MAIN: IP,max p.u.,stored a

005 160

Fig. 3-33, 3-34

Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current, end a, as referred to Inom. MAIN: IP,max p.u.,stored b

006 160

Fig. 3-33, 3-34

Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current, end b, as referred to Inom. MAIN: IP,max p.u.,stored c

007 160

Fig. 3-33, 3-34

Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current, end c, as referred to Inom. MAIN: IP,max p.u.,stored d

008 160

Fig. 3-33, 3-34

Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current, end d, as referred to Inom. MAIN: Current Imin,a p.u.

005 107

Fig. 3-33

005 108

Fig. 3-33

005 109

Fig. 3-33

005 118

Fig. 3-33

Display of the minimum phase current, end a, as referred to Inom. MAIN: Current Imin,b p.u. Display of the minimum phase current, end b, as referred to Inom. MAIN: Current Imin,c p.u. Display of the minimum phase current, end c, as referred to Inom. MAIN: Current Imin,d p.u. Display of the minimum phase current, end d, as referred to Inom.

8-4

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

MAIN: Current IA,a p.u.

005 031

Fig. 3-33

006 031

Fig. 3-33

007 031

Fig. 3-33

005 032

Fig. 3-33

006 032

Fig. 3-33

007 032

Fig. 3-33

005 033

Fig. 3-33

006 033

Fig. 3-33

007 033

Fig. 3-33

005 039

Fig. 3-33

006 034

Fig. 3-33

007 034

Fig. 3-33

005 141

Fig. 3-35

Display of phase current A, end a, as referred to Inom. MAIN: Current IB,a p.u. Display of phase current B, end a, as referred to Inom. MAIN: Current IC,a p.u. Display of phase current C, end a, as referred to Inom. MAIN: Current IA,b p.u. Display of phase current A, end b, as referred to Inom. MAIN: Current IB,b p.u. Display of phase current B, end b, as referred to Inom. MAIN: Current IC,b p.u. Display of phase current C, end b, as referred to Inom. MAIN: Current IA,c p.u. Display of phase current A, end c, as referred to Inom. MAIN: Current IB,c p.u. Display of phase current B, end c, as referred to Inom. MAIN: Current IC,c p.u. Display of phase current C, end c, as referred to Inom. MAIN: Current IA,d p.u. Display of phase current A, end d, as referred to Inom. MAIN: Current IB,d p.u. Display of phase current B, end d, as referred to Inom. MAIN: Current IC,d p.u. Display of phase current C, end d, as referred to Inom. MAIN: Current IN,a p.u.

Display of the residual current calculated by the P63x from the sum of the phase currents, end a, as referred to Inom. MAIN: Current IN,b p.u.

005 142

Fig. 3-35

Display of the residual current calculated by the P63x from the sum of the phase currents, end b, as referred to Inom. MAIN: Current IN,c p.u.

005 143

Fig. 3-35

Display of the residual current calculated by the P63x from the sum of the phase currents, end c, as referred to Inom. MAIN: Current IN,d p.u.

005 144

Fig. 3-36

Display of the residual current calculated by the P63x from the sum of the phase currents, end d, as referred to Inom. MAIN: Current IY,a p.u.

005 151

Fig. 3-35

Display of the current measured by the P63x at transformer T14, end a, as referred to Inom. MAIN: Current IY,b p.u.

005 152

Fig. 3-35

Display of the current measured by the P63x at transformer T24, end a, as referred to Inom.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8-5

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

MAIN: Current IY,c p.u.

005 153

Fig. 3-35

Display of the current measured by the P63x at transformer T34, end a, as referred to Inom. MAIN: IP,max,add p.u.

005 114

Fig. 3-37

005 110

Fig. 3-37

Display of the maximum phase current for the virtual end, as referred to Inom.. The virtual end is formed according to the selection at MA I N : Cur r e nt s um m ati on. MAIN: IP,min,add p.u.

Display of the minimum phase current for the virtual end, as referred to Inom.. The virtual end is formed according to the selection at MA I N : Cur r e nt s um m ati o n. MAIN: Current IA,add p.u.

005 038

Fig. 3-37

Display of phase current A, for the virtual end, as referred to Inom. The virtual end is formed according to the selection at M A I N: C ur r e nt s um m atio n. MAIN: Current IB,add p.u.

006 038

Fig. 3-37

Display of phase current B, for the virtual end, as referred to Inom. The virtual end is formed according to the selection at M A I N: C ur r e nt s um m atio n. MAIN: Current IC,add p.u.

007 038

Fig. 3-37

Display of phase current C, for the virtual end, as referred to Inom. The virtual end is formed according to the selection at M A I N: C ur r e nt s um m atio n. MAIN: Current IN,add p.u.

005 155

Fig. 3-37

Display of residual current for the virtual end, as referred to Inom. The virtual end is formed according to the selection at M A I N: C ur r e nt s um m atio n. MAIN: Voltage V p.u.

005 019

Fig. 3-38

005 089

Fig. 3-40

006 089

Fig. 3-40

007 089

Fig. 3-40

005 092

Fig. 3-40

006 092

Fig. 3-40

007 092

Fig. 3-40

005 093

Fig. 3-40

006 093

Fig. 3-40

007 093

Fig. 3-40

Display of the voltage measured by the P63x, as as referred to Vnom. MAIN: Angle phi AB, end a Display of the phase shift between A-B, end a. MAIN: Angle phi BC, end a Display of the phase shift between B-C, end a. MAIN: Angle phi CA, end a Display of the phase shift between C-A, end a. MAIN: Angle phi AB, end b Display of the phase shift between A-B, end b. MAIN: Angle phi BC, end b Display of the phase shift between B-C, end b. MAIN: Angle phi CA, end b Display of the phase shift between C-A, end b. MAIN: Angle phi AB, end c Display of the phase shift between A-B, end c. MAIN: Angle phi BC, end c Display of the phase shift between B-C, end c. MAIN: Angle phi CA, end c Display of the phase shift between C-A, end c.

8-6

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

MAIN: Angle phi AB, end d

005 095

Fig. 3-40

007 095

Fig. 3-40

006 095

Fig. 3-40

005 090

Fig. 3-41

006 090

Fig. 3-41

007 090

Fig. 3-41

005 091

Fig. 3-41

006 091

Fig. 3-41

007 091

Fig. 3-41

005 094

Fig. 3-41

006 094

Fig. 3-41

007 094

Fig. 3-41

005 077

Fig. 3-42

Display of the phase shift between A-B, end d. MAIN: Angle phi CA, end d Display of the phase shift between C-A, end d. MAIN: Angle phi NY, end d Display of the phase shift between N-Y, end d. MAIN: Angle phi A, end a-b Display of the phase shift between ends a and b for phase A. MAIN: Angle phi B, end a-b Display of the phase shift between ends a and b for phase B. MAIN: Angle phi C, end a-b Display of the phase shift between ends a and b for phase C. MAIN: Angle phi A, end a-c Display of the phase shift between ends a and c for phase A. MAIN: Angle phi B, end a-c Display of the phase shift between ends a and c for phase B. MAIN: Angle phi C, end a-c Display of the phase shift between ends a and c for phase C. MAIN: Angle phi A, end a-d Display of the phase shift between ends a and d for phase A. MAIN: Angle phi B, end a-d Display of the phase shift between ends a and d for phase B. MAIN: Angle phi C, end a-d Display of the phase shift between ends a and d for phase C. MAIN: Angle phi NY, end a

Display of the phase shift between the residual current calculated by the P63x from the sum of the phase currents at end a and the current measured at transformer T14. MAIN: Angle phi NY, end b

005 078

Fig. 3-42

Display of the phase shift between the residual current calculated by the P63x from the sum of the phase currents at end b and the current measured at transformer T24. MAIN: Angle phi NY, end c

005 079

Fig. 3-42

Display of the phase shift between the residual current calculated by the P63x from the sum of the phase currents at end c and the current measured at transformer T34.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8-7

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

Differential protection

DIFF: Diff. current 1

005 080

Fig. 3-82

Display of the differential current for measuring system 1, as referred to Iref. DIFF: Diff. current 2

006 080

Fig. 3-82

Display of the differential current for measuring system 2, as referred to Iref. DIFF: Diff. current 3

007 080

Fig. 3-82

Display of the differential current for measuring system 3, as referred to Iref. DIFF: Restrain. current 1

005 081

Fig. 3-82

Display of the restraining current for measuring system 1, as referred to Iref. DIFF: Restrain. current 2

006 081

Fig. 3-82

Display of the restraining current for measuring system 2, as referred to Iref. DIFF: Restrain. current 3

007 081

Fig. 3-82

Display of the restraining current for measuring system 3, as referred to Iref. Ground differential protection REF_1: Diff. current, REF_1 (Br.: Restricted earth fault pr.) REF_2: Diff. current, REF_2 REF_3: Diff. current, REF_3

008 080

Fig. 3-87

008 070 008 060

Display of the differential current, as referred to Iref. REF_1: Restrain.curr.,REF_1 REF_2: Restrain.curr.,REF_2 REF_3: Restrain.curr.,REF_3

008 081

Fig. 3-87

008 071 008 061

Display of the restraining current, as referred to Iref.

8-8

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

Thermal overload protection

THRM1: Object temperat.,TH1

004 151

Fig. 3-111

Display of the temperature of the protected object as determined by function THRM1. THRM2: Object temperat.,TH2

004 171

Display of the temperature of the protected object as determined by function THRM2. THRM1: Coolant temp. TH1

004 154

Fig. 3-111

Display of the coolant temperature. Depending on the setting at T H RM 1: S el ec t CT A PSx for the coolant temperature acquisition, one of the following values will be displayed: Setting Default temp. value : Display of the set temperature value. Setting From PT 100: Display of the temperature measured by the resistance thermometer. ¨ Setting From 20 mA input: Display of the temperature measured via the 20 mA input. ¨ ¨

THRM2: Coolant temp. TH2

004 174

Display of the coolant temperature. Depending on the setting at T H RM 2: S el ec t CT A PSx for the coolant temperature acquisition, one of the following values will be displayed: Setting Default temp. value : Display of the set temperature value. Setting From PT 100: Display of the temperature measured by the resistance thermometer. ¨ Setting From 20 mA input: Display of the temperature measured via the 20 mA input. ¨ ¨

THRM1: Pre-trip t. left,TH1

004 153

Fig. 3-111

Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection function THRM1 will reach the tripping threshold. THRM2: Pre-trip t. left,TH2

004 173

Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection function THRM2 will reach the tripping threshold. THRM1: Status TH1 replica

004 150

Fig. 3-111

Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function THRM1. THRM2: Status TH2 replica

004 175

Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function THRM2. THRM1: Temp. offset repl. 1 THRM2: Temp. offset repl. 2

004 170

Fig. 3-111

004 190

Display of the additional reserve if the coolant temperature is taken into . This display is relevant if the coolant temperature has been set to a value below the maximum permissible coolant temperature or, in other words, if the thermal model has been shifted downwards. If, on the other hand, the coolant temperature and the maximum permissible coolant temperature have been set to the same value, then the coolant temperature is not taken into and the characteristic is a function of the current only. The additional reserve amounts to 0 in this case.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8-9

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

8.1.1.2 Physical State Signals Binary inputs

8-10

INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP:

State U 701 State U 702 State U 703 State U 704 State U 705 State U 706 State U 801 State U 802 State U 803 State U 804 State U 805 State U 806 State U 807 State U 808 State U 809 State U 810 State U 811 State U 812 State U 813 State U 814 State U 815 State U 816 State U 817 State U 818 State U 819 State U 820 State U 821 State U 822 State U 823 State U 824 State U 901 State U 902 State U 903 State U 904 State U 1001 State U 1002 State U 1003 State U 1004 State U 1005 State U 1006

152 108 152 111 152 114 152 117 152 120 152 123 184 001 184 005 184 009 184 013 184 017 184 021 184 025 184 029 184 033 184 037 184 041 184 045 184 049 184 053 184 057 184 061 184 065 184 069 184 073 184 077 184 081 184 085 184 089 184 093 152 144 152 147 152 150 152 153 152 162 152 165 152 168 152 171 152 174 152 177

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP:

State U 1201 State U 1202 State U 1203 State U 1204 State U 1401 State U 1402 State U 1403 State U 1404 State U 1405 State U 1406 State U 1407 State U 1408 State U 1409 State U 1410 State U 1411 State U 1412 State U 1413 State U 1414 State U 1415 State U 1416 State U 1417 State U 1418 State U 1419 State U 1420 State U 1421 State U 1422 State U 1423 State U 1424 State U 1601 State U 1602 State U 1603 State U 1604 State U 1605 State U 1606 State U 2001 State U 2002 State U 2003 State U 2004

152 198 152 201 152 204 152 207 190 001 190 005 190 009 190 013 190 017 190 021 190 025 190 029 190 033 190 037 190 041 190 045 190 049 190 053 190 057 190 061 190 065 190 069 190 073 190 077 190 081 190 085 190 089 190 093 192 001 192 005 192 009 192 013 192 017 192 021 153 086 153 089 153 092 153 095

The state of the binary signal inputs is displayed as follows: o

Without function

No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.

o

Low:

Not energized.

o

High:

Energized.

This display appears regardless of the setting for the binary signal input mode.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8-11

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

Binary outputs

8-12

OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP:

State K 701 State K 702 State K 703 State K 704 State K 705 State K 706 State K 707 State K 708 State K 801 State K 802 State K 901 State K 902 State K 903 State K 904 State K 905 State K 906 State K 907 State K 908 State K 1001 State K 1002 State K 1003 State K 1004 State K 1005 State K 1006

150 144 150 147 150 150 150 153 150 156 150 159 150 162 150 165 150 168 150 171 150 192 150 195 150 198 150 201 150 204 150 207 150 210 150 213 150 216 150 219 150 222 150 225 150 228 150 231

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP:

State K 1201 State K 1202 State K 1601 State K 1602 State K 1603 State K 1604 State K 1605 State K 1606 State K 1607 State K 1608 State K 1801 State K 1802 State K 1803 State K 1804 State K 1805 State K 1806 State K 2001 State K 2002 State K 2003 State K 2004 State K 2005 State K 2006 State K 2007 State K 2008

151 008 151 011 171 001 171 005 171 009 171 013 171 017 171 021 171 025 171 029 173 001 173 005 173 009 173 013 173 017 173 021 151 200 151 203 151 206 151 209 151 212 151 215 151 218 151 221

The state of the output relays is displayed as follows: o

Without function

No functions are assigned to the output relay.

o

Low:

The output relay is not energized.

o

High:

The output relay is energized.

This display appears regardless of the operating mode set for the output relay.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8-13

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

LED indicators

LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED:

State H 2 State H 3 State H 4 State H 5 State H 6 State H 7 State H 8 State H 9 State H 10 State H 11 State H 12 State H 13 State H 14 State H 15 State H 16

085 000 085 003 085 006 085 009 085 012 085 015 085 018 085 021 085 024 085 027 085 030 085 033 085 036 085 039 085 042

The state of the LED indicators is displayed as follows:

8-14

o

Inactive:

The LED indicator is not energized.

o

Active:

The LED indicator is energized.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

8.1.1.3 Logic State Signals Local control

LOC: Illumination on EXT

037 101

Communication link

COMM1: Command block. EXT COMM1: Sig./meas. block EXT

003 173

Fig. 3-6

037 074

COMM1: Command blocking COMM1: Sig./meas.val.block.

003 174

Fig. 3-7, 3-8,3-9 Fig. 3-6

COMM1: IEC 870-5-103 COMM1: IEC 870-5-101 COMM1: IEC 870-5,ILS COMM1: MODBUS COMM1: DNP3

003 219

Fig. 3-7, 3-8,3-9 Fig. 3-7

003 218

Fig. 3-8

003 221

Fig. 3-9

003 223

Fig. 3-10

003 230

Fig. 3-11

IRIGB: Enabled IRIGB: Synchron. ready

023 201

Fig. 3-12

023 202

Fig. 3-12

MEASI: Enabled MEASI: PT100 faulty MEASI: Overload 20mA input MEASI: Open circ. 20mA inp.

035 008

Fig. 3-14

040 190

Fig. 3-19

040 191

Fig. 3-17

040 192

Fig. 3-17

OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP:

Block outp.rel. EXT Reset latch. EXT Outp. relays blocked Latching reset

040 014

Fig. 3-20

040 015

Fig. 3-20

021 015

Fig. 3-20

040 088

Fig. 3-20

MEASO: Enabled MEASO: Outp. enabled EXT MEASO: Reset output EXT MEASO: Output reset MEASO: Valid BCD value MEASO: 1-digit bit 0 (BCD) MEASO: 1-digit bit 1 (BCD) MEASO: 1-digit bit 2 (BCD) MEASO: 1-digit bit 3 (BCD) MEASO: 10-digit bit 0 (BCD) MEASO: 10-digit bit 1 (BCD) MEASO: 10-digit bit 2 (BCD) MEASO: 10-digit bit 3 (BCD) MEASO: 100-dig. bit 0 (BCD) MEASO: 100-dig. bit 1 (BCD) MEASO: Value A-1 valid MEASO: Value A-2 valid MEASO: Value A-1 output MEASO: Value A-2 output

037 102

Fig. 3-22

036 085

Fig. 3-23

036 087

Fig. 3-24

037 117

Fig. 3-24

037 050

Fig. 3-25

037 051

Fig. 3-25

037 052

Fig. 3-25

037 053

Fig. 3-25

037 054

Fig. 3-25

037 055

Fig. 3-25

037 056

Fig. 3-25

037 057

Fig. 3-25

037 058

Fig. 3-25

037 059

Fig. 3-25

037 060

Fig. 3-25

069 014

Fig. 3-27

IRIG-B interface

Measured data input

Binary outputs

Measured data output

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

037 075

069 015 037 118

Fig. 3-27

037 119

8-15

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

Main functions

8-16

MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN:

Enable protect. EXT Disable protect. EXT Blocking 1 EXT Blocking 2 EXT Blocking 3 EXT Blocking 4 EXT Reset latch.trip EXT Trip cmd. block. EXT M.c.b. trip V EXT

003 027

Fig. 3-43

003 026

Fig. 3-43

040 060

Fig. 3-45

040 061

Fig. 3-45

040 116

Fig. 3-45

040 117

Fig. 3-45

040 138

Fig. 3-49

036 045

Fig. 3-49

004 061

MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN:

Switch dyn.param.EXT Man. trip cmd. EXT Test mode EXT Reset indicat. EXT Min-pulse clock EXT Prot. ext. enabled Prot. ext. disabled Protect. not ready Test mode Blocked/faulty Trip cmd. blocked Latch. trip c. reset Manual trip signal Gen. trip signal Gen. trip signal 1 Gen. trip signal 2 Gen. trip signal 3 Gen. trip signal 4 Gen. trip command 1

036 033

Fig. 3-113, 3-119 Fig. 3-44

037 018

Fig. 3-49

037 070

Fig. 3-53

065 001

Fig. 3-52

060 060

Fig. 3-51

003 028

Fig. 3-43

038 046

Fig. 3-43

004 060

Fig. 3-46

037 071

Fig. 3-53

004 065

Fig. 3-46

021 013

Fig. 3-49

040 139

Fig. 3-49

034 017

Fig. 3-49

036 251

Fig. 3-49

036 005

Fig. 3-49

036 023

Fig. 3-49

036 108

Fig. 3-49

036 109

Fig. 3-49

036 071

MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN:

Gen. trip command 2 Gen. trip command 3 Gen. trip command 4 General starting Dynam. param. active Without function Without function Auxiliary address

036 022

Fig. 3-49, 3-111 Fig. 3-49

036 113

Fig. 3-49

036 114

Fig. 3-49

036 000

Fig. 3-47

040 090

Fig. 3-44

060 000 061 000 038 000

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

Parameter subset selection

Self-monitoring

PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS:

Control via EXT Activate PS 1 EXT Activate PS 2 EXT Activate PS 3 EXT Activate PS 4 EXT Control via Ext.sel.param.subset PS 1 activated ext. PS 2 activated ext. PS 3 activated ext. PS 4 activated ext. Actual param. subset PS 1 active PS 2 active PS 3 active PS 4 active

SFMON: Warning (LED) SFMON: Warning (relay) SFMON: Warm restart exec. SFMON: Cold restart exec. SFMON: Cold restart SFMON: Cold rest./SW update SFMON: Blocking/ HW failure SFMON: Relay Kxx faulty SFMON: Hardware clock fail. SFMON: Battery failure SFMON: Invalid SW d.loaded SFMON: +15V supply faulty SFMON: +24V supply faulty SFMON: -15V supply faulty SFMON: Wrong module slot 1 SFMON: Wrong module slot 2 SFMON: Wrong module slot 3 SFMON: Wrong module slot 4 SFMON: Wrong module slot 5 SFMON: Wrong module slot 6 SFMON: Wrong module slot 7 SFMON: Wrong module slot 8 SFMON: Wrong module slot 9 SFMON: Wrong module slot 10 SFMON: Wrong module slot 11 SFMON: Wrong module slot 12 SFMON: Wrong module slot 13 SFMON: Wrong module slot 14 SFMON: Wrong module slot 15 SFMON: Wrong module slot 16 SFMON: Wrong module slot 17 SFMON: Wrong module slot 18 SFMON: Wrong module slot 19 SFMON: Wrong module slot 20 SFMON: Wrong module slot 21

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

036 101

Fig. 3-54

065 002

Fig. 3-54

065 003

Fig. 3-54

065 004

Fig. 3-54

065 005

Fig. 3-54

036 102

Fig. 3-54

003 061

Fig. 3-54

036 094

Fig. 3-54

036 095

Fig. 3-54

036 096

Fig. 3-54

036 097

Fig. 3-54

003 062

Fig. 3-54

036 090

Fig. 3-54

036 091

Fig. 3-54

036 092

Fig. 3-54

036 093

Fig. 3-54

036 070

Fig. 3-55

036 100

Fig. 3-55

041 202 041 201 093 024 093 025 090 019 041 200 093 040 090 010 096 121 093 081 093 082 093 080 096 100 096 101 096 102 096 103 096 104 096 105 096 106 096 107 096 108 096 109 096 110 096 111 096 112 096 113 096 114 096 115 096 116 096 117 096 118 096 119 096 120

8-17

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

SFMON: Defect.module slot 1 SFMON: Defect.module slot 2 SFMON: Defect.module slot 3 SFMON: Defect.module slot 4 SFMON: Defect.module slot 5 SFMON: Defect.module slot 6 SFMON: Defect.module slot 7 SFMON: Defect.module slot 8 SFMON: Defect.module slot 9 SFMON: Defect.module slot10 SFMON: Defect.module slot11 SFMON: Defect.module slot12 SFMON: Defect.module slot13 SFMON: Defect.module slot14 SFMON: Defect.module slot15 SFMON: Defect.module slot16 SFMON: Defect.module slot17 SFMON: Defect.module slot18 SFMON: Defect.module slot19 SFMON: Defect.module slot20 SFMON: Defect.module slot21 SFMON: Module A DPR faulty SFMON: Module A RAM faulty SFMON: Module Y DPR faulty SFMON: Module Y RAM faulty SFMON: Error K 1201 SFMON: Error K 1202 SFMON: Error K 1601 SFMON: Error K 1602 SFMON: Error K 1603 SFMON: Error K 1604 SFMON: Error K 1605 SFMON: Error K 1606 SFMON: Error K 1607 SFMON: Error K 1608 SFMON: Error K 1801 SFMON: Error K 1802 SFMON: Error K 1803 SFMON: Error K 1804 SFMON: Error K 1805 SFMON: Error K 1806 SFMON: Error K 2001 SFMON: Error K 2002 SFMON: Error K 2003 SFMON: Error K 2004 SFMON: Error K 2005 SFMON: Error K 2006 SFMON: Error K 2007 SFMON: Error K 2008 SFMON: Undef. operat. code SFMON: Invalid arithm. op. SFMON: Undefined interrupt 8-18

097 000 097 001 097 002 097 003 097 004 097 005 097 006 097 007 097 008 097 009 097 010 097 011 097 012 097 013 097 014 097 015 097 016 097 017 097 018 097 019 097 020 093 070 093 071 093 110 093 111 097 118 097 119 097 150 097 151 097 152 097 153 097 154 097 155 097 156 097 157 097 166 097 167 097 168 097 169 097 170 097 171 097 182 097 183 097 184 097 185 097 186 097 187 097 188 097 189 093 010 093 011 093 012

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

SFMON: Exception oper.syst. SFMON: Protection failure SFMON: Checksum error param SFMON: Clock sync. error SFMON: Interm.volt.fail.RAM SFMON: Overflow MT_RC SFMON: Semaph. MT_RC block. SFMON: Inval. SW vers.COMM1 SFMON: Invalid SW vers. Y SFMON: Time-out module Y SFMON: M.c.b. trip V SFMON: Invalid scaling A-1 SFMON: Invalid scaling A-2 SFMON: Invalid scaling IDC SFMON: PT100 open circuit SFMON: Overload 20 mA input SFMON: Open circ. 20mA inp. SFMON: Setting error f<> SFMON: Iref, a inval. range SFMON: Iref, b inval. range SFMON: Iref, c inval. range SFMON: Iref, d inval. range SFMON: Matching fail. end a SFMON: Matching fail. end b SFMON: Matching fail. end c SFMON: Matching fail. end d SFMON: Ratio match.fact. >3 SFMON: 2. match.fact.<0.7 SFMON: Inv.range Iref REF_1 SFMON: Inv.range Iref REF_2 SFMON: Inv.range Iref REF_3 SFMON: Match.f. kam,N REF_1 SFMON: Match.f. kam,N REF_2 SFMON: Match.f. kam,N REF_3 SFMON: Match.f. kam,Y REF_1 SFMON: Match.f. kam,Y REF_2 SFMON: Match.f. kam,Y REF_3 SFMON: Rat.match.f.>3 REF_1 SFMON: Rat.match.f.>3 REF_2 SFMON: Rat.match.f.>3 REF_3 SFMON: Min.mtch.f.<0.5REF_1 SFMON: Min.mtch.f.<0.5REF_2 SFMON: Min.mtch.f.<0.5REF_3 SFMON: CTA error THRM1 SFMON: Setting error THRM1 SFMON: CTA error THRM2 SFMON: Setting error THRM2 SFMON: Inv.inp.f.clock sync

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

093 013 090 021 090 003 093 041 093 026 090 012

Fig. 3-57

093 015 093 075 093 113 093 112 098 000 093 114

Fig. 3-27

093 115 093 116

Fig. 3-17

098 024

Fig. 3-19

098 025

Fig. 3-17

098 026

Fig. 3-17

098 028

Fig. 3-119

091 007

Fig. 3-71

091 008

Fig. 3-71

091 009

Fig. 3-71

091 016

Fig. 3-71

091 000

Fig. 3-71

091 001

Fig. 3-71

091 002

Fig. 3-71

091 017

Fig. 3-71

091 004

Fig. 3-71

091 006

Fig. 3-71

091 105

Fig. 3-84

091 115 091 125 091 101

Fig. 3-84

091 111 091 121 091 102

Fig. 3-84

091 112 091 122 091 103

Fig. 3-84

091 113 091 123 091 104

Fig. 3-84

091 114 091 124 098 036

Fig. 3-110

098 038

Fig. 3-111

098 037 098 039 093 120

8-19

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

OL_RC: Record. in progress OL_RC: Overl. mem. overflow

035 003

Fig. 3-60

035 007

Fig. 3-61

FT_RC: Trigger EXT FT_RC: Trigger FT_RC: Id> triggered FT_RC: IR> triggered FT_RC: Record. in progress FT_RC: System disturb. runn FT_RC: Fault mem. overflow FT_RC: Faulty time tag

036 089

Fig. 3-67

037 076

Fig. 3-67

035 018

Fig. 3-67

035 019

Fig. 3-67

035 000

Fig. 3-67

035 004

Fig. 3-67

035 001

Fig. 3-68

035 002

Fig. 3-61

DIFF: DIFF: DIFF: DIFF: DIFF: DIFF: DIFF: DIFF: DIFF: DIFF: DIFF: DIFF: DIFF: DIFF: DIFF: DIFF: DIFF:

041 210

Fig. 3-70

041 124

Fig. 3-78

041 125

Fig. 3-78

041 126

Fig. 3-78

041 118

Fig. 3-79

041 119

Fig. 3-79

041 120

Fig. 3-79

041 121

Fig. 3-81

041 122

Fig. 3-81

041 123

Fig. 3-81

041 115

Fig. 3-80

041 116

Fig. 3-80

041 117

Fig. 3-80

041 075

Fig. 3-78

041 002

Fig. 3-78

041 003

Fig. 3-78

041 004

Fig. 3-78

Ground differential protection REF_1: Enabled REF_1: Trip signal

041 132

Fig. 3-83

041 005

Fig. 3-86

REF_2: Enabled REF_2: Trip signal

041 133

REF_3: Enabled REF_3: Trip signal

041 134

Overload recording

Fault recording

Differential protection

8-20

Enabled Meas.system 1 trigg. Meas.system 2 trigg. Meas.system 3 trigg. Harm.block 1 trigg. Harm.block 2 trigg. Harm.block 3 trigg. Overflux.bl.1 trigg. Overflux.bl.2 trigg. Overflux.bl.3 trigg. Sat.discr. 1 trigg. Sat.discr. 2 trigg. Sat.discr. 3 trigg. Trip signal Trip signal 1 Trip signal 2 Trip signal 3

041 016

041 067

Fig. 3-47

Fig. 3-47

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

Definite-time overcurrent protection

DTOC1: Block. tI> EXT

035 120

Fig. 3-90

DTOC1: Block. tI>> EXT DTOC1: Block. tI>>> EXT DTOC1: Block. tIneg> EXT DTOC1: Block. tIneg>> EXT DTOC1: Block. tIneg>>> EXT DTOC1: Block. tIN> EXT DTOC1: Block. tIN>> EXT DTOC1: Block. tIN>>> EXT DTOC1: Enabled DTOC1: General starting DTOC1: tGS elapsed DTOC1: Starting A DTOC1: Starting B DTOC1: Starting C DTOC1: Starting N DTOC1: Starting I> DTOC1: Starting I>> DTOC1: Starting I>>> DTOC1: Trip signal tI> DTOC1: Trip signal tI>> DTOC1: Trip signal tI>>> DTOC1: Starting Ineg DTOC1: Starting Ineg> DTOC1: Starting Ineg>> DTOC1: Starting Ineg>>> DTOC1: tIneg> elapsed DTOC1: tIneg>> elapsed DTOC1: tIneg>>> elapsed DTOC1: Trip signal tIneg> DTOC1: Trip signal tIneg>> DTOC1: Trip signal tIneg>>> DTOC1: Starting IN> DTOC1: Starting IN>> DTOC1: Starting IN>>> DTOC1: tIN> elapsed DTOC1: tIN>> elapsed DTOC1: tIN>>> elapsed DTOC1: Trip signal tIN> DTOC1: Trip signal tIN>> DTOC1: Trip signal tIN>>>

035 121

Fig. 3-90

035 122

Fig. 3-90

036 141

Fig. 3-91

036 142

Fig. 3-91

036 143

Fig. 3-91

035 123

Fig. 3-92

035 124

Fig. 3-92

035 125

Fig. 3-92

035 102

Fig. 3-89

035 128

Fig. 3-93

035 129

Fig. 3-93

035 104

Fig. 3-90

035 105

Fig. 3-90

035 106

Fig. 3-90

035 107

Fig. 3-92

035 108

Fig. 3-90

035 109

Fig. 3-90

035 110

Fig. 3-90

035 114

Fig. 3-90

035 115

Fig. 3-90

035 116

Fig. 3-90

036 144

Fig. 3-91

036 145

Fig. 3-91

036 146

Fig. 3-91

036 147

Fig. 3-91

036 148

Fig. 3-91

036 149

Fig. 3-91

036 150

Fig. 3-91

036 151

Fig. 3-91

036 152

Fig. 3-91

036 153

Fig. 3-91

035 111

Fig. 3-92

035 112

Fig. 3-92

035 113

Fig. 3-92

035 117

Fig. 3-92

035 118

Fig. 3-92

035 119

Fig. 3-92

035 126

Fig. 3-92

035 130

Fig. 3-92

035 131

Fig. 3-92

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8-21

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

DTOC2: Block. tI> EXT DTOC2: Block. tI>> EXT DTOC2: Block. tI>>> EXT DTOC2: Block. tIneg> EXT DTOC2: Block. tIneg>> EXT DTOC2: Block. tIneg>>> EXT DTOC2: Block. tIN> EXT DTOC2: Block. tIN>> EXT DTOC2: Block. tIN>>> EXT DTOC2: Enabled DTOC2: General starting DTOC2: tGS elapsed DTOC2: Starting A DTOC2: Starting B DTOC2: Starting C DTOC2: Starting N DTOC2: Starting I> DTOC2: Starting I>> DTOC2: Starting I>>> DTOC2: Trip signal tI> DTOC2: Trip signal tI>> DTOC2: Trip signal tI>>> DTOC2: Starting Ineg DTOC2: Starting Ineg> DTOC2: Starting Ineg>> DTOC2: Starting Ineg>>> DTOC2: tIneg> elapsed DTOC2: tIneg>> elapsed DTOC2: tIneg>>> elapsed DTOC2: Trip signal tIneg> DTOC2: Trip signal tIneg>> DTOC2: Trip signal tIneg>>> DTOC2: Starting IN> DTOC2: Starting IN>> DTOC2: Starting IN>>> DTOC2: tIN> elapsed DTOC2: tIN>> elapsed DTOC2: tIN>>> elapsed DTOC2: Trip signal tIN> DTOC2: Trip signal tIN>> DTOC2: Trip signal tIN>>>

8-22

035 150 035 151 035 229 036 161 036 162 036 163 035 230 035 231 035 232 035 132 035 234 035 245 035 134 035 135 035 141 035 146 035 138 035 139 035 149 035 144 035 145 035 158 036 164 036 165 036 166 036 167 036 168 036 169 036 170 036 171 036 172 036 173 035 152 035 153 035 154 035 159 035 225 035 226 035 233 035 246 035 247

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

DTOC3: Block. tI> EXT DTOC3: Block. tI>> EXT DTOC3: Block. tI>>> EXT DTOC3: Block. tIneg> EXT DTOC3: Block. tIneg>> EXT DTOC3: Block. tIneg>>> EXT DTOC3: Block. tIN> EXT DTOC3: Block. tIN>> EXT DTOC3: Block. tIN>>> EXT DTOC3: Enabled DTOC3: General starting DTOC3: tGS elapsed DTOC3: Starting A DTOC3: Starting B DTOC3: Starting C DTOC3: Starting N DTOC3: Starting I> DTOC3: Starting I>> DTOC3: Starting I>>> DTOC3: Trip signal tI> DTOC3: Trip signal tI>> DTOC3: Trip signal tI>>> DTOC3: Starting Ineg DTOC3: Starting Ineg> DTOC3: Starting Ineg>> DTOC3: Starting Ineg>>> DTOC3: tIneg> elapsed DTOC3: tIneg>> elapsed DTOC3: tIneg>>> elapsed DTOC3: Trip signal tIneg> DTOC3: Trip signal tIneg>> DTOC3: Trip signal tIneg>>> DTOC3: Starting IN> DTOC3: Starting IN>> DTOC3: Starting IN>>> DTOC3: tIN> elapsed DTOC3: tIN>> elapsed DTOC3: tIN>>> elapsed DTOC3: Trip signal tIN> DTOC3: Trip signal tIN>> DTOC3: Trip signal tIN>>>

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

035 237 035 238 035 239 036 181 036 182 036 183 035 240 035 241 035 242 035 136 035 244 035 250 035 180 035 185 035 186 035 187 035 188 035 189 035 190 035 205 035 206 035 208 036 184 036 185 036 186 036 187 036 188 036 189 036 190 036 191 036 192 036 193 035 202 035 203 035 204 035 209 035 235 035 236 035 243 035 251 035 252

8-23

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

Inverse-time overcurrent protection

8-24

IDMT1: Block. tIref,P> EXT

038 114

Fig. 3-101

IDMT1: Block.tIref,neg> EXT IDMT1: Block. tIref,N> EXT IDMT1: Enabled IDMT1: General starting IDMT1: tGS elapsed IDMT1: Starting Iref,P> IDMT1: Starting Iref,A> IDMT1: Starting Iref,B> IDMT1: Starting Iref,C> IDMT1: tIref,P> elapsed IDMT1: Hold time P running IDMT1: Memory P clear IDMT1: Starting Iref,neg> IDMT1: tIref,neg> elapsed IDMT1: Trip sig. tIref,neg> IDMT1: Hold time neg runn. IDMT1: Memory δneg‘ clear IDMT1: Starting Iref,N> IDMT1: tIref,N> elapsed IDMT1: Trip signal tIref,N> IDMT1: Hold time N running IDMT1: Memory N clear

038 178

Fig. 3-102

038 124

Fig. 3-103

038 125

Fig. 3-96

038 115

Fig. 3-105

038 116

Fig. 3-105

038 110

Fig. 3-101

038 117

Fig. 3-101

038 118

Fig. 3-101

038 119

Fig. 3-101

038 111

Fig. 3-101

038 112

Fig. 3-101

038 113

Fig. 3-101

038 173

Fig. 3-102

038 174

Fig. 3-102

038 177

Fig. 3-102

038 175

Fig. 3-102

038 176

Fig. 3-102

038 120

Fig. 3-103

038 121

Fig. 3-103

038 126

Fig. 3-103

038 122

Fig. 3-103

038 123

Fig. 3-103

IDMT2: Block. tIref,P> EXT IDMT2: Block.tIref,neg> EXT IDMT2: Block. tIref,N> EXT IDMT2: Enabled IDMT2: General starting IDMT2: tGS elapsed IDMT2: Starting Iref,P> IDMT2: Starting Iref,A> IDMT2: Starting Iref,B> IDMT2: Starting Iref,C> IDMT2: tIref,P> elapsed IDMT2: Hold time P running IDMT2: Memory P clear IDMT2: Starting Iref,neg> IDMT2: tIref,neg> elapsed IDMT2: Trip sig. tIref,neg> IDMT2: Hold time neg runn. IDMT2: Memory δneg‘ clear IDMT2: Starting Iref,N> IDMT2: tIref,N> elapsed IDMT2: Trip signal tIref,N> IDMT2: Hold time N running IDMT2: Memory N clear

038 134 038 188 038 144 038 145 038 135 038 136 038 130 038 137 038 138 038 139 038 131 038 132 038 133 038 183 038 184 038 187 038 185 038 186 038 140 038 141 038 146 038 142 038 143

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

Thermal overload protection

IDMT3: Block. tIref,P> EXT IDMT3: Block.tIref,neg> EXT IDMT3: Block. tIref,N> EXT IDMT3: Enabled IDMT3: General starting IDMT3: tGS elapsed IDMT3: Starting Iref,P> IDMT3: Starting Iref,A> IDMT3: Starting Iref,B> IDMT3: Starting Iref,C> IDMT3: tIref,P> elapsed IDMT3: Hold time P running IDMT3: Memory P clear IDMT3: Starting Iref,neg> IDMT3: tIref,neg> elapsed IDMT3: Trip sig. tIref,neg> IDMT3: Hold time neg runn. IDMT3: Memory δneg‘ clear IDMT3: Starting Iref,N> IDMT3: tIref,N> elapsed IDMT3: Trip signal tIref,N> IDMT3: Hold time N running IDMT3: Memory N clear

038 154

THRM1: Replica block EXT THRM1: CTA error EXT THRM1: Reset replica EXT THRM1: Enabled THRM1: Reset replica THRM1: Buffer empty THRM1: CTA error THRM1: Starting k*Iref> THRM1: Within pre-trip time THRM1: Warning THRM1: Trip signal THRM1: Setting error,block.

039 150

Fig. 3-111

039 152

Fig. 3-110

039 122

Fig. 3-112

039 129

Fig. 3-108

039 125

Fig. 3-112

THRM2: Replica block EXT THRM2: CTA error EXT THRM2: Reset replica EXT THRM2: Enabled THRM2: Reset replica THRM2: Buffer empty THRM2: CTA error THRM2: Starting k*Iref> THRM2: Within pre-trip time THRM2: Warning THRM2: Trip signal THRM2: Setting error,block.

039 170

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

038 198 038 164 038 165 038 155 038 156 038 150 038 157 038 158 038 159 038 151 038 152 038 153 038 193 038 194 038 197 038 195 038 196 038 160 038 161 038 166 038 162 038 163

039 128 039 127

Fig. 3-110

039 151

Fig. 3-111

039 153

Fig. 3-111

039 124

Fig. 3-111

039 123

Fig. 3-111

039 126

Fig. 3-111

039 172 039 182 039 189 039 185 039 188 039 187 039 171 039 173 039 184 039 183 039 186

8-25

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

Time-voltage protection

Over-/underfrequency protection

8-26

V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>:

Blocking tV> EXT Blocking tV>> EXT Blocking tV< EXT Blocking tV<< EXT Enabled Ready Not ready Starting V> Starting V>> tV> elapsed tV>> elapsed Starting V< Starting V<< tV< elapsed tV< elapsed & Vmin> tV< elaps. transient Fault V< tV<< elapsed tV<< elapsed & Vmin> tV<< elapsed trans. Fault V<< tV
041 068

Fig. 3-114

041 069

Fig. 3-114

041 070

Fig. 3-115

041 071

Fig. 3-115

040 066

Fig. 3-113

042 003

Fig. 3-113

042 004

Fig. 3-113

041 030

Fig. 3-114

041 096

Fig. 3-114

041 034

Fig. 3-114

041 035

Fig. 3-114

041 037

Fig. 3-115

041 099

Fig. 3-115

041 041

Fig. 3-115

041 026

Fig. 3-115

042 023

Fig. 3-115

041 110

Fig. 3-115

041 042

Fig. 3-115

041 066

Fig. 3-115

042 025

Fig. 3-115

041 112

Fig. 3-115

042 007

Fig. 3-115

f<>: Blocking f1 EXT

042 103

Fig. 3-119

f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>:

042 104

Blocking f2 EXT Blocking f3 EXT Blocking f4 EXT Enabled Ready Not ready Blocked by V< Starting f1 Starting f2 Starting f3 Starting f4 Starting f1/df1 Starting f2/df2 Starting f3/df3 Starting f4/df4 Delta f1 triggered Delta f2 triggered Delta f3 triggered Delta f4 triggered Delta t1 elapsed Delta t2 elapsed Delta t3 elapsed Delta t4 elapsed Trip signal f1 Trip signal f2 Trip signal f3 Trip signal f4

042 105 042 106 042 100

Fig. 3-116

042 101

Fig. 3-116

042 140

Fig. 3-116

042 102

Fig. 3-117

042 107

Fig. 3-119

042 115 042 123 042 131 042 108

Fig. 3-119

042 116 042 124 042 132 042 109

Fig. 3-119

042 117 042 125 042 133 042 110

Fig. 3-119

042 118 042 126 042 134 042 111

Fig. 3-119

042 119 042 127 042 135

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

Limit value monitoring

Logic

LIMIT: Enabled LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin> LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin>> LIMIT: tIDC,lin> elapsed LIMIT: tIDC,lin>> elapsed LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin< LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin<< LIMIT: tIDC,lin< elapsed LIMIT: tIDC,lin<< elapsed LIMIT: Starting T> LIMIT: Starting T>> LIMIT: tT> elapsed LIMIT: tT>> elapsed LIMIT: Starting T< LIMIT: Starting T<< LIMIT: tT< elapsed LIMIT: tT<< elapsed

040 074

Fig. 3-120

040 180

Fig. 3-120

040 181

Fig. 3-120

040 182

Fig. 3-120

040 183

Fig. 3-120

040 184

Fig. 3-120

040 185

Fig. 3-120

040 186

Fig. 3-120

040 187

Fig. 3-120

040 170

Fig. 3-121

040 171

Fig. 3-121

040 172

Fig. 3-121

040 173

Fig. 3-121

040 174

Fig. 3-121

040 175

Fig. 3-121

040 176

Fig. 3-121

040 177

Fig. 3-121

LIM_1: Enabled LIM_1: tI> elapsed LIM_1: tI>> elapsed LIM_1: tI< elapsed LIM_1: tI<< elapsed

040 123

Fig. 3-123

040 122

Fig. 3-123

037 201

Fig. 3-123

037 202

Fig. 3-123

037 203

Fig. 3-123

LIM_2: Enabled LIM_2: tI> elapsed LIM_2: tI>> elapsed LIM_2: tI< elapsed LIM_2: tI<< elapsed

040 125

LIM_3: Enabled LIM_3: tI> elapsed LIM_3: tI>> elapsed LIM_3: tI< elapsed LIM_3: tI<< elapsed

040 127

LOGIC: Input 1 EXT LOGIC: Input 2 EXT LOGIC: Input 3 EXT LOGIC: Input 4 EXT LOGIC: Input 5 EXT LOGIC: Input 6 EXT LOGIC: Input 7 EXT LOGIC: Input 8 EXT LOGIC: Input 9 EXT LOGIC: Input 10 EXT LOGIC: Input 11 EXT LOGIC: Input 12 EXT LOGIC: Input 13 EXT LOGIC: Input 14 EXT LOGIC: Input 15 EXT

034 000

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

040 124 038 201 038 202 038 203

040 126 039 201 039 202 039 203

Fig. 3-125

034 001 034 002 034 003 034 004 034 005 034 006 034 007 034 008 034 009 034 010 034 011 034 012 034 013 034 014

8-27

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

LOGIC: Input 16 EXT LOGIC: Set 1 EXT LOGIC: Set 2 EXT LOGIC: Set 3 EXT LOGIC: Set 4 EXT LOGIC: Set 5 EXT LOGIC: Set 6 EXT LOGIC: Set 7 EXT LOGIC: Set 8 EXT LOGIC: Reset 1 EXT LOGIC: Reset 2 EXT LOGIC: Reset 3 EXT LOGIC: Reset 4 EXT LOGIC: Reset 5 EXT LOGIC: Reset 6 EXT LOGIC: Reset 7 EXT LOGIC: Reset 8 EXT LOGIC: 1 has been set LOGIC: 2 has been set LOGIC: 3 has been set LOGIC: 4 has been set LOGIC: 5 has been set LOGIC: 6 has been set LOGIC: 7 has been set LOGIC: 8 has been set LOGIC: 1 set externally LOGIC: 2 set externally LOGIC: 3 set externally LOGIC: 4 set externally LOGIC: 5 set externally LOGIC: 6 set externally LOGIC: 7 set externally LOGIC: 8 set externally LOGIC: Enabled LOGIC: Output 1 LOGIC: Output 2 LOGIC: Output 3 LOGIC: Output 4 LOGIC: Output 5 LOGIC: Output 6 LOGIC: Output 7 LOGIC: Output 8 LOGIC: Output 9 LOGIC: Output 10 LOGIC: Output 11 LOGIC: Output 12 LOGIC: Output 13 LOGIC: Output 14 LOGIC: Output 15 LOGIC: Output 16 LOGIC: Output 17 LOGIC: Output 18 8-28

034 015

Fig. 3-125

034 051

Fig. 3-124

034 052 034 053 034 054 034 055 034 056 034 057 034 058 034 059

Fig. 3-124

034 060 034 061 034 062 034 063 034 064 034 065 034 066 034 067

Fig. 3-124

034 068 034 069 034 070 034 071 034 072 034 073 034 074

Fig. 3-125

034 075

Fig. 3-124

034 076 034 077 034 078 034 079 034 080 034 081 034 082

Fig. 3-125

034 046

Fig. 3-125

042 032

Fig. 3-125

042 034 042 036 042 038 042 040 042 042 042 044 042 046 042 048 042 050 042 052 042 054 042 056 042 058 042 060 042 062 042 064 042 066

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

LOGIC: Output 19 LOGIC: Output 20 LOGIC: Output 21 LOGIC: Output 22 LOGIC: Output 23 LOGIC: Output 24 LOGIC: Output 25 LOGIC: Output 26 LOGIC: Output 27 LOGIC: Output 28 LOGIC: Output 29 LOGIC: Output 30 LOGIC: Output 31 LOGIC: Output 32 LOGIC: Output 1 (t) LOGIC: Output 2 (t) LOGIC: Output 3 (t) LOGIC: Output 4 (t) LOGIC: Output 5 (t) LOGIC: Output 6 (t) LOGIC: Output 7 (t) LOGIC: Output 8 (t) LOGIC: Output 9 (t) LOGIC: Output 10 (t) LOGIC: Output 11 (t) LOGIC: Output 12 (t) LOGIC: Output 13 (t) LOGIC: Output 14 (t) LOGIC: Output 15 (t) LOGIC: Output 16 (t) LOGIC: Output 17 (t) LOGIC: Output 18 (t) LOGIC: Output 19 (t) LOGIC: Output 20 (t) LOGIC: Output 21 (t) LOGIC: Output 22 (t) LOGIC: Output 23 (t) LOGIC: Output 24 (t) LOGIC: Output 25 (t) LOGIC: Output 26 (t) LOGIC: Output 27 (t) LOGIC: Output 28 (t) LOGIC: Output 29 (t) LOGIC: Output 30 (t) LOGIC: Output 31 (t) LOGIC: Output 32 (t)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

042 068 042 070 042 072 042 074 042 076 042 078 042 080 042 082 042 084 042 086 042 088 042 090 042 092 042 094 042 033

Fig. 3-125

042 035 042 037 042 039 042 041 042 043 042 045 042 047 042 049 042 051 042 053 042 055 042 057 042 059 042 061 042 063 042 065 042 067 042 069 042 071 042 073 042 075 042 077 042 079 042 081 042 083 042 085 042 087 042 089 042 091 042 093 042 095

8-29

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

8.1.2 Control and Testing Local control

LOC: Param. change enabl.

003 010

Setting the enable for changing values from the local control . Binary outputs

OUTP: Reset latch.

021 009

Fig. 3-20

003 042

Fig. 3-21

003 043

Fig. 3-21

Reset of latched output relays from the local control . OUTP: Relay assign. f.test Selection of the relay to be tested. OUTP: Relay test The relay selected for testing is triggered for the set time (OUT P: H old- t im e f or tes t). This control action is -protected (see -Protected Control Operations in Chapter 6). OUTP: Hold-time for test

003 044

Fig. 3-21

Setting for the time period for which the selected output relay is triggered for functional testing. Measured data output

MEASO: Reset output

037 116

Fig. 3-24

003 002

Fig. 3-52

Resetting the measured data output function. Main functions

MAIN: General reset Reset of the following memories: ¨

All counters

¨

LED indicators

¨

Operating data memory

¨

All event memories

¨

Event Counters

¨

Measured overload data

¨

Measured fault data

¨

Recorded fault values

This control action is -protected (see -Protected Control Operations in Chapter 6). MAIN: Reset indicat.

021 010

Fig. 3-52

021 005

Fig. 3-49

003 007

Fig. 3-50

Reset of the following displays: ¨

LED indicators

¨

Measured fault data

MAIN: Rset.latch.trip Reset latched trip commands using the local control . MAIN: Reset c. cl./trip c. The counters for close and trip commands are reset.

8-30

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

MAIN: Reset IP,max,stored

003 033

Fig. 3-33, 3-34

The values for the delayed stored maximum phase current, ends a to d, are reset. MAIN: Man. trip cmd.

003 040

Fig. 3-49

A trip command is issued from the local control for 100 ms. This setting is -protected (see -Protected Control Operations in Chapter 6). Note:

The command is only executed if the manual trip command is included in the configuration of trip commands.

MAIN: Warm restart

003 039

A warm restart is carried out. The device functions as it does when the power supply is turned on. MAIN: Cold restart

000 085

A cold restart is executed. This setting is -protected (see -Protected Control Operations in Chapter 6). A cold restart means that all settings and recordings are cleared. The values with which the device operates after a cold restart are the underlined default settings given in the address list in the ‘Range of Values’ column. They are selected so as to block the device after a cold restart. Operating data recording

OP_RC: Reset recording

100 001

Fig. 3-56

The operating data memory and the counter for operation signals are reset. Monitoring signal recording

MT_RC: Reset recording

003 008

Fig. 3-57

100 003

Fig. 3-60

003 041

Fig. 3-67

Reset of the monitoring signal memory. Overload recording

OL_RC: Reset recording Reset of the overload memory.

Fault recording

FT_RC: Trigger

Fault recording and fault value recording are enabled from the local control for 500 ms. FT_RC: Reset recording

003 006

Fig. 3-68

Reset of the following memories: ¨

LED indicators

¨

Fault memory

¨

Fault counter

¨

Measured fault data

¨

Recorded fault values

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8-31

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

Thermal overload protection

THRM1: Reset replica THRM2: Reset replica

039 120

Fig. 3-112

039 180

Thermal overload memory reset.

Logic

LOGIC: Trigger 1 LOGIC: Trigger 2 LOGIC: Trigger 3 LOGIC: Trigger 4 LOGIC: Trigger 5 LOGIC: Trigger 6 LOGIC: Trigger 7 LOGIC: Trigger 8

034 038

Fig. 3-125

034 039 034 040 034 041 034 042 034 043 034 044 034 045

Fig. 3-125

003 024

Fig. 3-56

003 001

Fig. 3-57

Intervention in the logic at the appropriate point by a 100 ms pulse.

8.1.3 Operating Data Recording Operating data recording

OP_RC: Operat. data record. Point of entry into the operating data log.

Monitoring signal recording

MT_RC: Mon. signal record. Point of entry into the monitoring signal log.

8-32

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

8.2 Events 8.2.1 Event Counters Main functions

MAIN: No. general start.

004 000

Fig. 3-48

004 006

Fig. 3-50

009 050

Fig. 3-50

009 056

Fig. 3-50

009 057

Fig. 3-50

100 002

Fig. 3-56

004 019

Fig. 3-57

004 101

Fig. 3-60

004 020

Fig. 3-3

004 010

Fig. 3-3

DTOC1: No. general start.

009 150

Fig. 3-94

DTOC2: No. general start. DTOC3: No. general start.

009 160

Number of general starting signals. MAIN: No. gen.trip cmds. 1 Number of general trip commands 1. MAIN: No. gen.trip cmds. 2 Number of general trip commands 2. MAIN: No. gen.trip cmds. 3 Number of general trip commands 3. MAIN: No. gen.trip cmds. 4 Number of general trip commands 4. Operating data recording

OP_RC: No. oper. data sig. Number of signals stored in the operating data memory.

Monitoring signal recording

MT_RC: No. monit. signals Number of signals stored in the monitoring signal memory.

Overload recording

OL_RC: No. overload Number of overload states.

Fault recording

FT_RC: No. of faults Number of faults. FT_RC: No. system disturb. Number of system disturbances.

Definite-time overcurrent protection

009 170

Number of general starting signals. Inverse-time overcurrent protection

IDMT1: No. general start.

009 151

IDMT2: No. general start. IDMT3: No. general start.

009 161

Fig. 3-106

009 171

Number of general starting signals.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8-33

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

8.2.2 Measured Fault Data Overload data acquisition

OL_DA: Overload duration

004 102

Fig. 3-58

004 155

Fig. 3-59

Duration of the overload event. OL_DA: Status THRM1 replica OL_DA: Status THRM2 replica

004 185

Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function THRM1 or THRM2, respectively. OL_DA: Load current THRM1 OL_DA: Load current THRM2

004 159

Fig. 3-59

004 189

Display of the load current used by the thermal overload protection function to calculate the tripping time. OL_DA: Object temp. THRM1 OL_DA: Object temp. THRM2

004 156

Fig. 3-59

004 186

Display of the temperature of the protected object as determined by function THRM1 or THRM2, respectively. OL_DA: Coolant temp.THRM1 OL_DA: Coolant temp.THRM2

004 157

Fig. 3-59

004 187

Display of the coolant temperature. Depending on the setting at T H RM 1: S el ec t CT A or at T HR M2 : S e lec t CT A , respectively, for the coolant temperature acquisition, one of the following values will be displayed: Setting Default temp. value : Display of the set temperature value. Setting From PT 100: Display of the temperature measured by the resistance thermometer. ¨ Setting From 20 mA input: Display of the temperature measured via the 20 mA input. ¨ ¨

OL_DA: Pre-trip t.leftTHRM1 OL_DA: Pre-trip t.leftTHRM2

004 158

Fig. 3-59

004 188

Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection function THRM1 or THRM2, respectively, will reach the tripping threshold. OL_DA: Offset THRM1 replica OL_DA: Offset THRM2 replica

004 191

Fig. 3-59

004 192

Display of the additional reserve if the coolant temperature is taken into . This display is relevant if the coolant temperature has been set to a value below the maximum permissible coolant temperature or, in other words, if the thermal model has been shifted downwards. If, on the other hand, the coolant temperature and the maximum permissible coolant temperature have been set to the same value, then the coolant temperature is not taken into and the characteristic is a function of the current only. The additional reserve amounts to 0 in this case. Fault data acquisition

FT_DA: Fault duration

008 010

Fig. 3-62

004 021

Fig. 3-62

004 198

Fig. 3-63

Display of the fault duration. FT_DA: Running time Display of the running time. FT_DA: Fault determ. with This display indicates when the fault data were stored. 8-34

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

FT_DA: Run time to meas.

004 199

Fig. 3-63

This display indicates the difference in time between the start of the fault and the fault data acquisition time. FT_DA: Fault curr.IP,a p.u.

025 086

Fig. 3-64

Display of the maximum phase current at the data acquisition time, end a, referred to Inom. FT_DA: Fault curr.IP,b p.u.

026 086

Fig. 3-64

Display of the maximum phase current at the data acquisition time, end b, referred to Inom. FT_DA: Fault curr.IP,c p.u.

027 086

Fig. 3-64

Display of the maximum phase current at the data acquisition time, end c, referred to Inom. FT_DA: Fault curr.IP,d p.u.

028 086

Fig. 3-64

Display of the maximum phase current at the data acquisition time, end d, referred to Inom. FT_DA: Fault curr.IN,a p.u.

025 087

Fig. 3-64

Display of the residual current calculated by the P63x at the data acquisition time based on the sum of the phase currents, end a, referred to Inom. FT_DA: Fault curr.IN,b p.u.

026 087

Fig. 3-64

Display of the residual current calculated by the P63x at the data acquisition time based on the sum of the phase currents, end b, referred to Inom. FT_DA: Fault curr.IN,c p.u.

027 087

Fig. 3-64

Display of the residual current calculated by the P63x at the data acquisition time based on the sum of the phase currents, end c, referred to Inom. FT_DA: Fault curr.IN,d p.u

028 087

Fig. 3-64

Display of the residual current calculated by the P63x at the data acquisition time based on the sum of the phase currents, end d, referred to Inom. FT_DA: Fault curr.IY,a p.u.

025 088

Fig. 3-64

Display of the residual current measured at the T14 transformer by the P63x at the data acquisition time, referred to Inom. FT_DA: Fault curr.IY,b p.u.

026 088

Fig. 3-64

Display of the residual current measured at the T24 transformer by the P63x at the data acquisition time, referred to Inom. FT_DA: Fault curr.IY,c p.u.

027 088

Fig. 3-64

Display of the residual current measured at the T34 transformer by the P63x at the data acquisition time, referred to Inom. FT_DA: Diff. current 1

005 082

Fig. 3-65

006 082

Fig. 3-65

007 082

Fig. 3-65

025 082

Fig. 3-66

Display of the differential current, measuring system 1, referred to Iref. FT_DA: Diff. current 2 Display of the differential current, measuring system 2, referred to Iref. FT_DA: Diff. current 3 Display of the differential current, measuring system 3, referred to Iref. FT_DA: Diff. current REF_1 Display of the differential current, determined by the ground differential protection function (REF_1), referred to Iref.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8-35

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

FT_DA: Diff. current REF_2

026 082

Fig. 3-66

027 082

Fig. 3-66

005 084

Fig. 3-65

006 084

Fig. 3-65

007 084

Fig. 3-65

005 085

Fig. 3-65

006 085

Fig. 3-65

007 085

Fig. 3-65

005 083

Fig. 3-65

006 083

Fig. 3-65

007 083

Fig. 3-65

025 083

Fig. 3-66

026 083

Fig. 3-66

027 083

Fig. 3-66

Display of the differential current, determined by the ground differential protection function (REF_2), referred to Iref. FT_DA: Diff. current REF_3 Display of the restraining current, determined by the ground differential protection function (REF_3), referred to Iref. FT_DA: Diff.current 1(2*f0) Display of the second harmonic component of the differential current, measuring system 1, referred to Iref. FT_DA: Diff.current 2(2*f0) Display of the second harmonic component of the differential current, measuring system 2, referred to Iref. FT_DA: Diff.current 3(2*f0) Display of the second harmonic component of the differential current, measuring system 3, referred to Iref. FT_DA: Diff.current 1(5*f0) Display of the fifth harmonic component of the differential current, measuring system 1, referred to Iref. FT_DA: Diff.current 2(5*f0) Display of the fifth harmonic component of the differential current, measuring system 2, referred to Iref. FT_DA: Diff.current 3(5*f0) Display of the fifth harmonic component of the differential current, measuring system 3, referred to Iref. FT_DA: Restrain. current 1 Display of the restraining current, measuring system 1, referred to Iref. FT_DA: Restrain. current 2 Display of the restraining current, measuring system 2, referred to Iref. FT_DA: Restrain. current 3 Display of the restraining current, measuring system 3, referred to Iref. FT_DA: Restrain.curr. REF_1 Display of the restraining current, determined by the ground differential protection function (REF_1), referred to Iref. FT_DA: Restrain.curr. REF_2 Display of the restraining current, determined by the ground differential protection function (REF_2), referred to Iref. FT_DA: Restrain.curr. REF_3 Display of the restraining current, determined by the ground differential protection function (REF_3), referred to Iref.

8-36

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8 Information and Control Functions (continued)

8.2.3 Fault Data Acquisition Overload recording

OL_RC: Overload recording 1 OL_RC: Overload recording 2 OL_RC: Overload recording 3 OL_RC: Overload recording 4 OL_RC: Overload recording 5 OL_RC: Overload recording 6 OL_RC: Overload recording 7 OL_RC: Overload recording 8

033 020

Fig. 3-61

033 021

Fig. 3-61

033 022

Fig. 3-61

033 023

Fig. 3-61

033 024

Fig. 3-61

033 025

Fig. 3-61

033 026

Fig. 3-61

033 027

Fig. 3-61

003 000

Fig. 3-68

033 001

Fig. 3-68

033 002

Fig. 3-68

033 003

Fig. 3-68

033 004

Fig. 3-68

033 005

Fig. 3-68

033 006

Fig. 3-68

033 007

Fig. 3-68

Point of entry into the overload log. Fault recording

FT_RC: Fault recording 1 FT_RC: Fault recording 2 FT_RC: Fault recording 3 FT_RC: Fault recording 4 FT_RC: Fault recording 5 FT_RC: Fault recording 6 FT_RC: Fault recording 7 FT_RC: Fault recording 8 Point of entry into the fault log.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

8-37

8-38

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

9 Commissioning

9 9.1

Commissioning Safety Instructions

The device must be reliably grounded before auxiliary voltage is turned on. The surface-mounted case is grounded using the appropriate bolt and nut as the protective ground connection. The flush-mounted case must be grounded in the area of the rear sidepieces at the location provided. The cross-sectional area of this ground conductor must also conform to applicable national standards. A minimum conductor 2 cross section of 2.5 mm is required. In addition, a functional ground connection at the terminal on the power supply module (identified by the letters “PE” (Protective Earth) or PCT (Protective Conductor Terminal) on the terminal connection diagram) is required for proper operation of the unit. The cross-sectional area of this ground conductor must also conform to applicable 2 national standards. A minimum cross section of 1.5 mm is required.

Before working on the device itself or in the space where the device is connected, always disconnect the device from the supply.

The secondary circuit of operating current transformers must not be opened. If the secondary circuit of an operating current transformer is opened, there is the danger that the resulting voltages will endanger people and damage the insulation. The threaded terminal block for current transformer connection is not a shorting block. Therefore always short-circuit the current transformer before loosening the threaded terminals.

The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply module V is removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

9-1

9 Commissioning (continued)

! The PC interface is not designed for permanent connection. Consequently the socket does not have the extra insulation from circuits connected to the system that is required per VDE 0106 Part 101.

! The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the supply voltage for the device is turned off.

! Application of analog signals to the measuring inputs must be in compliance with the maximum permissible rating of the measuring inputs (see the Chapter on Technical Data).

9-2

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

9 Commissioning (continued)

9.2

Commissioning Tests

Preparation After the P63x has been installed and connected in accordance with Chapter 5, the commissioning procedure can begin. Before turning on the power supply voltage, the following items must be checked again: ¨

Is the device connected to the protective ground at the specified location?

¨

Does the nominal voltage of the battery agree with the nominal auxiliary voltage of the device?

¨

Are the current and voltage transformer connections, grounding, and phase sequences correct?

After the wiring work is completed, check the system to make sure it is properly isolated. The conditions given in VDE 0100 must be satisfied. Once all checks have been made, the power supply voltage may be turned on. After voltage has been applied, the device starts up. During startup various startup tests are carried out (see the section entitled ‘Self-Monitoring’ in Chapter 3). The LED indicators for ‘Operation’ (H1) and “Blocked/Faulty’ (H2) will light up. After approximately 15 s the P63x is ready for operation. This is indicated by the display "P63x" in the first line of the LCD display. Once the change-enabling command has been issued (see the Section Change-Enabling Function in Chapter 6), all settings can be entered. The procedure for entering settings from the integrated local control is described in Chapter 6.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

9-3

9 Commissioning (continued)

If either the PC interface or the communication interface will be used for setting the P63x and reading out event records, then the following settings must first be made from the integrated local control . ¨

¨

¨

‘Par/DvID/’ folder: n

DVICE: Device 1

n

DVICE: Device 2

‘Par/Conf/’ folder: n

PC: Name of manufacturer

n

PC: Bay address

n

PC: Device address

n

PC: Baud rate

n

PC: Parity bit

n

COMM1: Function group COMM1

n

COMM1: Enabled

n

COMM1: Name of manufacturer

n

COMM1: Line idle state

n

COMM1: Baud rate

n

COMM1: Parity bit

n

COMM1: Communicat. protocol

n

COMM1: Octet comm. address

n

COMM1: Octet address ASDU

‘Par/Func/Glob/’ folder: n

PC: Command blocking

n

PC: Sig./meas.val.block.

n

COMM1: Command block.

n

COMM1: Sig./meas.block.

Further instructions regarding these settings are given in Chapters 7 and 8. Note:

9-4

The settings given above apply to the IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol. If another protocol is being used for the communication interface, additional settings may be necessary. See Chapter 7 for further details.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

9 Commissioning (continued)

After the settings have been made, the following checks should be carried out once again before blocking is canceled: ¨

Does the function assignment of the binary signal inputs agree with the terminal connection diagram?

¨

Has the correct operating mode been selected for the binary signal inputs?

¨

Does the function assignment of the output relays agree with the terminal connection diagram?

¨

Has the correct operating mode been selected for the output relays?

¨

Have all settings been made correctly?

Now the blocks can be cleared as follows ('Par/Func/Glob/' folder): ¨

M A I N : P r o t e c t i o n e n a b l e d "Yes (on)"

Testing By using the signals and displays generated by the P63x it is possible to determine whether the P63x is correctly set and properly interconnected with the station. Signals are signaled by output relays and LED indicators and entered into the event memory. In addition, the signals can be checked by selecting the appropriate signal in the menu tree. If the does not wish to operate the circuit breaker during the protection functions test, the trip commands can be blocked through M A I N : T r i p c m d . b l o c k . U S E R ('Par/Func/Glob/' folder) or an appropriately configured binary signal input. If circuit breaker testing is desired, it is possible to issue a trip command for a set time period through M A I N : M a n . t r i p c m d . U S E R ('Oper/CtrlTest' folder) or an appropriately configured binary signal input. Selection of the trip command from the integrated local control is -protected (see Section -Protected Control Actions in Chapter 6). Note:

The manual trip command is not executed unless the manual trip is included in the selection of possible functions to effect a trip (in the configuration of trip commands).

If the P63x is connected to a control station, it is advisable to activate the test mode via MAIN: T e s t m o d e U S E R ('Par/Func/Glob/' folder) or an appropriately configured binary signal input. The telegrams are then identified accordingly (cause of transmission: test mode).

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

9-5

9 Commissioning (continued)

Checking the binary signal inputs By selecting the corresponding state signal (‘Oper/Cycl/Phys’ folder), it is possible to determine whether the signal that is present is recognized correctly by the P63x. The values displayed have the following meanings: ¨

Low: Not energized.

¨

High: Energized.

¨

Without function: No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.

This display appears regardless of the binary signal input mode selected. Checking the output relays It is possible to trigger the output relays for a settable time period for test purposes (time setting at O U T P : H o l d - t i m e f o r t e s t in 'Oper/CtrlTest/' folder). First select the output relay to be tested (O UT P: Relay as s ign. f .tes t, ‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder). The output relay to be tested can only be selected if the device has been set to off-line at M A I N : P r o t e c t i o n e n a b l e d ('Par/Func/Glob/' folder). Test triggering then occurs via O U T P : R e l a y t e s t (Oper/CtrlTest/' folder). It is -protected (see Section 6 ‘-Protected Control Operations’). Checking protection Four parameter subsets are stored in the P63x, one of which is activated. Before checking the protective function, the should determine which parameter subset is activated. The activated parameter subset is displayed at P S S : A c t u a l p a r a m . s u b s e t ('Oper/Cycl/Log/" folder).

9-6

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

9 Commissioning (continued)

Checking differential protection For single-side feed, the fault current characteristic crosses the first knee of the tripping characteristic of the P63x so that the basic threshold value is always checked for. The current I to which the P63x responds for single-side feed is calculated as follows:

I=

Idiff > ⋅Inom,z k am,z

z: Idiff>: Inom,z: kam,z:

transformer end a, b, c or d set operate value nominal current of the P63x for transformer end a, b, c or d amplitude-matching factor of transformer end a, b, c or d

For single-side one-phase or two-phase feed, a vector group-matching factor in accordance with the set vector group ID needs to be taken into in addition to the amplitude-matching factor. The vector group-matching factors are given in the tables below (page after next) and the threshold current is calculated as follows:

I≥

Idiff > ⋅Inom,z k am,z ⋅ k s,y,z

z: Idiff>: Inom,z: kam,z: k s,y ,z :

transformer end a, b, c or d set operate value nominal current of the P63x for transformer end a, b, c or d amplitude-matching factor of transformer end a, b, c or d vector group-matching factor (see tables below)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

9-7

9 Commissioning (continued)

The differential and restraining currents formed by the P63x are displayed as measured operating data. They aid in assessing whether the connection of the P63x to the system current transformers and the setting of the vector group ID are correct. The tables below (next page) give the factors ks which serve to calculate the differential current for singleside feed. The display of differential and restraining currents is prevented, however, if they fall below minimum thresholds that can be set by the .

Id,y = k am,z ⋅ k s,y,z ⋅ I test,x

x: z: y: Id,y :

phase A, B or C transformer end a, b, c or d measuring system 1, 2 or 3 differential current as displayed

kam,z: k s,y ,z : Itest,x:

amplitude-matching factor transformer end a, b, c or d vector group-matching factor (see tables) test current phase A, B or C

In evaluating the test results, one should be aware that the P63x will trip as follows, if a value of Idiff>> or Idiff>>> is exceeded.

9-8

¨

Id>> exceeded.

Trip regardless of the inrush and overfluxing restraint

¨

Id>>> exceeded:

Trip regardless of the restraining current and regardless of all other restraints.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

9 Commissioning (continued)

Factors for single-side, one-phase feed in phase A, zero sequence-filtered Transformer end

a

Vector group ID

b, c or d 0=12

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

DIFF: Diff. current 1

0.67 0.67

0.58 0.33 0.00 0.33 0.58 0.67 0.58 0.33 0.00 0.33 0.58

DIFF: Diff. current 2

0.33 0.33

0.00 0.33 0.58 0.67 0.58 0.33 0.00 0.33 0.58 0.67 0.58

DIFF: Diff. current 3

0.33 0.33

0.58 0.67 0.58 0.33 0.00 0.33 0.58 0.67 0.58 0.33 0.00

Factors for single-side, two-phase, phase-opposition feed in phases B to C, zero sequence-filtered Transformer end

a

Vector group ID

b, c or d 0=12

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

DIFF: Diff. current 1

0.00 0.00

0.58 1.00 1.15 1.00 0.58 0.00 0.58 1.00 1.15 1.00 0.58

DIFF: Diff. current 2

1.00 1.00

1.15 1.00 0.58 0.00 0.58 1.00 1.15 1.00 0.58 0.00 0.58

DIFF: Diff. current 3

1.00 1.00

0.58 0.00 0.58 1.00 1.15 1.00 0.58 0.00 0.58 1.00 1.15

Factors for single-side, one-phase feed in phase A, not zero sequence-filtered Transformer end

a

Vector group ID

b, c or d 0=12

2

4

6

8

10

DIFF: Diff. current 1

1.00 1.00

0.00 0.00 1.00 0.00 0.00

DIFF: Diff. current 2

0.00 0.00

0.00 1.00 0.00 0.00 1.00

DIFF: Diff. current 3

0.00 0.00

1.00 0.00 0.00 1.00 0.00

Factors for single-side, two-phase, phase-opposition feed in phases B to C, not zero sequence-filtered Transformer end Vector group ID

a

b, c or d 0=12

2

4

6

8

10

DIFF: Diff. current 1

0.00 0.00

1.00 1.00 0.00 1.00 1.00

DIFF: Diff. current 2

1.00 1.00

1.00 0.00 1.00 1.00 0.00

DIFF: Diff. current 3

1.00 1.00

0.00 1.00 1.00 0.00 1.00

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

9-9

9 Commissioning (continued)

The connection of the phase currents can be checked using the phase angles provided as measured operating data by the P63x. If the phase currents are connected correctly and there is an ideal balanced load on the transformer, the phase angles between the phase currents of any one transformer end are displayed as follows: Clockwise rotating field (phase sequence A-B-C)

Anti-clockwise rotating field (phase sequence A-C-B)

ϕ AB,z = ϕBC,z = ϕ CA,z = 120 °

ϕ AB, z = ϕBC, z = ϕCA, z = −120°

This is not influenced by the set value of the function parameter for the rotating field (phase sequence).

9-10

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

9 Commissioning (continued)

For a given phase, the phase angles between the phase currents of two transformer ends must be displayed as follows, depending on the transformer vector group: Vector Group 0 = 12

ϕ x,a− z = ±180°

1

ϕ x,a− z = −150°

2

ϕ x,a− z = −120°

3

ϕ x,a− z = −90°

4

ϕ x,a− z = −60°

5

ϕ x,a− z = −30°

6

ϕ x,a− z = ±0°

7

ϕ x,a− z = 30°

8

ϕ x,a− z = 60°

9

ϕ x,a− z = 90°

10

ϕ x,a− z = 120°

11

ϕ x,a− z = 150°

The rotary field direction in the system has no effect in this case. On the other hand, a change in the setting of the function parameter for the connection direction of a given main current transformer set affects the corresponding measured operating value by ±180°.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

9-11

9 Commissioning (continued)

Checking ground differential protection

The current I to which the P63x responds for single-side feed, neutral-point side, is calculated as follows: I≥

Idiff > ⋅Inom k am,z

z: Idiff>: Inom: kam,z:

transformer end a, b, c or d set operate value nominal current of the P63x amplitude-matching factor of transformer end a, b, c or d

There will be no trip for single-side, single-pole, phase-side feed. The differential and restraining currents formed by the P63x are displayed. The display of differential and restraining currents is prevented, however, if they fall below minimum thresholds that can be set by the . Completion of commissioning

Before the P63x is released for operation, the should make sure that the following steps have been taken: ¨

All memories have been reset.(Reset at M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t . (protected) and M T _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d i n g , both in 'Oper/CtrlTest/ folder.)

¨

Blocking of output relays has been canceled. (O U T P : O u t p . r e l . b l o c k U S E R in 'Par/Func/Glob/' folder, setting 'No')

¨

Blocking of the trip command has been canceled. (M A I N : T r i p c m d . b l o c k . U S E R , 'Par/Func/Glob/' folder, setting 'No')

¨

The P63xdevice is on-line. (M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e , , 'Par/Func/Glob/' folder, setting 'Yes (on)')

After completion of commissioning, only the green LED indicator signaling ‘Operation’ (H1) should be on.

9-12

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

10 Troubleshooting

10 Troubleshooting This chapter describes problems that might be encountered, their causes, and possible methods for eliminating them. It is intended as a general orientation only, and in cases of doubt it is better to return the P63x to the manufacturer. Please follow the packaging instructions in the section entitled ‘Unpacking and Packing’ in Chapter 5 when returning equipment to the manufacturer. Problem (Type of Malfunction): ¨

Lines of text are not displayed on the local control . n Check to see whether there is supply voltage at the device connection points. n Check to see whether the magnitude of the auxiliary voltage is correct. The P63x is protected against damage resulting from polarity reversal.

Before checking further, disconnect the P63x from the power supply.

The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:

! The local control is connected to processor module P by a plug-in connecting cable. Make sure the connector position is correct. Do not bend the connecting cable.

n Check to make sure that fuse F1 on power supply module V is O.K. If the fuse is defective, it should not be replaced without determining the cause of failure. If a fuse is replaced without eliminating the problem, there is the danger that the damage will spread. Required Fuses: VA,nom = 24 V DC: VA,nom = 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC:

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

Type M3.5 Type M2

10-1

10 Troubleshooting (continued)

The P63x signals ”Warning” (LED H3).

¨

Identify the specific problem by reading out the monitoring signal memory (see the section entitled ‘Monitoring Signal Memory Readout’ in Chapter 6). The table below lists possible monitoring or warning indications (provided that a configuration setting has been entered at S F M O N : F c t . a s s i g n . w a r n i n g ) , the faulty area, the P63x response, and the mode of the output relay configured for 'Warning' and 'Blocked/Faulty'. Self-monitoring

SFMON: Warning (LED) Warning configured for LED H3.

036 070

SFMON: Warning (relay) Warning configured for an output relay.

036 100

Key -:

No reaction and/or no output relay triggered.

Yes:

The corresponding output relay is triggered.

Updating:

The output relay configured for 'Warning' starts only if the monitoring signal is still present.

1)

:

The 'Blocked/faulty' output relay only operates if the signal has been configured at M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n m . f a u l t .

2)

:

The 'Warning' output relay only operates if the signal has been configured at S F M O N : F c t . a s s i g n m . w a r n i n g .

093 024 SFMON: Cold restart A cold restart has been carried out on of a checksum error in the memory (NOVRAM).

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes SFMON: Cold rest./SW update A cold restart has been carried out following a software update.

093 025

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes SFMON: Blocking HW failure Supplementary warning that this device is blocked. 'Warning' output relay:

10-2

090 019

Updating / Updating

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

10 Troubleshooting (continued)

SFMON: Relay Kxx faulty Multiple signal: output relay defective. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

041 200

-/Updating / Updating 1) Yes / Yes

SFMON: Hardware clock fail. The hardware clock has failed. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

093 040

-/Yes / Yes -/-

SFMON: Battery failure Battery voltage too low. Replace battery. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

090 010

-/Updating / Updating -/-

SFMON: Invalid SW d.loaded Wrong or invalid software has been ed. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

096 121

Warm restart / Device blocking Yes / Yes Yes / Yes

093 081 SFMON: +15V supply faulty The + 15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

Warm restart / Device blocking Yes / Yes Yes / Yes

SFMON: +24V supply faulty The +24 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

Warm restart / Device blocking Yes / Yes Yes / Yes

SFMON: -15V supply faulty The -15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

093 082

093 080

Warm restart / Device blocking Yes / Yes Yes / Yes

10-3

10 Troubleshooting (continued)

SFMON: Wrong module slot SFMON: Wrong module slot SFMON: Wrong module slot SFMON: Wrong module slot SFMON: Wrong module slot SFMON: Wrong module slot SFMON: Wrong module slot SFMON: Wrong module slot SFMON: Wrong module slot SFMON: Wrong module slot SFMON: Wrong module slot SFMON: Wrong module slot SFMON: Wrong module slot SFMON: Wrong module slot SFMON: Wrong module slot SFMON: Wrong module slot SFMON: Wrong module slot SFMON: Wrong module slot SFMON: Wrong module slot SFMON: Wrong module slot SFMON: Wrong module slot Module in wrong slot.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

10-4

096 100 096 101 096 102 096 103 096 104 096 105 096 106 096 107 096 108 096 109 096 110 096 111 096 112 096 113 096 114 096 115 096 116 096 117 096 118 096 119 096 120

Warm restart / Device blocking Yes / Yes Yes / Yes

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

10 Troubleshooting (continued)

SFMON: Defect.module slot 1 SFMON: Defect.module slot 2 SFMON: Defect.module slot 3 SFMON: Defect.module slot 4 SFMON: Defect.module slot 5 SFMON: Defect.module slot 6 SFMON: Defect.module slot 7 SFMON: Defect.module slot 8 SFMON: Defect.module slot 9 SFMON: Defect.module slot 10 SFMON: Defect.module slot 11 SFMON: Defect.module slot 12 SFMON: Defect.module slot 13 SFMON: Defect.module slot 14 SFMON: Defect.module slot 15 SFMON: Defect.module slot 16 SFMON: Defect.module slot 17 SFMON: Defect.module slot 18 SFMON: Defect.module slot 19 SFMON: Defect.module slot 20 SFMON: Defect.module slot 21 Defective module in slot x. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

097 000 097 001 097 002 097 003 097 004 097 005 097 006 097 007 097 008 097 009 097 010 097 011 097 012 097 013 097 014 097 015 097 016 097 017 097 018 097 019 097 020

-/Updating / Updating 1) Yes / Yes

SFMON: Module A DPR faulty Dual-Port-RAM fault on communication module A. This fault is only detected during device startup. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

-/Yes / Yes -/-

SFMON: Module A RAM faulty RAM fault on communication module A. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

093 070

093 071

-/Yes / Yes -/-

093 110 SFMON: Module Y DPR faulty The checksum feature of analog I/O module Y has detected a fault in the data transmission of the Dual-Port-RAM.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

-/-

10-5

10 Troubleshooting (continued)

SFMON: Module Y RAM faulty Fault in the program or data memory of the analog I/O module. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Error K 701 SFMON: Error K 702 SFMON: Error K 703 SFMON: Error K 704 SFMON: Error K 705 SFMON: Error K 706 SFMON: Error K 707 SFMON: Error K 708 SFMON: Error K 801 SFMON: Error K 802 SFMON: Error K 901 SFMON: Error K 902 SFMON: Error K 903 SFMON: Error K 904 SFMON: Error K 905 SFMON: Error K 906 SFMON: Error K 907 SFMON: Error K 908 SFMON: Error K 1001 SFMON: Error K 1002 SFMON: Error K 1003 SFMON: Error K 1004 SFMON: Error K 1005 SFMON: Error K 1006 SFMON: Error K 1007 SFMON: Error K 1008 SFMON: Error K 1201 SFMON: Error K 1202 SFMON: Error K 1601 SFMON: Error K 1602 SFMON: Error K 1603 SFMON: Error K 1604 SFMON: Error K 1605 SFMON: Error K 1606 SFMON: Error K 1607 SFMON: Error K 1608 SFMON: Error K 1801 SFMON: Error K 1802 SFMON: Error K 1803 SFMON: Error K 1804 SFMON: Error K 1805 SFMON: Error K 1806 SFMON: Error K 2001 SFMON: Error K 2002 SFMON: Error K 2003 SFMON: Error K 2004 SFMON: Error K 2005 SFMON: Error K 2006 SFMON: Error K 2007 10-6

093 111

-/Yes / Yes -/097 078 097 079 097 080 097 081 097 082 097 083 097 084 097 085 097 086 097 087 097 094 097 095 097 096 097 097 097 098 097 099 097 100 097 101 097 102 097 103 097 104 097 105 097 106 097 107 097 108 097 109 097 118 097 119 097 150 097 151 097 152 097 153 097 154 097 155 097 156 097 157 097 166 097 167 097 168 097 169 097 170 097 171 097 182 097 183 097 184 097 185 097 186 097 187 097 188

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

10 Troubleshooting (continued)

SFMON: Error K 2008 Output relay K xxx defective. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

097 189

-/Updating / Updating 1) Yes / Yes

SFMON: Undef. operat. code Undefined operation code, i.e. software error. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

Warm restart / Device blocking Yes / Yes Yes / Yes

SFMON: Invalid arithm. op. Invalid arithmetic operation, i.e. software error. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

093 012

Warm restart / Device blocking Yes / Yes Yes / Yes

SFMON: Exception oper.syst. Interrupt of the operating system. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

093 013

Warm restart / Device blocking Yes / Yes Yes / Yes

SFMON: Protection failure Watchdog is monitoring the periodic start of protection routines. It has detected an error. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

093 011

Warm restart / Device blocking Yes / Yes Yes / Yes

SFMON: Undefined interrupt Undefined interrupt, i.e. software error. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

093 010

090 021

Warm restart / Device blocking Yes / Yes Yes / Yes

090 003 SFMON: Checksum error param A checksum error involving the parameters in the memory (NOVRAM) has been detected.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

Warm restart / Device blocking Yes / Yes Yes / Yes

10-7

10 Troubleshooting (continued)

093 041 SFMON: Clock sync. error In 10 consecutive clock synchronization telegrams, the difference between the time of day given in the telegram and that of the hardware clock is greater than 10 ms.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

-/Yes / Yes -/-

093 026 SFMON: Interm.volt.fail.RAM Faulty test pattern in the RAM. This can occur, for example, if the processor module or the power supply module is removed from the bus module (digital). This fault is only detected during device startup. After the fault is detected, the software initializes the RAM. This means that all records are deleted.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

Warm restart / Device blocking Yes / Yes Yes / Yes

SFMON: Overflow MT_RC Last entry in the monitoring signal memory in the event of overflow. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

-/Yes / Yes -/-

SFMON: Semaph. MT_RC block. Software overload. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

093 015

-/Yes / Yes -/-

SFMON: Inval. SW vers.COMM1 Incorrect or invalid communication software has been ed. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

090 012

093 075

-/Yes / Yes -/-

093 113 SFMON: Invalid SW vers. Y Incorrect or invalid software for analog I/O module has been ed.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

10-8

-/Yes / Yes -/-

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

10 Troubleshooting (continued)

SFMON: M.c.b. trip V The voltage transformer m.c.b. has tripped. st

098 000

nd

1 device reaction / 2 device reaction: Blocking of over-/underfrequency protection and of voltage-time protection Output relay ‘Warning’“: Output relay ‘Blocked/faulty’:

Yes / Yes -/-

2)

093 114 SFMON: Invalid scaling A-1 093 115 SFMON: Invalid scaling A-2 An invalid characteristic has been set for one of the analog output channels of analog I/O module Y.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

Depends on type of fault. 2) Yes / Yes -/-

093 116 SFMON: Invalid scaling IDC An invalid characteristic has been set for the anaput channel of analog I/O module Y.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

Depends on type of fault. 2) Yes / Yes -/-

098 024 SFMON: PT100 open circuit The P63x has detected an open circuit in the connection of the resistance thermometer.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

Depends on type of fault. 2) Yes / Yes -/-

SFMON: Overload 20mA input The 20 mA input of analog I/O module Y is overloaded. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

098 025

Depends on type of fault. 2) Yes / Yes -/-

098 026 SFMON: Open circuit 20mA inp. The P63x has detected an open circuit in the connection of the 20 mA input.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

Depends on type of fault. 2) Yes / Yes -/-

10-9

10 Troubleshooting (continued)

098 028 SFMON: Setting error f<> The over-/ underfrequency protection function has been set to "overfrequency" (by way of the settings for operate threshold and nominal frequency). This setting is not valid in the f w. Delta f / Delta t operating mode.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

Frequency protection blocking 2) Yes / Yes Yes / Yes

091 007 SFMON: Iref, a inval. range 091 008 SFMON: Iref, b inval. range 091 009 SFMON: Iref, c inval. range 091 016 SFMON: Iref, d inval. range The reference current determined by the P63x for differential protection is not within the permissible range.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

Device blocking Yes / Yes Yes / Yes

SFMON: Matching fail. end a SFMON: Matching fail. end b SFMON: Matching fail. end c SFMON: Matching fail. end d The calculated amplitude matching factor of the differential protection function is above the permissible range. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

091 001 091 002 091 017

Device blocking Yes / Yes Yes / Yes

SFMON: Ratio match.fact. >3 The ratio of the amplitude matching factors of the differential protection function is above the permissible range. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

091 000

091 004

Device blocking Yes / Yes Yes / Yes

091 006 SFMON: 2. match.fact.<0.7 The medium amplitude matching factor of the differential protection function is lower than permitted.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

Device blocking Yes / Yes Yes / Yes

SFMON: Inv.range Iref REF_1 SFMON: Inv.range Iref REF_2 SFMON: Inv.range Iref REF_3 The reference current determined by the P63x for ground differential protection is not within the permissible range. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Match.f. kam,N REF_1 SFMON: Match.f. kam,N REF_2 10-10

091 105 091 115 091 125

Device blocking Yes / Yes Yes / Yes 091 101 091 111

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

10 Troubleshooting (continued)

SFMON: Match.f. kam,N REF_3 SFMON: Match.f. kam,Y REF_1 SFMON: Match.f. kam,Y REF_2 SFMON: Match.f. kam,Y REF_3 The calculated amplitude matching factor of the ground differential protection function is above the permissible range. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

091 102 091 112 091 122

Device blocking Yes / Yes Yes / Yes

SFMON: Rat.match.f.>3 REF_1 SFMON: Rat.match.f.>3 REF_2 SFMON: Rat.match.f.>3 REF_3 The ratio of the amplitude matching factors of the ground differential protection function is above the permissible range. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

091 121

091 103 091 113 091 123

Device blocking Yes / Yes Yes / Yes

091 104 SFMON: Min.mtch.f.<0.5REF_1 091 114 SFMON: Min.mtch.f.<0.5REF_2 091 124 SFMON: Min.mtch.f.<0.5REF_3 The lowest amplitude matching factor of the differential protection function is lower than permitted.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

Device blocking Yes / Yes Yes / Yes

SFMON: CTA error THRM1 SFMON: CTA error THRM2 Faulty coolant temperature acquisition. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

098 036 098 037

-/2) Yes / Yes -/-

SFMON: Setting error THRM1 SFMON: Setting error THRM2 The maximum permissible object temperature and the maximum permissible coolant temperature have been set to the same value. This setting is not valid. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

098 038 098 039

Blocking of the thermal overload protection function Updating / Updating -/-

10-11

10 Troubleshooting (continued)

093 120 SFMON: Inv.inp.f.clock sync Function MAIN: Min- puls e c loc k EX T has been configured to a binary input of analog I/O module Y.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay:

10-12

Clock synchronization failure. 2) Yes / Yes -/-

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

11 Maintenance

11 Maintenance The P63x is a low-maintenance device. The components used in the units are selected to meet exacting requirements. Recalibration is not necessary. Maintenance procedures in the power supply area Electrolytic capacitors are installed in the power supply area because of dimensioning requirements. The useful life of these capacitors is significant from a maintenance standpoint. When the equipment is operated continuously at the upper limit of the recommended temperature range (+55°C or 131°F), the useful life of these components is 80,000 hours, or more than 9 years. Under these conditions, replacement of the electrolytic capacitors is recommended after a period of 8 to 10 years. Component drift follows the '10-degree rule'. This means that the useful life is doubled for each 10 K reduction in temperature. When the operating temperatures inside the devices are lower, the required maintenance intervals are increased accordingly. The P63x is equipped with a lithium battery for non-volatile storage of fault data and for keeping the internal clock running in the event of failure of the auxiliary power supply. Loss of capacity due to module-internal self-discharging amounts to less than 1% per year over a period of availability of 10 years. Since the terminal voltage remains virtually constant until capacity is exhausted, usefulness is maintained until a very low residual capacity is reached. With a nominal capacity of 850 mAh and discharge currents of only a few µA during device storage or in the range of the self-discharge current during device operation, the result is a correspondingly long service life. It is therefore recommended that the lithium battery only be replaced after the maintenance interval cited above. Replacement of the maintenance-related components named above is not possible without soldering. Maintenance work must be carried out by trained personnel, and the auxiliary voltage must be turned off while the work is being performed.

Always turn off the power (supply voltage) before removing a hardware module.

The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply module V is removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

11-1

11 Maintenance (continued)

The relevant components are located on the following modules: ¨

Electrolytic capacitor: on power supply module V.

¨

Lithium battery: on power supply module V.

Note:

Only AREVA-approved components may be used (see Chapter 13).

Capacitor capacitance must be checked before installation.

11-1

11-2

Component drawing for power supply module V

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

11 Maintenance (continued)

There is a danger of explosion if the electrolytic capacitor and battery are not properly replaced. Always check to make sure that the polarity of the electrolytic capacitor and the battery is correct.

The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:

! The local control is connected to processor module P by a plug-in connecting cable. Make sure the connector position is correct. Do not bend the connecting cable.

Note:

The replaced components (electrolytic capacitor and battery) must be disposed of in compliance with applicable national regulations.

After the maintenance procedures described above have been completed, new commissioning tests as described in Chapter 9 must be carried out.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

11-3

11 Maintenance (continued)

Routine functional testing The P63x is used as a safety device and must therefore be routinely checked for proper operation. The first functional tests should be carried out approximately 6 to 12 months after commissioning. Additional functional tests should performed at intervals of 2 to 3 years – 4 years at the maximum. The P63x incorporates in its system a very extensive self-monitoring function for hardware and software. The internal structure guarantees, for example, that communication within the processor system will be checked on a continuing basis. Nonetheless, there are a number of subfunctions that cannot be checked by the selfmonitoring feature without running a test from the device terminals. The respective device-specific properties and setting parameters must be observed in such cases. In particular, none of the control and signaling circuits that are run to the device from the outside are checked by the self-monitoring function. Anaput circuits The analog measured variables are fed through an analog preprocessing feature (antialiasing filtering) to a common analog-to-digital converter. In order to make sure that the analog measuring circuits are functioning correctly, it is necessary to test from the device terminals. The best way to carry out a static test of the anaput circuits is to check the primary measured operating data using the operating data measurement function or to use a suitable testing instrument. A “small” measured value (such as 0.5 Inom) and a “large” measured value (such as 4 Inom) should be used to check the measuring range of the A/D converter. This makes it possible to check the entire control range. The accuracy of operating data measurement is <1 %. An important factor in evaluating device performance is long-term performance based on comparison with previous measurements. A dynamic test is not absolutely necessary, since it only checks the stability of a few less ive components. Based on reliability analysis, the statistical expectation is that only one component in 10 years in 1000 devices will be outside the tolerance range. Additional analog testing is not necessary, in our opinion, since information processing is completely numerical and is based on the measured analog current and voltage values. Proper operation was checked in conjunction with type testing.

11-4

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

11 Maintenance (continued)

Binary inputs The binary inputs are not checked by the self-monitoring function. However, a testing function is integrated into the software so that the trigger state of each input can be read out (‘Oper/Cycl/Phys’ folder). This check should be performed for each input being used and can be done, if necessary, without disconnecting any device wiring. Binary outputs With respect to binary outputs, the integrated self-monitoring function includes even twophase triggering of the relay coils of all the all-or-nothing relays. There is no monitoring function for the external circuit. In this case the all-or-nothing relays must be triggered by way of device functions or integrated test functions. For these testing purposes, triggering of the output circuits is integrated into the software through a special control function (‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder).

! Before starting testing, open any triggering circuits for external devices so that no inadvertent switching operations will take place.

Serial interfaces The integrated self-monitoring function for the PC or communication interface also includes the communication module. The complete communication system, including connecting link and fiber-optic module (if applicable) is always totally monitored as long as a link is established through the control program or the communication protocol.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

11-5

11-6

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

12 Storage

12 Storage Devices must be stored in a dry and clean environment. A temperature range of -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F) must be maintained during storage (see the Chapter on Technical Data). The relative humidity must be controlled so that neither condensation nor ice formation will result. If the units are stored without being connected to auxiliary voltage, then the electrolytic capacitors in the power supply area need to be reformed every 4 years. Reform the capacitors by connecting auxiliary voltage to the P63x for approximately 10 minutes.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

12-1

12-2

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

13 Accessories and Spare Parts

13 Accessories and Spare Parts The PQ 63x is supplied with standard labeling for the LED indicators. -specific labeling for non-standard configurations of the LED’s can be printed on the blank label strips packed with the device. The label strip can then be glued to the front area reserved for this purpose. The label strip can be filled in using an overhead projector pen, waterproof type. Example: Stabilo brand pen, OH Pen 196 PS.

Description

Order No.

Cable bushings

88512-4-0337414-301

Lithium battery, type 1/2 AA 3.6 V Electrolytic capacitor 100 µF, 385 V DC Only the following brands of capacitor are permitted: Philips, type PUL-SI/159/222215946101 Panasonic, type TS-HA/ECOS 2GA 101 Nichicon, type LGQ 2G 101 MHSZ Nichicon, type LGU 2G 101 MHLZ Fuse for VA,nom = 24 V DC: M3.5 Fuse for VA,nom = 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC: M2 Connecting parts & fasteners (for assembling flush-mounted cases to form a mounting rack)

88512-4-9650539-302

Empty subrack 40 T

88512-4-9650535-302

Cover frame 40 T

88512-4-9650545-302

S&R-103 operating program (for Windows)

On request

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

13-1

13-2

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

14 Order Information

14 Order Information 14.1 Order Information for P631 in Case 40T P631 in Case 40T Designs

Transformer Differential Protection Device P631 Basic device 40T, pin-terminal connection Basic complement 4 binary inputs and 8 output relays

Order-Nr.

P631-

9 0 0 0

0 -301 -XXX -60X -XXX

3

Surface-mounted, local control with text display Flush-mounted, local control with text display

-401

3 4

Inom = 1A / 5A (T1x ... T2x)

9

VA,nom = 24VDC VA,nom = 48 to 250VDC/100 to 230VAC VA,nom = 24VDC and binary module (6 output relays) VA,nom = 48 to 250VDC/100 to 230VAC and binary module (6 output relays)

3 4 8 9

With communication interface protocol: IEC 60870-5-103

-451 9 1

With communication interface only IRIG-B input for clock synchronization

-456 9 0 0

protocol can be switched between IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP 3.0 and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization

2

for connection to wire, RS485, isolated for connection to plastic fiber, FSMA connector for connection to glass fiber, ST connector Language: English (German) Language: German (English) Language: French (English) Language: Spanish (English)

1 2 4 Without order ext. No <1> <1> <1>

Certificates per EN / DIN - Certificate of Compliance with the Order (EN10204-2.1/DIN50049-2.1) - Constructor`s Test Certificate (DIN55350-18-4.2.2.) <1> <3> or Inspection Certificate B (EN10204-3.1B/DIN 50049-3.1B) - Inspection Certificate O/M (DIN 55350-18-4.3.1/3) or Inspection Certificate C (EN10204-3.1C/DIN 50049-3.1C)

-801 -802 -803

Please order in plain text -599 Please order in plain text

<1> Must be ordered prior to device production. <3> This order extension no. will not be printed on the name label of device or shipping box.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

14-1

14 Order Information (continued)

14.2 Order Information for P632 in Case 40T P632 in Case 40T Designs

Transformer Differential Protection Device P632 Basic device 40T, pin-terminal connection Basic complement 4 binary inputs and 8 output relays

Order-Nr.

P632-

-301 -XXX -60X -XXX

9 0 1

3

Surface-mounted, local control with text display Flush-mounted, local control with text display

-401

3 4

Inom = 1A / 5A (T1x ... T2x)

9

Vnom = 50 ... 130V (1-pole)

1

Additional options: Without With 1 binary module (6 binary inputs / 8 output relays)

0 1

VA,nom = 24VDC VA,nom = 48 to 250VDC/100 to 230VAC VA,nom = 24VDC and binary module (6 output relays) VA,nom = 48 to 250VDC/100 to 230VAC and binary module (6 output relays)

3 4 8 9

Additional options: Without With analog module With binary module (24 binary inputs)

0 2 4

With communication interface protocol: IEC 60870-5-103

-451 9 1

With communication interface only IRIG-B input for clock synchronization

-456 9 0 0

protocol can be switched between IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP 3.0 and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization

2

for connection to wire, RS485, isolated for connection to plastic fiber, FSMA connector for connection to glass fiber, ST connector Language: English (German) Language: German (English) Language: French (English) Language: Spanish (English)

1 2 4 Without order ext. No <1> <1> <1>

-801 -802 -803

Certificates per EN / DIN - Certificate of Compliance with the Order (EN10204-2.1/DIN50049-2.1) - Constructor`s Test Certificate (DIN55350-18-4.2.2.) <1> <3> or Inspection Certificate B (EN10204-3.1B/DIN 50049-3.1B) - Inspection Certificate O/M (DIN 55350-18-4.3.1/3) or Inspection Certificate C (EN10204-3.1C/DIN 50049-3.1C)

Please order in plain text -599 Please order in plain text

<1> Must be ordered prior to device production. <3> This order extension no. will not be printed on the name label of device or shipping box.

14-2

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

14 Order Information (continued)

14.3 Order Information for P633 in Case 40T or 84T P633 in Case 40T or 84T Designs

Order-Nr.

Transformer Differential Protection Device P633

P633-

Basic device 40T, pin-terminal connection Basic complement 4 binary inputs and 8 output relays

3

Basic device 84T, pin-terminal connection Basic complement 4 binary inputs and 8 output relays

-301 -XXX -60X -XXX

9 9 1

0

0

7

Surface-mounted, local control with text display Flush-mounted, local control with text display

-401 -402

3 4

Inom = 1A / 5A (T1x ... T2x)

9

Inom = 1A / 5A (T3x)

9

Vnom = 50 ... 130V (1-pole)

1

Additional options: Without With 1 binary module (6 binary inputs / 8 output relays) With 2 binary modules (12 binary inputs / 16 output relays)

0 1 2

VA,nom = 24VDC VA,nom = 48 to 250VDC/100 to 230VAC VA,nom = 24VDC and binary module (6 output relays) VA,nom = 48 to 250VDC/100 to 230VAC and binary module (6 output relays)

3 4 8 9

Additional options: Without With analog module With 1 binary module (24 binary inputs) With 1 binary module (24 binary inputs) and analog module

0 2 4 6

With communication interface protocol: IEC 60870-5-103

-451 9 1

With communication interface only IRIG-B input for clock synchronization

-456 9 0 0

protocol can be switched between IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP 3.0 and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization

2

for connection to wire, RS485, isolated for connection to plastic fiber, FSMA connector for connection to glass fiber, ST connector Language: English (German) Language: German (English) Language: French (English) Language: Spanish (English)

1 2 4 Without order ext. No <1> <1> <1>

Certificates per EN / DIN - Certificate of Compliance with the Order (EN10204-2.1/DIN50049-2.1) - Constructor`s Test Certificate (DIN55350-18-4.2.2.) <1> <3> or Inspection Certificate B (EN10204-3.1B/DIN 50049-3.1B) - Inspection Certificate O/M (DIN 55350-18-4.3.1/3) or Inspection Certificate C (EN10204-3.1C/DIN 50049-3.1C)

-801 -802 -803

Please order in plain text -599 Please order in plain text

<1> Must be ordered prior to device production. <3> This order extension no. will not be printed on the name label of device or shipping box.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

14-3

14 Order Information (continued)

14.4 Order Information for P634 in Case 84T P634 in Case 84T Designs

Order-Nr.

Transformer Differential Protection Device P634

P634-

Basic device 84T, pin-terminal connection Basic complement 4 binary inputs and 8 output relays

9 9 1

-301 -XXX -60X -XXX

7

Surface-mounted, local control with text display Flush-mounted, local control with text display

-401

3 4

Inom = 1A / 5A (T1x ... T2x)

9

Inom = 1A / 5A (T3x ... T4x)

9

Vnom = 50 ... 130V (1-pole)

1

Additional options: Without With 1 binary module (6 binary inputs / 8 output relays)

0 1

VA,nom = 24VDC VA,nom = 48 to 250VDC/100 to 230VAC VA,nom = 24VDC and binary module (6 output relays) VA,nom = 48 to 250VDC/100 to 230VAC and binary module (6 output relays)

3 4 8 9

Additional options: Without With analog module With 1 binary module (24 binary inputs) With 1 binary module (24 binary inputs) and analog module

0 2 4 6

With communication interface protocol: IEC 60870-5-103

-451 9 1

With communication interface only IRIG-B input for clock synchronization

-456 9 0 0

protocol can be switched between IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP 3.0 and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization

2

for connection to wire, RS485, isolated for connection to plastic fiber, FSMA connector for connection to glass fiber, ST connector Language: English (German) Language: German (English) Language: French (English) Language: Spanish (English)

1 2 4 Without order ext. No <1> <1> <1>

-801 -802 -803

Certificates per EN / DIN - Certificate of Compliance with the Order (EN10204-2.1/DIN50049-2.1) - Constructor`s Test Certificate (DIN55350-18-4.2.2.) <1> <3> or Inspection Certificate B (EN10204-3.1B/DIN 50049-3.1B) - Inspection Certificate O/M (DIN 55350-18-4.3.1/3) or Inspection Certificate C (EN10204-3.1C/DIN 50049-3.1C)

Please order in plain text -599 Please order in plain text

<1> Must be ordered prior to device production. <3> This order extension no. will not be printed on the name label of device or shipping box.

14-4

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

Appendix

A Glossary B List of Signals C Terminal Connection Diagrams D Address Lists (Available as a PDF file. Not included in the printed manual.)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

AP-1

Appendix (continued)

A A1 A2 A3 A4 A5

Glossary Function Groups Modules Symbols Examples of Signal Names Symbols Used

B B1 B2

List of Signals Internal Signal Names Telecontrol Interface per EN 60870-5-101 or IEC 870-5-101 (Companion Standard) Interoperability Network Configuration (Network-Specific Parameters) Physical Layer (Network-Specific Parameters) Link Layer (Network-Specific Parameters) Application Layer Basic Application Functions

B 2.1 B 2.1.1 B 2.1.2 B 2.1.3 B 2.1.4 B 2.1.5 B3 B 3.1 B 3.1.1 B 3.1.1.1 B 3.1.1.2 B 3.1.1.3 B 3.1.2 B 3.1.3 B 3.1.3.1 B 3.1.3.2 B 3.1.3.3

B-1 B-1 B-2 B-2 B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5 B-11 B-14 B-14 B-14 B-14 B-14 B-14 B-15 B-15 B-15 B-15 B-15

B 3.1.3.4.1 B 3.1.3.4.2 B 3.1.3.4.3 B 3.1.3.5 B 3.1.3.6

Communication Interface per IEC 60870-5-103 Interoperability Physical Layer Electrical Interface Optical Interface Transmission Rate Link Layer Application Layer Transmission Mode for Application Data Common Address of ASDU Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Monitor Direction System Functions in Monitor Direction Status Indications in Monitor Direction Monitoring Signals (Supervision Indications) in Monitor Direction Earth Fault Indications in Monitor Direction Fault Indications in Monitor Direction Auto-Reclosure Indications in Monitor Direction Measurands in Monitor Direction Generic Functions in Monitor Direction Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Control Direction System Functions in Control Direction General Commands in Control Direction Generic Functions in Control Direction Basic Application Functions Miscellaneous

C C1 C2 C3 C 3.1 C 3.2 C4

Terminal Connection Diagrams Terminal Connection Diagrams P631 in Case 40 T Terminal Connection Diagrams P632 in Case 40 T Terminal Connection Diagrams P633 Case 40 T Case 84 T Terminal Connection Diagrams P634 in Case 84 T

C-1 C-1 C-4 C-9 C-9 C-13 C-19

B 3.1.3.3.1 B 3.1.3.3.2 B 3.1.3.3.3 B 3.1.3.3.4 B 3.1.3.3.5 B 3.1.3.3.6 B 3.1.3.3.7 B 3.1.3.3.8 B 3.1.3.4

AP-2

A-1 A-1 A-2 A-3 A-10 A-11

B-15 B-16 B-17 B-18 B-19 B-20 B-20 B-22 B-23 B-23 B-23 B-24 B-25 B-25

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

Appendix (continued)

D

D1 D 1.1 D 1.2 D 1.3 D 1.3.1 D 1.3.2 D 1.3.3

Address List Legend Function Groups Address List P631 Parameters Device Identification Configuration Parameters Function Parameters Global General Functions Parameter Subsets

D-1 D-1 D-2 D-3 D-3 D-3 D-9 D-36 D-36 D-40 D-70

D2 D 2.1 D 2.1.1 D 2.1.2 D 2.1.3 D 2.2 D 2.3

Operation Cyclic Values Measured Operating Data Physical State Signals Logic State Signals Control and Testing Operating Data Recording

D-83 D-83 D-83 D-88 D-92 D-120 D-122

D3 D 3.1 D 3.2 D 3.3

Events Event Counters Measured Fault Data Fault Data Acquisition

D-123 D-123 D-125 D-128

D4 D 4.1 D 4.2 D 4.3 D 4.4 D 4.5 D 4.6 D 4.7 D 4.8 D 4.9 D 4.10 D 4.11 D 4.12 D 4.13 D 4.14 D 4.15 D 4.16 D 4.17 D 4.18 D 4.19

Selection Tables Selection Table "Binary Outputs" and LEDs Selection Table "Binary Inputs" Selection Table K 1 Selection Table K 2 Selection Table K 4 Selection Table K 5 Selection Table K 6 Selection Table K 7 Selection Table K 8 Selection Table K 9 Selection Table K 10 Selection Table K 22 Selection Table K 23 Selection Table K 30 Selection Table K 101 Selection Table K 102 Selection Table K 103 Selection Table K 104 Selection Table F 571

D-129 D-129 D-134 D-135 D-135 D-136 D-137 D-138 D-139 D-139 D-140 D-140 D-140 D-142 D-142 D-142 D-144 D-151 D-153 D-165

D5 D 5.1 D 5.2 D 5.3 D 5.4

Possible Entries into Memory Fault Memory Overload Memory Operating Data Memory Monitoring Signal Memory

D-166 D-166 D-170 D-172 D-175

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

AP-3

Appendix (continued)

AP-4

D6 D 6.1 D 6.2 D 6.3 D 6.3.1 D 6.3.2 D 6.3.3

Address List P632 Parameters Device Identification Configuration Parameters Function Parameters Global General Functions Parameter Subsets

D-177 D-177 D-177 D-185 D-234 D-234 D-238 D-269

D7 D 7.1 D 7.1.1 D 7.1.2 D 7.1.3 D 7.2 D 7.3

Operation Cyclic Values Measured Operating Data Physical State Signals Logic State Signals Control and Testing Operating Data Recording

D-286 D-286 D-286 D-292 D-308 D-343 D-345

D8 D 8.1 D 8.2 D 8.3

Events Event Counters Measured Fault Data Fault Data Acquisition

D-346 D-346 D-348 D-352

D9 D 9.1 D 9.2 D 9.3 D 9.4 D 9.5 D 9.6 D 9.7 D 9.8 D 9.9 D 9.10 D 9.11 D 9.12 D 9.13 D 9.14 D 9.15 D 9.16 D 9.17 D 9.18 D 9.19

Selection Tables Selection Table "Binary Outputs" and LEDs Selection Table "Binary Inputs" Selection Table K 1 Selection Table K 2 Selection Table K 4 Selection Table K 5 Selection Table K 6 Selection Table K 7 Selection Table K 8 Selection Table K 9 Selection Table K 10 Selection Table K 22 Selection Table K 23 Selection Table K 30 Selection Table K 101 Selection Table K 102 Selection Table K 103 Selection Table K 104 Selection Table F 571

D-353 D-353 D-358 D-359 D-360 D-361 D-362 D-363 D-364 D-365 D-366 D-366 D-367 D-368 D-368 D-369 D-372 D-381 D-383 D-399

D 10 D 10.1 D 10.2 D 10.3 D 10.4

Possible Entries into Memory Fault Memory Overload Memory Operating Data Memory Monitoring Signal Memory

D-400 D-400 D-405 D-407 D-410

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

Appendix (continued)

D 11 D 11.1 D 11.2 D 11.3 D 11.3.1 D 11.3.2 D 11.3.3

Address List P633 Parameters Device Identification Configuration Parameters Function Parameters Global General Functions Parameter Subsets

D-413 D-413 D-413 D-423 D-471 D-471 D-475 D-509

D 12 D 12.1 D 12.1.1 D 12.1.2 D 12.1.3 D 12.2 D 12.3

Operation Cyclic Values Measured Operating Data Physical State Signals Logic State Signals Control and Testing Operating Data Recording

D-532 D-532 D-532 D-541 D-557 D-596 D-598

D 13 D 13.1 D 13.2 D 13.3

Events Event Counters Measured Fault Data Fault Data Acquisition

D-599 D-599 D-601 D-605

D 14 D 14.1 D 14.2 D 14.3 D 14.4 D 14.5 D 14.6 D 14.7 D 14.8 D 14.9 D 14.10 D 14.11 D 14.12 D 14.13 D 14.14 D 14.15 D 14.16 D 14.17 D 14.18 D 14.19

Selection Tables Selection Table "Binary Outputs" and LEDs Selection Table "Binary Inputs" Selection Table K 1 Selection Table K 2 Selection Table K 4 Selection Table K 5 Selection Table K 6 Selection Table K 7 Selection Table K 8 Selection Table K 9 Selection Table K 10 Selection Table K 22 Selection Table K 23 Selection Table K 30 Selection Table K 101 Selection Table K 102 Selection Table K 103 Selection Table K 104 Selection Table F 571

D-606 D-606 D-612 D-614 D-614 D-616 D-616 D-618 D-620 D-621 D-621 D-622 D-622 D-624 D-624 D-625 D-628 D-638 D-642 D-661

D 15 D 15.1 D 15.2 D 15.3 D 15.4

Possible Entries into Memory Fault Memory Overload Memory Operating Data Memory Monitoring Signal Memory

D-662 D-662 D-667 D-670 D-674

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

AP-5

Appendix (continued)

AP-6

D 16 D 16.1 D 16.2 D 16.3 D 16.3.1 D 16.3.2 D 16.3.3

Address List P634 Parameters Device Identification Configuration Parameters Function Parameters Global General Functions Parameter Subsets

D-676 D-676 D-676 D-684 D-723 D-723 D-728 D-763

D 17 D 17.1 D 17.1.1 D 17.1.2 D 17.1.3 D 17.2 D 17.3

Operation Cyclic Values Measured Operating Data Physical State Signals Logic State Signals Control and Testing Operating Data Recording

D-786 D-786 D-786 D-797 D-809 D-847 D-849

D 18 D 18.1 D 18.2 D 18.3

Events Event Counters Measured Fault Data Fault Data Acquisition

D-850 D-850 D-852 D-856

D 19 D 19.1 D 19.2 D 19.3 D 19.4 D 19.5 D 19.6 D 19.7 D 19.8 D 19.9 D 19.10 D 19.11 D 19.12 D 19.13 D 19.14 D 19.15 D 19.16 D 19.17 D 19.18 D 19.19

Selection Tables Selection Table "Binary Outputs" and LEDs Selection Table "Binary Inputs" Selection Table K 1 Selection Table K 2 Selection Table K 4 Selection Table K 5 Selection Table K 6 Selection Table K 7 Selection Table K 8 Selection Table K 9 Selection Table K 10 Selection Table K 22 Selection Table K 23 Selection Table K 30 Selection Table K 101 Selection Table K 102 Selection Table K 103 Selection Table K 104 Selection Table F 571

D-857 D-857 D-863 D-865 D-865 D-866 D-867 D-869 D-871 D-871 D-872 D-872 D-873 D-875 D-875 D-876 D-879 D-889 D-893 D-911

D 20 D 20.1 D 20.2 D 20.3 D 20.4

Possible Entries into Memory Fault Memory Overload Memory Operating Data Memory Monitoring Signal Memory

D-912 D-912 D-917 D-920 D-924

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

Appendix A - Glossary

A1

Function Groups P631 P632 P633 P634

COMM1: DIFF: DTOC1: DTOC2: DTOC3: DVICE: f<>: FT_DA: FT_RC: IDMT1: IDMT2: IDMT3: INP: IRIGB: LED: LIM_1: LIM_2: LIM_3: LIMIT: LOC: LOGIC: MAIN: MEASI: MEASO: MT_RC: OL_DA: OL_RC: OP_RC: OUTP: PC: PSS: REF_1:

Communication link Differential protection Definite-time overcurrent protection 1 Definite-time overcurrent protection 2 Definite-time overcurrent protection 3 Device Over-/underfrequency protection Fault data acquisition Fault recording Inverse-time overcurrent protection 1 Inverse-time overcurrent protection 2 Inverse-time overcurrent protection 3 Binary inputs IRIG-B interface LED indicators Limit value monitoring 1 Limit value monitoring 2 Limit value monitoring 3 Limit value monitoring Local control Logic Main functions Measured data input Measured data output Monitoring signal recording Overload data acquisition Overload recording Operating data recording Binary outputs PC link Parameter subset selection Ground differential protection 1 (Am) ; (Br: Restricted earth fault protection 1) REF_2: Ground differential protection 2 REF_3: Ground differential protection 3 SFMON: Self-monitoring THRM1: Thermal overload protection 1 THRM2: Thermal overload protection 2 V<>: Time-voltage protection

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü -

ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü

ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü

ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü

ü ü -

ü ü ü ü

ü ü ü ü ü ü

ü ü ü ü ü ü

A-1

Appendix A - Glossary (continued)

A2 A: B: L: P: T: V: X: Y:

A-2

Modules Communication module Bus module Local control module Processor module Transformer module Power supply module Binary I/O module Analog I/O module

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

Appendix A - Glossary (continued)

A3

Symbols

Graphic symbols for block diagrams Binary elements according to DIN 40900 Part 12, September 1992, IEC 617-12: amended 1991 Anaformation processing according to DIN 40900 Part 13, January 1981 To document the linking of analog and binary signals, additional symbols have been used, taken from several DIN documents. As a rule, direction of the signal flow is from left to right and from top to bottom. Other flow directions are marked by an arrow. Input signals are listed on the left side of the signal flow, output signals on the right side. Symbol

Description To obtain more space for representing a group of related elements, contours of the elements may be ed or cascaded if the following rules are met:

=

There is no functional linkage between elements whose common contour line is oriented in the signal flow direction. Note: This rule does not necessarily apply to configurations with two or more signal flow directions, such as for symbols with a control block and an output block. There exists at least one logical link between elements whose common contour line runs perpendicularly to the signal flow direction. Components of a symbol A symbol consists of a contour or contour combination and one or more qualifiers.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

A-3

Appendix A - Glossary (continued)

Symbol

Description Control block A control block contains an input function common to several symbols. It is used for the collective setting of several trigger elements, for example.

Output block An output block contains an output function common to several symbols.

Settable control block The four digits represent the address under which the function shown in the text after the colon may be set via the local control . Settable control block with function blocks The digits in the function block show the settings that are possible at this address. The text below the symbol shows the setting and the corresponding unit or meaning.

A-4

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

Appendix A - Glossary (continued)

Symbol

Description Static input Only the state of the binary input variable is effective.

Dynamic input Only the transition from value 0 to value 1 is effective.

Negation of an output The value up to the border line is negated at the output.

Negation of an input The input value is negated before the border line.

Dynamic input with negation Only the transition from value 1 to value 0 is effective.

AND element The output variable will be 1 only if all input variables are 1. OR element The output variable will be 1 only if at least one input variable is 1. Threshold element The output variable will be 1 only if at least two input variables are 1. The number in the symbol may be replaced by any other number. (m out of n) element The output variable will be 1 only if just one input variable is 1. The number in the symbol may be replaced by any other number if the number of inputs is increased or decreased accordingly.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

A-5

Appendix A - Glossary (continued)

Symbol

Description Delay element The transition from value 0 to 1 at the output occurs after a time delay of t1 relative to the corresponding transition at the input. The transition from value 1 to 0 at the output occurs after a time delay of t2 relative to the corresponding transition at the input. t1 and t2 may be replaced by the actual delay values (in seconds or strobe ticks). Monostable flip-flop The output variable will be 1 only if the input variable changes to 1. The output variable will remain 1 for 100 ms, independent of the duration of the input value 1 (non-retriggerable). Without a 1 in the function block the monostable flipflop is retriggerable. The time is 100 ms in this example, but it may be changed to any other duration. Analog-digital converter An anaput signal is converted to a binary signal.

Subtractor The output variable is the difference between the two input variables. A summing element is obtained by changing the minus sign to a plus sign at the symbol input. Schmitt Trigger with binary output signal The binary output variable will be 1 if the input signal exceeds a specific threshold. The output variable remains 1 until the input signal drops below the threshold again. Memory, general Storage of a binary or analog signal.

A-6

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

Appendix A - Glossary (continued)

Symbol

Description Non-stable flip-flop When the input variable changes to 1, a pulse sequence is generated at the output. The ! to the left of the G indicates that the pulse sequence starts with the input variable transition (synchronized start). If there is a ! to the right of the G, the pulse sequence ends with the ending of the 1 signal at the input (synchronized stop). Amplifier The output variable is 1 only if the input variable is also 1.

Band filter The output only transmits the 50 Hz component of the input signals. All other frequencies (above and below 50 Hz) are attenuated. Counter At the + input the input variable transitions from 0 to 1 are counted and stored in the function block. At the R(eset) input a transition of the input variable from 0 to 1 resets the counter to 0. Electromechanical drive in general, here a relay, for example.

Signal level converter with electrical isolation between input and output. L+ = pos. voltage input L- = neg. voltage input U1 = device identifier

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

A-7

Appendix A - Glossary (continued)

Symbol

Description Input transformer with phase and item identifiers (according to DIN EN 60445) Phase identifiers for current inputs: for A: A1 and A2 for B: B1 and B2 for C: C1 and C2 for N: N1 and N2 Phase identifiers for voltage inputs via transformer 1: for A: 1U for B: 1V for C: 1W for N: 1N via transformer 2: for A: 2U for B: 2V Item identifiers for current transformers: for A: T1 for B: T2 for C: T3 for N: T4 for voltage transformer 1: for A: T5 for B: T6 for C: T7 for N: T8 for VG-N transformer: T90 for voltage transformer 2: for A: T15 Change-over with item identifier

Special symbol Output relay in normally-energized arrangement (‘closed-circuit operation’).

A-8

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

Appendix A - Glossary (continued)

Symbol

Description PC interface with pin connections

Multiplier The output variable is the result of the multiplication of the two input variables.

Divider The output variable is the result of the division of the two input variables.

Comparator The output variable becomes 1 only if the input variable(s) are equal to the function in the function block.

Formula block The output variable becomes 1 only if the input variable(s) satisfy the equation in the function block

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

A-9

Appendix A - Glossary (continued)

A4

Examples of Signal Names

All settings and signals relevant for protection are shown in the block diagrams of Chapter 3 as follows: Signal Name

Description

K FT_RC: Fault recording n

Internal signal names are not coded by a data model address. In the block diagrams they are marked with a diamond. The small figure underneath the signal name represents a code that is irrelevant to the . The internal signal names used and their origins are listed in Appendix B.

DIST: VNG>> triggered [ 036 015 ]

Signal names coded by a data model address are represented by their address (shown in square brackets). Their origin is given in Chapters 7 and 8.

MAIN: General reset [ 003 002 ] ➚1: Execute

A specific setting to be used later on is shown with its signal name, address, and the setting preceded by the setting arrow.

305 100

A-10

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

Appendix A - Glossary (continued)

A5

Symbols Used

Symbol

Meaning

t

Time duration

V

Voltage, potential difference

V

Complex voltage

I

Electrical current

I

Complex current

Z

Complex impedance

Z

Modulus of complex impedance

f

Frequency

δ

Temperature in °C

Σ

Sum, result

Ω

Unit of electrical resistance

α

Angle

ϕ

Phase angle. With subscripts: specific angle between a defined current and a defined voltage.

τ

Time constant

∆T

Temperature difference in K

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

A-11

A-12

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

Appendix B - List of Signals

B 1 Internal Signal Names COMM1: Selected protocol DIFF: I(2*f0),1 DIFF: I(2*f0),2 DIFF: I(2*f0),3 DIFF: I(5*f0),1 DIFF: I(5*f0),2 DIFF: I(5*f0),3 DIFF: Id,1 DIFF: Id,2 DIFF: Id,3 DIFF: IR,1 DIFF: IR,2 DIFF: IR,3 DIFF: Sound match f<>: No. periods reached FT_DA: Save measured values LOGIC: Output n LOGIC: Output n (t) MAIN: Protection active MAIN: Reset LED MAIN: Time tag MEASO: Enable MEASO: Reset meas.val.outp. REF_1: Id,N,a REF_1: IR,N,a THRM1: With CTA THRM1: Block. by CTA error THRM1: I

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

Fig. 3-6 Fig. 3-79 Fig. 3-79 Fig. 3-79 Fig. 3-81 Fig. 3-81 Fig. 3-81 Fig. 3-78 Fig. 3-78 Fig. 3-78 Fig. 3-78 Fig. 3-78 Fig. 3-78 Fig. 3-71 Fig. 3-117 Fig. 3-63 Fig. 3-126, 3-127, 3-128, 3-129, 3-130 Fig. 3-126, 3-127, 3-128, 3-129, 3-130 Fig. 3-43 Fig. 3-52 Fig. 3-51 Fig. 3-23 Fig. 3-24 Fig. 3-86 Fig. 3-86 Fig. 3-110 Fig. 3-110 Fig. 3-111

B-1

Appendix B - List of Signals (continued)

B 2 Telecontrol Interface per EN 60870-5-101 or IEC 870-5-101 (Companion Standard) This section incorporates Section 8 of EN 60870-5-101 (1996), which includes a general definition of the telecontrol interface for substation control systems. B 2.1 Interoperability This application-based standard (companion standard) specifies parameter sets and other options from which subsets are to be selected in order to implement specific telecontrol systems. Certain parameters such as the number of octets in the COMMON ADDRESS of the ASDU are mutually exclusive. This means that only one value of the defined parameter is allowed per system. Other parameters, such as the listed set of different process information in the command and monitor direction, permit definition of the total number or of subsets that are suitable for the given application. This section combines the parameters given in the previous sections in order to facilitate an appropriate selection for a specific application. If a system is made up of several system components supplied by different manufacturers (“equipment stemming”), then it is necessary for all partners to agree on the selected parameters. The boxes for the selected parameters should be checked. Note:

The overall definition of a system may also require individual selection of certain parameters for specific parts of a system such as individual selection of scaling factors for individually addressable measured values.

B 2.1.1 Network Configuration (Network-Specific Parameters) ü

Point-to-point configuration

ü

Multiple point-to-point configuration

B-2

ü

Multipoint-party line configuration Multipoint-star configuration

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

Appendix B - List of Signals (continued)

B 2.1.2 Physical Layer (Network-Specific Parameters) Transmission Rate (Control Direction)

1

Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28

Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28

Standardized

Recommended with > 1 200 bit/s

Balanced interface X.24/X.27

100 bit/s

ü

2 400 bit/s

2 400 bit/s

56 000 bit/s

200 bit/s

ü

4 800 bit/s

4 800 bit/s

64 000 bit/s

300 bit/s

ü

9 600 bit/s

9 600 bit/s

ü

600 bit/s

19 200 bit/s

ü

1 200 bit/s

38 400 bit/s

Transmission Rate (Monitor Direction) 2

1

Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28

Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28

Standardized

Recommended with > 1 200 bit/s

Balanced interface X.24/X.27

100 bit/s

ü

2 400 bit/s

2 400 bit/s

56 000 bit/s

200 bit/s

ü

4 800 bit/s

4 800 bit/s

64 000 bit/s

300 bit/s

ü

9 600 bit/s

9 600 bit/s

ü

600 bit/s

19 200 bit/s

ü

1 200 bit/s

38 400 bit/s

The transmission rates for control direction and monitor direction must be identical.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

B-3

Appendix B - List of Signals (continued)

B 2.1.3 Link Layer (Network-Specific Parameters) Frame format FT 1.2, single character 1, and the fixed time-out interval are used exclusively in this companion standard. Link Transmission Procedure ü Balanced transmission

Address Field of the Link ü Not present (balanced transmission only)

ü Unbalanced transmission

ü One octet ü Two octets 1

1

Frame Length

ü Structured

240

ü Unstructured

Maximum length L (number of octets)

Balanced only.

B-4

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

Appendix B - List of Signals (continued)

B 2.1.4 Application Layer Transmission mode for application data Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in clause 4.10 of IEC 870-5-4, is used exclusively in this companion standard. Common Address of ASDU (System-Specific Parameter) ü One octet

ü Two octets

Information Object Address (System-Specific Parameter) ü One octet

ü Structured

ü Two octets

ü Unstructured

ü Three octets Cause of Transmission (System-Specific Parameter) ü One octet

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

ü Two octets (with originator address)

B-5

Appendix B - List of Signals (continued)

Selection of Standard ASDUs Process Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter) ü

<1>

=

Single-point information

M_SP_NA_1

ü

<2>

=

Single-point information with time tag

M_SP_TA_1

ü

<3>

=

Double-point information

M_DP_NA_1

ü

<4>

=

Double-point information with time tag

M_DP_TA_1

= ü

<5>

=

Step position information

M_ST_NA_1

ü

<6>

=

Step position information with time tag

M_ST_TA_1

ü

<7>

=

Bit string of 32 bit

M_BO_NA_1

ü

<8>

=

Bit string of 32 bit with time tag

M_BO_TA_1

ü

<9>

=

Measured value, normalized value

M_ME_NA_1

ü

<10>

=

Measured value, normalized value with time tag

M_ME_TA_1

ü

<11>

=

Measured value, scaled value

M_ME_NB_1

ü

<12>

=

Measured value, scaled value with time tag

M_ME_TB_1

<13>

=

Measured value, short floating point value

M_ME_NC_1

<14>

=

Measured value, short floating point value with time tag

M_ME_TC_1

ü

<15>

=

Integrated totals

M_IT_NA_1

ü

<16>

=

Integrated totals with time tag

M_IT_TA_1

ü

<17>

=

Event of protection equipment with time tag

M_EP_TA_1

B-6

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

Appendix B - List of Signals (continued)

ü

<18>

=

Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag

ME_EP_TB_1

ü

<19>

=

Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag

M_EP_TC_1

<20>

=

Packed single-point information with status change detection

M_PS_NA_1

<21>

=

Measured value, normalized value without quality descriptor

M_ME_ND_1

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

B-7

Appendix B - List of Signals (continued)

1

Process Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter) ü

<45>

=

Single command

C_SC_NA_1

ü

<46>

=

Double command

C_DC_NA_1

ü

<47>

=

Regulating step command

C_IT_NA_1

<48>

=

Set point command, normalized value

C_RC_NA_1

<49>

=

Set point command, scaled value

C_SE_NB_1

<50>

=

Set point command, short floating point value

C_SE_NC_1

<51>

=

Bit string of 32 bit

C_BO_NA_1

System Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter) ü

1

<70>

=

End of initialization

ME_EI_NA_1

Incorrectly identified with control direction in IEC 870-5-101.

B-8

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

Appendix B - List of Signals (continued)

System Information in Control Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)

1

ü

<100>

=

Interrogation command

C_IC_NA_1

ü

<101>

=

Counter interrogation command

C_CI_NA_1

ü

<102>

=

Read command

C_RD_NA_1

ü

<103>

=

Clock synchronization command

ü

<104>

=

Test command

C_TS_NB_1

<105>

=

Reset process command

C_RP_NC_1

<106>

=

Delay acquisition command

C_CD_NA_1

1

C_CS_NA_1

The command procedure is formally processed, but there is no change in the local time in the station.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

B-9

Appendix B - List of Signals (continued)

Parameter in Control Direction (Station-Specific Parameter) ü

<110>

=

Parameter of measured value, normalized value

P_ME_NA_1

ü

<111>

=

Parameter of measured value, scaled value

P_ME_NB_1

<112>

=

Parameter of measured value, short floating point value

P_ME_NC_1

<113>

=

Parameter activation

P_AC_NA_1

File Transfer (Station-Specific Parameter)

B-10

<120>

=

File ready

F_FR_NA_1

<121>

=

Section ready

F_SR_NA_1

<122>

=

Call directory, select file, call file, call section

F_SC_NA_1

<123>

=

Last section, last segment

F_LS_NA_1

<124>

=

Ack file, ack section

F_AF_NA_1

<125>

=

Segment

F_SG_NA_1

<126>

=

Directory

F_DR_TA_1

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

Appendix B - List of Signals (continued)

B 2.1.5 Basic Application Functions Station Initialization (Station-Specific Parameter) ü

Remote initialization

General Interrogation (System- or Station-Specific Parameter) ü

Global

ü

Group 1

ü

Group 7

ü

Group 13

ü

Group 2

ü

Group 8

ü

Group 14

ü

Group 3

ü

Group 9

ü

Group 15

ü

Group 4

ü

Group 10

ü

Group 16

ü

Group 5

ü

Group 11

ü

Group 6

ü

Group 12

Addresses per group have to be defined.

Clock Synchronization (Station-Specific Parameter) ü

Clock synchronization

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

B-11

Appendix B - List of Signals (continued)

Command Transmission (Object-Specific Parameter) ü

Direct command transmission

Select and execute command

Direct set point command transmission

Select and execute set point command

C_SE ACTTERM used ü

No additional definition Short pulse duration (Execution duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation) Long pulse duration (Execution duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation) Persistent output

Transmission of Integrated Totals (Station- or Object-Specific Parameter)

ü

Counter request

ü

General request counter

Counter freeze without reset

ü

Request counter group 1

Counter freeze with reset

ü

Request counter group 2

Counter reset

ü

Request counter group 3

ü

Request counter group 4

Addresses per group have to be specified

B-12

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

Appendix B - List of Signals (continued)

Parameter Loading (Object-Specific Parameter) ü

Threshold value Smoothing factor Low limit for transmission of measured value High limit for transmission of measured value

Parameter Activation (Object-Specific Parameter) Act/deact of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object

File Transfer (Station-Specific Parameter) File transfer in monitor direction]

F_FR_NA_1

File transfer in control direction]

F_FR_NA_1

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

B-13

Appendix B - List of Signals (continued)

B 3 Communication Interface per IEC 60870-5-103 This section incorporates Section 8 of IEC 60870-5-103, including definitions applicable to the PQ 7x2. B 3.1 Interoperability B 3.1.1 Physical Layer B 3.1.1.1 Electrical Interface ü

EIA RS 485

ü

No. of loads

32 for one device

Note: EIA RS 485 defines the loads in such a way that 32 of them can be operated on one line. For detailed information see EIA RS 485, Section 3. B 3.1.1.2 Optical Interface ü

Glass fiber

ü

Plastic fiber

ü

F-SMA connector BFOC/2.5 connector

B 3.1.1.3 Transmission Rate ü

9 600 bit/s

ü

19 200 bit/s

B-14

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

Appendix B - List of Signals (continued)

B 3.1.2 Link Layer There are no selection options for the link layer. B 3.1.3 Application Layer B 3.1.3.1 Transmission Mode for Application Data Mode 1 (least significant octet first) as defined in clause 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4 is used exclusively in this companion standard. B 3.1.3.2 Common Address of ASDU ü

One COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU (identical to the station address) More than one COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU

B 3.1.3.3 Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Monitor Direction B 3.1.3.3.1 System Functions in Monitor Direction INF

Description

ü

<0>

End of general interrogation

ü

<0>

Time synchronization

ü

<2>

Reset FCB

ü

<3>

Reset CU

ü

<4>

Start / restart

<5>

Power on

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

B-15

Appendix B - List of Signals (continued)

B 3.1.3.3.2 Status Indications in Monitor Direction ´

1

Designations as in IEC 60870-5-103 Section 8 INF Semantics

1

Designations as in the Device Address List Address Descriptor

<16>

Auto-recloser active

<17>

Teleprotection active

ü

<18>

Protection active

003 030

MAIN: Protection enabled

ü

<19>

LED reset

021 010

MAIN: Reset indicat.

ü

<20>

Monitor direction blocked

037 075

COMM1: Sig./meas.val.block.

ü

<21>

Test mode

037 071

MAIN: Test mode

<22>

Local parameter setting

ü

<23>

Characteristic 1

036 090

PSS: PS 1 active

ü

<24>

Characteristic 2

036 091

PSS: PS 2 active

ü

<25>

Characteristic 3

036 092

PSS: PS 3 active

ü

<26>

Characteristic 4

036 093

PSS: PS 4 active

ü

<27>

Auxiliary input 1

034 000

LOGIC: Input 1 EXT

ü

<28>

Auxiliary input 2

034 001

LOGIC: Input 2 EXT

ü

<29>

Auxiliary input 3

034 002

LOGIC: Input 3 EXT

ü

<30>

Auxiliary input 4

034 003

LOGIC: Input 4 EXT

Different designations are used, for example, in IEC 60870-5-103 Annex A (phase A rather than L1).

B-16

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

Appendix B - List of Signals (continued)

B 3.1.3.3.3 Monitoring Signals (Supervision Indications) in Monitor Direction Designations as in IEC 60870-5-103 Section 8 INF Semantics

ü

Measurand supervision I

<33>

Measurand supervision V

<35>

Phase sequence supervision

<36>

1

Trip circuit supervision

041 200

SFMON: Relay Kxx faulty

004 061

MAIN: M.c.b. trip V EXT

<37>

I>> back-up operation

<38>

VT fuse failure

<39>

Teleprotection disturbed

ü

<46>

Group warning

036 100

SFMON: Warning (relay)

ü

<47>

Group alarm

004 065

MAIN: Blocked/faulty

ü

1

<32>

Designations as in the Device Address List Address Descriptor

The message content is formed from the OR operation of the individual signals

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

B-17

Appendix B - List of Signals (continued)

B 3.1.3.3.4 Earth Fault Indications in Monitor Direction Designations as in IEC 60870-5-103 Section 8 INF Semantics

1

<48>

Earth fault L1

<49>

Earth fault L2

<50>

Earth fault L3

<51>

Earth fault forward, i.e. line

<52>

Earth fault reverse, i.e. busbar

1

Designations as in the Device Address List Address Descriptor

Different designations are used, for example, in IEC 60870-5-103 Annex A (phase A rather than L1).

B-18

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

Appendix B - List of Signals (continued)

B 3.1.3.3.5 Fault Indications in Monitor Direction Designations as in IEC 60870-5-103 Section 8 INF Semantics

ü

1

<64>

Start /pick-up L1

<65>

Start /pick-up L2

<66>

Start /pick-up L3

<67>

Start /pick-up N

<68>

General trip

<69>

Trip L1

<70>

Trip L2

<71>

Trip L3

<72>

Trip I>> (back-up operation)

<73>

Fault location X in ohms

<74>

Fault forward/line

<75>

Fault reverse/busbar

<76>

Teleprotection signal transmitted

<77>

Teleprotection signal received

<78>

Zone 1

<79>

Zone 2

<80>

Zone 3

<81>

Zone 4

<82>

Zone 5

<83>

Zone 6

1

Designations as in the Device Address List Address Descriptor

036 071

MAIN: Gen. trip command 1

Different designations are used, for example, in IEC 60870-5-103 Annex A (phase A rather than L1).

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

B-19

Appendix B - List of Signals (continued)

Designations as in IEC 60870-5-103 Section 8 INF Semantics ü

<84>

General start/pick-up

<85>

Breaker failure

ü

<86>

ü ü

B-20

1

Designations as in the Device Address List Address Descriptor 036 000

MAIN: General starting

Trip measuring system L1

041 002

DIFF: Trip signal 1

<87>

Trip measuring system L2

041 003

DIFF: Trip signal 2

<88>

Trip measuring system L3

041 004

DIFF: Trip signal 3

<89>

Trip measuring system E

<90>

Trip I>

<91>

Trip I>>

<92>

Trip IN>

<93>

Trip IN>>

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

Appendix B - List of Signals (continued)

B 3.1.3.3.6 Auto-Reclosure Indications in Monitor Direction Designations as in IEC 60870-5-103 Section 8 INF Semantics <128>

CB ‘on’ by AR

<129>

CB ‘on’ by long-time AR

<130>

AR blocked

Designations as in the Device Address List Address Descriptor

B 3.1.3.3.7 Measurands in Monitor Direction Designations as in IEC 60870-5-103 Section 8 INF Semantics <144>

Measurand I

<145>

Measurands I, V

<146>

Measurands I, V, P, Q

<147>

Measurands IN, VEN

<148>

Measurands IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3, P, Q, f

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

Designations as in the Device Address List Address Descriptor

B-21

Appendix B - List of Signals (continued)

B 3.1.3.3.8 Generic Functions in Monitor Direction Designations as in IEC 60870-5-103 Section 8

B-22

INF

Semantics

<240>

Read headings of all defined groups

<241>

Read values or attributes of all entries of one group

<243>

Read directory of a single entry

<244>

Read value or attribute of a single entry

<245>

End of general interrogation of generic data

<249>

Write entry with confirmation

<250>

Write entry with execution

<251>

Write entry aborted

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

Appendix B - List of Signals (continued)

B 3.1.3.4 Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Control Direction B 3.1.3.4.1 System Functions in Control Direction Designations as in IEC 60870-5-103 Section 8 INF

Semantics

ü

<0>

Initiation of general interrogation

ü

<0>

Time synchronization

B 3.1.3.4.2 General Commands in Control Direction Designations as in IEC 60870-5-103 Section 8 INF Semantics

1

<16>

Auto-recloser on/off

<17>

Teleprotection on/off

ü

<18>

Protection on/off

003 030

MAIN: Protection enabled

ü

<19>

LED reset

021 010

MAIN: Reset indicat.

ü

<23>

1

Activate characteristic 1

003 060

PSS: Param.subs.sel.

ü

<24>

2

Activate characteristic 2

003 060

PSS: Param.subs.sel.

ü

<25>

3

Activate characteristic 3

003 060

PSS: Param.subs.sel.

ü

<26>

4

Activate characteristic 4

003 060

PSS: Param.subs.sel.

Switches Switches 3 Switches 4 Switches 2

Designations as in the Device Address List Address Descriptor

PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS:

Select Select Select Select

PS PS PS PS



to "Parameter set 1" to "Parameter set 2" to "Parameter set 3" to "Parameter set 4"

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

B-23

Appendix B - List of Signals (continued)

B 3.1.3.4.3 Generic Functions in Control Direction Designations as in IEC 60870-5-103 Section 8

B-24

INF

Semantics

<240>

Read headings of all defined groups

<241>

Read values or attributes of all entries of one group

<243>

Read directory of a single entry

<244>

Read value or attribute of a single entry

<245>

General interrogation of generic data

<248>

Write entry

<249>

Write entry with confirmation

<250>

Write entry with execution

<251>

Write entry abort

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

Appendix B - List of Signals (continued)

B 3.1.3.5 Basic Application Functions ü

Test mode

ü

Blocking of monitor direction

ü

Disturbance data Generic services

ü

Private data

B 3.1.3.6 Miscellaneous Measured values are transmitted both with ASDU 3 and ASDU 9. As defined in Sec. 7.2.6.8, the maximum MVAL can be either 1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value. In ASDU 3 and ASDU 9, different ratings may not be used; in other words, there is only one choice for each measurand. Measurand

Measured value

Designations as in IEC 60870-5-103 Section 81

Designations as in the Device Address List

Max. MVAL = nom. value multiplied by

1.2

1

Current L1

Current A

Current L2

Current B

Current L3

Current C

Voltage L1-E

Voltage A-G

Voltage L2-E

Voltage B-G

Voltage L3-E

Voltage C-G

Active power P

Active power P

Reactive power Q

Reactive power Q

Frequency f

Frequency f

Voltage L1-L2

Voltage A-B

or

2.4

IEC 60870-5-103 Annex also uses phase A rather than L1.

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

B-25

B-26

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06660 EN

Appendix C - Terminal Connection Diagrams

C 1 Terminal Connection Diagrams P631 in Case 40 T

C-1

Terminal connection diagram P631 in case 40 T, diagram P631.401, (part 1 of 3)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

C-1

Appendix C - Terminal Connection Diagrams (continued)

C-2

C-2

Terminal connection diagram for P631, case 40 T, diagram P631.401 part 2 of 3 P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

Appendix C - Terminal Connection Diagrams (continued)

C-3

Terminal connection diagram for P631, case 40 T, diagram P631.401 part 3 of 3

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

C-3

Appendix C - Terminal Connection Diagrams (continued)

C 2 Terminal Connection Diagrams P632 in Case 40 T

C-4

C-4

Terminal connection diagram P632 in case 40 T, diagram P632.401, (part 1 of 5) P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

Appendix C - Terminal Connection Diagrams (continued)

C-5

Terminal connection diagram P632 in case 40 T, diagram P632.401, (part 2 of 5)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

C-5

Appendix C - Terminal Connection Diagrams (continued)

C-6

C-6

Terminal connection diagram P632 in case 40 T, diagram P632.401, (part 3 of 5) P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

Appendix C - Terminal Connection Diagrams (continued)

C-7

Terminal connection diagram P632 in case 40 T, diagram P632.401, (part 4 of 5)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

C-7

Appendix C - Terminal Connection Diagrams (continued)

C-8

C-8

Terminal connection diagram P632 in case 40 T, diagram P632.401, (part 5 of 5) P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

Appendix C - Terminal Connection Diagrams (continued)

C 3 Terminal Connection Diagrams P633 T C 3.1 Case 40 T

C-9

Terminal connection diagram P633 in case 40 T, diagram P633.401, (part 1 of 4)

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

C-9

Appendix C - Terminal Connection Diagrams (continued)

C-10 Terminal connection diagram P633 in case 40 T, diagram P633.401, (part 2 of 4)

C-10

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

Appendix C - Terminal Connection Diagrams (continued)

C-11 Terminal connection diagram P633 in case 40 T, diagram P633.401, (part 3 of 4) P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

C-11

Appendix C - Terminal Connection Diagrams (continued)

C-12 Terminal connection diagram P633 in case 40 T, diagram P633.401, (part 4 of 4)

C-12

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

Appendix C - Terminal Connection Diagrams (continued)

C 3.2 Case 84 T

C-13 Terminal connection diagram P633 in case 84 T, diagram P633.402, (part 1 of 6) P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

C-13

Appendix C - Terminal Connection Diagrams (continued)

C-14 Terminal connection diagram P633 in case 84 T, diagram P633.402, (part 2 of 6)

C-14

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

Appendix C - Terminal Connection Diagrams (continued)

C-15 Terminal connection diagram P633 in case 84 T, diagram P633.402, (part 3 of 6) P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

C-15

Appendix C - Terminal Connection Diagrams (continued)

C-16 Terminal connection diagram P633 in case 84 T, diagram P633.402, (part 4 of 6)

C-16

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

Appendix C - Terminal Connection Diagrams (continued)

C-17 Terminal connection diagram P633 in case 84 T, diagram P633.402, (part 5 of 6) P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

C-17

Appendix C - Terminal Connection Diagrams (continued)

C-18 Terminal connection diagram P633 in case 84 T, diagram P633.402, (part 6 of 6)

C-18

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

Appendix C - Terminal Connection Diagrams (continued)

C 4 Terminal Connection Diagrams P634 in Case 84 T

C-19 Terminal connection diagram P634 in case 84 T, diagram P634.401, (part 1 of 6) P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

C-19

Appendix C - Terminal Connection Diagrams (continued)

C-20 Terminal connection diagram P634 in case 84 T, diagram P634.401, (part 2 of 6)

C-20

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

Appendix C - Terminal Connection Diagrams (continued)

C-21 Terminal connection diagram P634 in case 84 T, diagram P634.401, (part 3 of 6) P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

C-21

Appendix C - Terminal Connection Diagrams (continued)

C-22 Terminal connection diagram P634 in case 84 T, diagram P634.401, (part 4 of 6)

C-22

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

Appendix C - Terminal Connection Diagrams (continued)

C-23 Terminal connection diagram P634 in case 84 T, diagram P634.401, (part 5 of 6) P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

C-23

Appendix C - Terminal Connection Diagrams (continued)

C-24 Terminal connection diagram P634 in case 84 T, diagram P634.401, (part 6 of 6)

C-24

P631-301-401-601 // P632-301-401-601 // P633-301-401-601 // P634-301-401-601 / AFSV.12.06661 EN

Your Region :

NORTH AMERICA Tel.: +1 (610) 997 5100 +1 (450) 923 7084 CENTRAL AMERICA Tel.: +52 (55) 1101 1038 SOUTH AMERICA Tel.: +55 (0) 11 3491 7240 BRITISH ISLES Tel.: +44 (0) 1785 77 24 06 Tel.: +33 (0)4 67 20 55 76 MEDITERRANEAN & AFRICA Tel.: +33 (0) 4 67 20 55 41 SOUTH EAST AFRICA Tel.: +27 (011) 820 5037 NORTHERN & CENTRAL EUROPE Tel.: +49 69 6632 3333 NEAR & MIDDLE EAST Tel.: +971 6 556 0559 INDIA Tel: +91 44 2264 0888 NORTH EAST & SOUTH EAST ASIA Tel.: +65 6843 3133 CHINA Tel.: +86 21 58 12 8822 PACIFIC Tel.: +61 (2) 96 45 07 33

Publication: P63X/EN M/C11 (AFSV.12.06661 EN)

TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION

Energy Automation & Information www.areva.com

[email protected]

MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection P631 P632 P633 P634

-302 -302 -302 -302

-401/402 -401/402 -401/402/403 -401/402

-602 -602 -602 -602

Software Upgrade -602 P63X/EN AD/B22 (AFSV.12.09171 EN)

List of Contents

1

Overview – Changes in Software Version -602

U-4

2 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2

(Function Group PC) (Function Group COMM1)

U-5 U-5 U-5 U-7

(Function Group COMM2)

U-16

(Function Group MEASI) (Function Group MAIN)

U-19 U-20 U-20

2.4 2.5

Functional Details Serial Interfaces PC Interface "Logical" Communication Interface 1 "Logical" Communication Interface 2 Measured Data Input Main Functions Conditioning the Measured Variables Assignment of "Logical" Communication Interfaces to Physical Communication Channels Multiple Signaling of the Measuring-Circuit Monitoring Function Differential Protection Thermal Overload Protection

2.6

Measuring-Circuit Monitoring

2.7 2.8

Overfluxing Protection Programmable Logic

2.1.3 2.2 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 DE

U-24 U-25 (Function Group DIFF) (Function Groups THRM_1 and THRM_2) (Function Groups MCM_1 to MCM_4) (Function Group V/f) (Function Group LOGIC)

U-25 U-27 U-29 U-31 U-39

U-3

Software Upgrade -602

In software version -602, several new features have been added to the P63x functions. These will now be described with reference to the P631 / P632 / P633 / P634 manual with print number AFSV.12.06661 EN. In addition to the software changes, the following new order options have become available: ¨

Designs with ring-terminal connection

¨

Rapid-response output module with 4 thyristors

Two options (with or without angle brackets) are offered for flush mounting. The dimensional drawings and required cutouts are shown in the ing Documents packed with the devices as are the location and terminal connection diagrams. 1 Overview – Changes in Software Version -602 Hardware

Connection Plans

Software

-302

-401/402/403 -602

New Features PC:

Selection of spontaneous signals. Timeout setting.

COMM1:

Additional interface protocol: ”COURIER“. Selection and testing of spontaneous signals for the interface protocols according to IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-101 and ILS-C.

COMM2:

"Logical" Communication Interface 2.

MEASI:

Display of the temperature as per-unit value.

MAIN:

Separate setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for measurement of phase currents and residual currents. Assignment of the "logical" communication interfaces COMM1 and COMM2 to the communication channels of module A. Grouping of the signals of measuring-circuit monitoring to form a multiple signal.

DIFF:

Signals DIFF: ID>> tr igger ed and DIFF: Id>>> tr igger ed.

THRM1 and THRM2: Modified texts for some of the settings. Per-unit measured values. Signal T HRMx : Not r eady. MCM_1 to MCM_4: Measuring-circuit monitoring functions now available.

U-4

V/f:

Overfluxing protection function now available.

LOGIC:

Number of binary input signals LO G IC: Input n EX T increased from 16 to 40.

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

Software Upgrade -602 (continued)

2 Functional Details 2.1 Serial Interfaces The P63x has a PC interface as a standard component. Communication module A is optional and can have one or two communication channels – depending on the design version. Communication between the P63x and the control station’s computer is through communication module A. Setting and readout are possible through all P63x interfaces. If the communication module A with two communication channels is installed, settings for two "logical" communication interfaces will be available. The settings for "logical" communication interface 1 (COMM1) can be assigned to physical communication channels 1 or 2 (see section entitled 'Main Functions'). If the COMM1 settings have been assigned to communication channel 2, then this means that the settings for "logical" communication interface 2 (COMM2) will automatically be active for communication channel 1. Communication with the P63x via communication channel 2 is only possible when the PC interface is inactive. As soon as communication occurs through the PC interface, communication channel 2 is "dead". Channel 2 will then be re-enabled once the PC interface Timeout has elapsed. If tests are run on the P63x, the is advised to activate the test mode so that the PC or the control system will evaluate all incoming signals accordingly (see section entitled "Main Functions"). 2.1.1 PC Interface (Function Group PC) Communication between the device and a PC is through the PC interface. In order for data transfer between the P63x and the PC to function, several settings must be made in the P63x. An operating program is available as an accessory for P63x control (see Chapter 13).

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

U-5

Software Upgrade -602 (continued)

U-1

U-6

PC interface settings

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

Software Upgrade -602 (continued)

2.1.2 "Logical" Communication Interface 1 (Function Group COMM1) Depending on the design version of communication module A (see Technical Data), several interface protocols are available. The protocol as per IEC 60870-5-103 is ed for all versions. The following -selected interface protocols are available for use with the P63x: ¨

IEC 60870-5-103, “Transmission protocols - Companion standard for the informative interface of protection equipment,’ first edition, 1997-12 (corresponds to VDEW / ZVEI Recommendation, “Protection communication companion standard 1, compatibility level 2,” February 1995 edition) with additions covering control and monitoring

¨

IEC 870-5-101, “Telecontrol equipment and systems - Part 5: Transmission protocols - Section 101 Companion standard for basic telecontrol tasks,” first edition 1995-11

¨

ILS-C, internal protocol of AREVA

¨

MODBUS

¨

DNP 3.0

¨

COURIER

In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in the P63x. The communication interface can be blocked through a binary signal input. In addition, a signal or measured-data block can also be imposed through a binary signal input.

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

U-7

Software Upgrade -602 (continued)

U-2

U-8

"Logical" Communication Interface 1: selecting the interface protocol

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

Software Upgrade -602 (continued)

U-3

"Logical" communication interface 1: settings for the IEC 60870-5-103 interface protocol

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

U-9

Software Upgrade -602 (continued)

U-4

U-10

"Logical" communication interface 1: settings for the IEC 870-5-101 interface protocol

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

Software Upgrade -602 (continued)

U-5

"Logical" communication interface 1: settings for the ILS_C interface protocol

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

U-11

Software Upgrade -602 (continued)

U-6

U-12

"Logical" communication interface 1: settings for the MODBUS protocol

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

Software Upgrade -602 (continued)

U-7

"Logical" communication interface 1: settings for DNP 3.0

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

U-13

Software Upgrade -602 (continued)

U-8

U-14

"Logical" communication interface 1: settings for COURIER

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

Software Upgrade -602 (continued)

Checking spontaneous signaling For interface protocols per IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101 or ILS-C, there is the option of selecting a signal for testing purposes. This transmission of this signal to the control station as ‘sig. start‘ or ‘sig. end‘ can then be triggered via the local control .

U-9

Checking spontaneous signaling

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

U-15

Software Upgrade -602 (continued)

2.1.3 "Logical" Communication Interface 2 (Function Group COMM2) "Logical" communication interface 2 s the IEC 60870-5-103 interface protocol. In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in the P63x.

U-16

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

Software Upgrade -602 (continued)

U-10

Settings for "logical" communication interface 2

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

U-17

Software Upgrade -602 (continued)

Checking spontaneous signaling There is the option of selecting a signal for testing purposes. This transmission of this signal to the control station as ‘sig. start‘ or ‘sig. end‘ can then be triggered via the local control .

U-11

U-18

Checking spontaneous signaling

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

Software Upgrade -602 (continued)

2.2 Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI) Display of the temperature as per-unit value is now available.

U-12

Figure in the –601 Manual:

Replace by Figure:

3-19

U-12

Temperature measurement using a resistance thermometer

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

U-19

Software Upgrade -602 (continued)

2.3 Main Functions (Function Group MAIN) 2.3.1 Conditioning the Measured Variables The secondary nominal current of the system transformer is now set separately for the measurement of phase currents and residual currents.

U-20

Figure in the –601 Manual:

Replace by Figure:

3-29

U-13

3-30a

U-14

3-30b

U-15

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

Software Upgrade -602 (continued)

U-13

Connection of the measured variables to the P63x, connection of the fourth current transformer set to the transformers of the neutral-point-to-ground connections

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

U-21

Software Upgrade -602 (continued)

U-14

U-22

Connection of the measured variables to the P63x, looping of the fourth current transformer set into the ground connections of the phase current transformers, Part 1 of 2

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

Software Upgrade -602 (continued)

U-15

Connection of the measured variables to the P63x, looping of the fourth current transformer set into the ground connections of the phase current transformers, Part 1 of 2

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

U-23

Software Upgrade -602 (continued)

2.3.2

Assignment of "Logical" Communication Interfaces to Physical Communication Channels

There are one or two communication channels available, depending on the design version of communication module A (see section entitled "Technical Data"). The "logical" communication interfaces COMM1 and COMM2 can be assigned to these physical communication channels. If "logical" communication interface COMM1 is assigned to communication channel 2, then this means that the settings for "logical" communication interface 2 (COMM2) will automatically be active for communication channel 1. Communication with the P139 via communication channel 2 is only possible when the PC interface is inactive. As soon as communication occurs through the PC interface, communication channel 2 is "dead". Channel 2 will then be re-enabled once the PC interface Timeout has elapsed.

U-16

U-24

Assignment of "logical" communication interfaces to physical communication channels

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

Software Upgrade -602 (continued)

2.3.3

Multiple Signaling of the Measuring-Circuit Monitoring Function

The signals of the measuring-circuit monitoring function are grouped to form a multiple signal.

U-17

Signals of the measuring-circuit monitoring function

2.4 Differential Protection The signals DIF F: ID>> tr igger ed and DIFF: Id>>> tr igger ed have been added. Figure in the –601 Manual :

Replace by Figure

3-78

U-18

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

U-25

Software Upgrade -602 (continued)

U-18

U-26

Measuring system of the P63x

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

Software Upgrade -602 (continued)

2.5 Thermal Overload Protection (Function Groups THRM_1 and THRM_2) The signals T HRM1: Not r eady and T HRM2: Not r eady have been added.

U-19

Readiness of the thermal overload protection function

Texts for some of the settings have been rephrased. Per-unit measured values are now available for the thermal replica status, the object temperature and the coolant temperature. Figure in the –601 Manual :

Replace by Figure:

3-111

U-20

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

U-27

Software Upgrade -602 (continued)

U-20

U-28

Thermal overload protection P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

Software Upgrade -602 (continued)

2.6 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring (Function Groups MCM_1 to MCM_4) The measuring-circuit monitoring function of the P63x can detect faults in the secondary circuits of the current transformers. The measuring-circuit monitoring functions MCM_1, MCM_2, MCM_3 and MCM_4 are permanently assigned to the transformer ends monitored by the P63x. Function group MCM_1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of the MCM_x protection functions. Function groups MCM_2 to MCM_4 are equivalent. Enabling or disabling measuring-circuit monitoring The measuring-circuit monitoring function can be disabled or enabled from the local control . Moreover, enabling can be done separately for each parameter subset.

U-21

Enabling or disabling measuring-circuit monitoring.

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

U-29

Software Upgrade -602 (continued)

Measuring-circuit monitoring The ratio of negative- to positive-sequence current is used as the criterion for measuringcircuit monitoring. The measuring-circuit monitoring function is triggered if the set ratio Ineg / Ipos is exceeded and either the negative- or the positive-sequence current exceeds 0.02 Inom. After the set operate delay period has elapsed, a warning signal is issued.

U-22

U-30

Measuring-circuit monitoring for end a

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

Software Upgrade –602 (continued)

2.7 Overfluxing Protection (Function Group V/f) The overfluxing protection function detects an inissibly high induction B in the iron core of transformers as caused by a voltage increase and/or a frequency decrease. Enabling or disabling the overfluxing protection function The overfluxing protection function can be disabled or enabled from the local control . Moreover, enabling can be done separately for each parameter subset.

U-23

Enabling or disabling the overfluxing protection function

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

U-31

Software Upgrade –602 (continued)

Conditioning the measured variable Overfluxing protection evaluates the ratio V/f of voltage to frequency referred to nominal values. This ratio is proportional to the induction in the iron core of a transformer. The overfluxing measurement is not enabled unless the voltage and frequency are within the limits for issible values.

U-24

U-32

Conditioning the measured variable

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

Software Upgrade –602 (continued)

Fixed-time warning stage The overfluxing value V/f is monitored to determine whether it exceeds a set threshold. If the overfluxing value is found to exceed the threshold, a timer stage is triggered. Once this stage has elapsed, a signal is issued.

U-25

Warning stage

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

U-33

Software Upgrade –602 (continued)

Fixed-time tripping stage The overfluxing value V/f is monitored to determine whether it exceeds a set threshold. If the overfluxing value is found to exceed the threshold, a timer stage is triggered. Once this stage has elapsed, a signal is issued.

U-26

U-34

Fixed-time tripping stage

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

Software Upgrade –602 (continued)

Variable-time tripping stage The overfluxing value V/f is monitored to determine whether it exceeds a set threshold. If the overfluxing value is found to exceed the threshold, the P63x determines the tripping time as a function of the overfluxing value and the set characteristic. The variable-time tripping characteristic is set by defining 12 pairs of overfluxing value and associated tripping time value. Intermediate values are obtained by interpolation. The setting of the characteristic is checked for plausibility with respect to a monotone descending characteristic. For values of V/f > 1.6, the tripping time is limited to the value set for V/f = 1.6. Figure U-27 shows the characteristic as calculated with the P63x default values.

100

t/s 10

1

1.00

1.10

1.20

1.30

1.40

1.50

1.60

1.70

1.80

1.90

2.00

V/f U-27

Example for a tripping characteristic (default setting)

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

U-35

Software Upgrade –602 (continued)

After a starting, the elapsed starting time is accumulated in a buffer. If the starting drops out, the buffer memory will be discharged. The discharge gradient is determined by the set cooling time. If there is another starting, the buffer memory will be recharged. If the accumulated starting time reaches the tripping time determined by the P63x then the trip signal is issued. Figure U-28 shows the buffer content during an interrupted starting. In case A, the tripping time determined by the P63x is not reached by the accumulated starting time. In case B, on the other hand, a trip signal results.

U-28

U-36

Change of buffer content during an interrupted starting

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

Software Upgrade –602 (continued)

U-29

Variable-time tripping stage

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

U-37

Software Upgrade –602 (continued)

U-30

U-38

Resetting of the thermal replica

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

Software Upgrade -602 (continued)

2.8 Programmable Logic (Function Group LOGIC) Depending on the P63x design version, up to 40 binary inputs are provided. Accordingly, the number of binary input signals LO G IC: Input n EX T has been increased from 16 to 40.

P631-302-401/402-602 // P632-302-401/402-602 // P633-302-401/402/403-602 // P634-302-401/402-602 / AFSV.12.09171 EN

U-39

Publication: P63X/EN AD/B22 (AFSV.12.09171 EN)

TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION

Energy Automation & Information www.areva.com

[email protected]

MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection P631 P632 P633 P634

-302 -302 -302 -302

-401/402 -401/402 -401/402/403 -401/402

-603 -603 -603 -603

Software Upgrade -603 P63X/EN AD/C32 (AFSV.12.09271 EN)

Software Upgrade -603

In the new version of P63x several new features and changes on existing features have been added. These are described with reference to the documentation listed below. References SW Release

Version

Documentation

15.01.2001

P631-301-401-601 P632-301-401-601 P633-301-401/402-601 P634-301-401-601

Manual AFSV.12.06661 EN

25.01.2002

P631-302-401/402-602 P632-302-401/402-602 P633-302-401/402/403-602 P634-302-401/402-602

Upgrade Documentation AFSV.12.09171 EN

P631-302-401/402-603 // P632-302-401/402-603 // P633-302-401/402/403-603 // P634-302-401/402-603 / AFSV.12.09271 EN

U-3

Software Upgrade -603 (continued)

1 Overview Version

Changes

P631-302-401/402-602-705 Hardware P632-302-401/402-602-705 P633-302-401/402/403-602-705 Diagram P634-302-401/402-602-705

No changes No changes

Software

Release: 19.04.2002

DVICE

P631-302-401/402-602-706 Hardware P632-302-401/402-602-706 P633-302-401/402/403-602-706 Diagram P634-302-401/402-603-706

Bug fixing: The device was blocked after power-up if either V<> or f<> was enabled, due to erroneous hardware self-identification. No changes No changes

Software

Release: 06.06.2002

P631-302-401/402-603 P632-302-401/402-603 P633-302-401/402/403-603 P634-302-401/402-603 Release: 27.11.2002

LOC

Bug fixing: Some cyrillic characters were displayed in a wrong way. This bug affected nd only the 2 language character set of language variant -805.

Hardware

No changes

Diagram

No changes

Software DVICE

Bug fixing: A device ID for the entry of an order extension number was missing.

DIFF

Amplitude matching factor restrictions are relaxed. Zero sequence current filtering for odd vector group IDs is improved. Setting ranges of the tripping characteristic and of the unrestrained differential element are extended. The hysteresis of the tripping characteristic can now be disabled. Definite-time trip delay is available.

REF_1 REF_2 REF_3

Amplitude matching factor restrictions are relaxed. Two new operating modes are available. One of them provides high impedance measuring principle. Setting range of the unrestrained differential element is extended. New tripping signals are provided for the application of low impedance REF on autotransformers.

U-4

IDMT1 IDMT2 IDMT3

Accuracy of tripping time is improved. Particularly the characteristic ‚IEC extremly inverse‘ is now within the claimed tolerance range.

f<>

New measured fault data: In the event of underfrequency the minimum frequency is acquired and in the event of overfrequency the maximum frequency is acquired.

V/f

Setting range of V/f>> is extended.

P631-302-401/402-603 // P632-302-401/402-603 // P633-302-401/402/403-603 // P634-302-401/402-603 / AFSV.12.09271 EN

Software Upgrade -603 (continued)

2 Functional Details 2.1 Device (Function Group DVICE) The following device ID is now available: Address Description

Range of Values

000 018

0 … 999

DVICE: Order ext. No. 16

Unit

2.2 Differential Protection (Function Group DIFF) Amplitude matching Amplitude matching factor restrictions are relaxed as follows: o

o

o

k amp,z ≤ 16 (instead of k amp,z ≤ 5 )

k amp,max k amp,max −1

≤ 3 is no longer used

k amp,max −1 ≥ 0.5 (instead of k amp,max −1 ≥ 0.7 )

Zero sequence current filtering For odd-numbered vector groups it is favourable in order to increase sensitivity to add the residual current of the line CTs if there is no grounding within the protected zone of a given winding.

Iamp,zero,z =

(

1 ⋅I +I +I 3 amp,A,z amp,B,z amp,C,z

)

P631-302-401/402-603 // P632-302-401/402-603 // P633-302-401/402/403-603 // P634-302-401/402-603 / AFSV.12.09271 EN

U-5

Software Upgrade -603 (continued)

With respect to zero-sequence current filtering in case of odd-numbered vector groups P63x devices now distinguish as follows: Vector Group

With Izero Filtering

1

Ivec ,y,z =

3

Ivec,y,z =

5

Ivec ,y,z =

7

Ivec,y,z =

9

Ivec,y,z =

11

Ivec,y,z =

1 3 1 3 1 3

1 3 1 3 1 3

Without Izero Filtering

⋅ Iamp,x,z − Iamp,x +1,z

(

)

Ivec ,y,z =

(

)

Ivec,y,z =

(

)

Ivec ,y,z =

⋅ Iamp,x +1,z − Iamp,x,z

(

)

Ivec,y,z =

(

)

Ivec,y,z =

(

)

Ivec,y,z =

⋅ Iamp,x −1,z − Iamp,x +1,z ⋅ Iamp,x −1,z − Iamp,x,z

⋅ Iamp,x +1,z − Iamp,x −1,z ⋅ Iamp,x,z − Iamp,x −1,z

1 3 1 3 1 3

1 3 1 3 1 3

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

⋅ Iamp,x,z − Iamp,x +1,z + Iamp,zero,z ⋅ Iamp,x −1,z − Iamp,x +1,z + Iamp,zero,z ⋅ Iamp,x −1,z − Iamp,x,z + Iamp,zero,z

⋅ Iamp,x +1,z − Iamp,x,z + Iamp,zero,z ⋅ Iamp,x +1,z − Iamp,x −1,z + Iamp,zero,z ⋅ Iamp,x,z − Iamp,x −1,z + Iamp,zero,z

Tripping characteristic

The setting ranges of the tripping characteristic are extended as follows: Address Description

Range of Values

Unit

PSx

2.5 … 15.0 … 30.0

Iref

PSx

0.15 … 0.30 … 1.50

PS1

PS2

PS3

PS4

072 143

073 143

074 143

075 143

DIFF: Idiff>>

072 145

073 145

074 145

075 145

DIFF: m1

072 146

073 146

074 146

075 146

DIFF: m2

PSx

0.15 … 0.70 … 1.50

Unrestrained differential element

The setting range of the unrestrained differential element is extended as follows: Address Description PS1

PS2

PS3

PS4

072 144

073 144

074 144

075 144

DIFF: Idiff>>>

PSx

Range of Values

Unit

2.5 … 30.0 / Blocked

Iref

Hysteresis of the tripping characteristic

The hysteresis of the tripping characteristic at the rate of 10 % can now be disabled: Address Description

U-6

PS1

PS2

PS3

PS4

072 006

073 006

074 006

075 006

DIFF: Hyst. effective PSx

Range of Values

Unit

No / Yes

P631-302-401/402-603 // P632-302-401/402-603 // P633-302-401/402/403-603 // P634-302-401/402-603 / AFSV.12.09271 EN

Software Upgrade -603 (continued)

Delayed tripping

Tripping of the restraint differential protection may be delayed via a settable timer stage: Address Description PS1

PS2

PS3

PS4

010 162

010 163

010 164

010 165

DIFF: Op.del., trip sig.PSx

Range of Values

Unit

0.00 … 100.00

s

As the trip signal may be delayed an additional instantaneuos starting signal is provided: Address Description

Range of Values

041 106

No / Yes

DIFF: Starting

The new signal ‚DIFF: Starting‘ (address 041 106) is now linked to the signal ‚MAIN: General starting‘ (address 036 000) instead of ‚DIFF: Trip signal‘ (address 041 075) (please refer to figure 3-47 of the -601 manual).

2.3 Ground Differential Protection (Function Groups REF_1, REF_2, REF_3) Amplitude matching

Amplitude matching factor restrictions are relaxed as follows: o

k amp,P ≤ 16 (instead of k amp,P ≤ 5 ) and k amp,Y ≤ 16 (instead of k amp,Y ≤ 5 )

o

k amp,max k amp,max −1

≤ 3 is no longer used

Two new operating modes

A new parameter offers the choice of three different operating modes: Address Description

Range of Values

PS1

PS2

PS3

PS4

072 149

073 149

074 149

075 149

REF_1: Operating mode

PSx

Low imped. / sum(IP) Low imped. / IP,max High impedance

072 169

073 169

074 169

075 169

REF_2: Operating mode

PSx

Low imped. / sum(IP) Low imped. / IP,max High impedance

072 049

073 049

074 049

075 049

REF_3: Operating mode

PSx

Low imped. / sum(IP) Low imped. / IP,max High impedance

Unit

Operation mode ‚Low imped. / sum(IP)‘ is the existing low impedance ground differential protection (please refer to chapter 3.21 of the -601 manual).

P631-302-401/402-603 // P632-302-401/402-603 // P633-302-401/402/403-603 // P634-302-401/402-603 / AFSV.12.09271 EN

U-7

Software Upgrade -603 (continued)

Operating mode ‚Low imped. / IP,max‘: Using this operating mode differential current Id and restraining current IR are defined as follows:

Id = k amp,P ⋅ Σ{IA ,IB ,IC } + k amp,Y ⋅ IY IR =

(

{

}

1 ⋅ k amp,P ⋅ max IA , IB , IC + k amp,Y ⋅ IY 2

)

Regarding the definition of restraining current IR a dual slope characteristic is applicable in comparison with operating mode ‚Low imped. / sum(IP)‘ (please refer to figure 2-1). The characteristic allows the to apply tripping test by shorting a phase current (for simulation of residual current) without the need of star point current IY.

Id/Iref 2

Fault current characteristic for single-end, single-phase infeed

1.5 m2 1

0.5

m1

Idiff>

IR,m2 0.5

2-1

U-8

1

1.5

2

IR/Iref

Tripping characteristic of ground differential protection

P631-302-401/402-603 // P632-302-401/402-603 // P633-302-401/402/403-603 // P634-302-401/402-603 / AFSV.12.09271 EN

Software Upgrade -603 (continued)

In addition to the already existing parameter Idiff> for the setting of the basic sensitivity the operating mode ‚Low imped. / IP,max‘ provides the following further parameters for adjusting the tripping characteristic: Address Description

Range of Values

PS1

PS2

PS3

PS4

072 162

073 162

074 162

075 162

REF_1: m1

PSx

0.00 … 0.20 … 1.00

072 163

073 163

074 163

075 163

REF_1: m2

PSx

0.15 … 1.50

072 164

073 164

074 164

075 164

REF_1: IR,m2

PSx

0.10 … 1.00 … 1.50

072 172

073 172

074 172

075 172

REF_2: m1

PSx

0.00 … 0.20 … 1.00

072 165

073 165

074 165

075 165

REF_2: m2

PSx

0.15 … 1.50

072 166

073 166

074 166

075 166

REF_2: IR,m2

PSx

0.10 … 1.00 … 1.50

072 192

073 192

074 192

075 192

REF_3: m1

PSx

0.00 … 0.20 … 1.00

072 193

073 193

074 193

075 193

REF_3: m2

PSx

0.15 … 1.50

072 194

073 194

074 194

075 194

REF_3: IR,m2

PSx

0.10 … 1.00 … 1.50

Unit

Iref

Iref

Iref

Operating mode ‚High impedance‘: This operating mode offers ground differential protection protection using the high impedance measuring principle. Sensitivity may be set via the already existing parameter Idiff>. Unrestrained differential element

The setting range of the unrestrained differential element is extended as follows: Address Description PS1

PS2

PS3

PS4

072 151

073 151

074 151

075 151

REF_1: Idiff>>>

072 171

073 171

074 171

075 171

REF_2: Idiff>>>

072 041

073 041

074 041

075 041

REF_3: Idiff>>>

Range of Values

Unit

PSx

2.5 … 10.0 … 30.0 / Blocked

Iref

PSx

2.5 … 10.0 … 30.0 / Blocked

Iref

PSx

2.5 … 10.0 … 30.0 / Blocked

Iref

New trip signals

For applications on autotransformers the following new trip signals are available: Address Description

Range of Values

036 174

MAIN: Trip sig.REF1 & REF2

No / Yes

036 175

MAIN: Trip sig.REF2 & REF3

No / Yes

036 176

MAIN: Trip sig.REF1 & REF3

No / Yes

P631-302-401/402-603 // P632-302-401/402-603 // P633-302-401/402/403-603 // P634-302-401/402-603 / AFSV.12.09271 EN

Unit

U-9

Software Upgrade -603 (continued)

2.4 Over-/Underfrequency Protection (Function Group f<>) fmin/fmax acquisition

In the event of underfrequency the minimum frequency is acquired and in the event of overfrequency the maximum frequency is acquired: Address Description

Range of Values

Unit

005 001

f<>: Min. frequ. for f<

12.00 … 70.00 / Not measured

Hz

005 002

f<>: Max. frequ. for f>

12.00 … 70.00 / Not measured

Hz

At the beginning of a new over- or underfrequency event both measured data are reset automatically. The data may be reset manually too: Address Description

Range of Values

003 080

don‘t execute / execute

f<>: Reset meas.val.

2.5 Overfluxing Protection (Function Group V/f)

The setting range of V/f>> stage is extended as follows: Address Description

U-10

PS1

PS2

PS3

PS4

081 213

082 213

083 213

084 213

V/f: V/f>>

PSx

Range of Values

Unit

1.05 … 1.60 / Blocked

Vnom/fnom

P631-302-401/402-603 // P632-302-401/402-603 // P633-302-401/402/403-603 // P634-302-401/402-603 / AFSV.12.09271 EN

Publication: P63X/EN AD/C32 (AFSV.12.09271 EN)

TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION

Energy Automation & Information www.areva.com

[email protected]

MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Device Version Version Version Version

P631 P632 P633 P634

-303 -303 -303 -303

-403/404 -403/404 -404/405/406 -403/404

-605 -605 -605 -605

Upgrade Documentation P63X/EN AD/A43 (AFSV.12.09600.D)

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Documentation

Function extensions and function changes, described in this upgrade documentation, have been added to the transformer protection devices P631, P632, P633 and P634. The following documentation is cross-referenced: References Released

Version

Documentation

15.01.2001

P631-301-401-601 P632-301-401-601 P633-301-401/402-601 P634-301-401-601

Technical manual AFSV.12.06660 EN

25.01.2002

P631-302-401/402-602 P632-302-401/402-602 P633-302-401/402/403-602 P634-302-401/402-602

Upgrade Documentation AFSV.12.09170 EN

27.11.2002

P631-302-401/402-603 P632-302-401/402-603 P633-302-401/402/403-603 P634-302-401/402-603

Upgrade Documentation AFSV.12.09271 EN

P63X/EN AD/A43 // AFSV.12.09600 D /// P631-303-403/404-605 // P632-303-403/404-605 // P633-303-404/405/406-605 // P634-303-403/404-605

U-3

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Documentation (continued)

1

Overview

Version

Changes

P634-303-403/404-604

This version is project-specific and only available on request!

Release: 09.10.2003

There is no software version –604 available for the devices P631, P632, P633! Hardware

The Ethernet communication module is available.

Diagram

The new connection diagrams include the Ethernet communication module interfaces: ! !

P634.403 (for 84TE case, pin terminal connection) P634.404 (for 84TE case, ring terminal connection)

Software P631-303-403/404-605 P632-303-403/404-605 P633-303-404/405/406-605 P634-303-403/404-605

UCA2

Initial implementation of the UCA2 communication protocol.

Hardware

The new hardware variants now offer, per ordering option, additional operate thresholds for the binary signal inputs: >18 V (standard variant) (no order ext. No.) (Order ext. No. 461) >90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V) >155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220..0.250 V) (Order ext. No. 462) Installation of the standard variant is generally recommended if the application does not specifically require such binary signal inputs with higher operate thresholds.

Release: 30.04.2004

The Ethernet communication module interface is now also available for the P631, P632 and P633. Diagram

The new connection diagrams include the Ethernet communication module interfaces: ! !

P631.403 (for 40TE case, pin terminal connection) P631.404 (for 40TE case, ring terminal connection)

! !

P632.403 (for 40TE case, pin terminal connection) P632.404 (for 84TE case, ring terminal connection)

! ! !

P633.404 (for 40TE case, pin terminal connection) P633.405 (for 84TE case, pin terminal connection) P633.406 (for 84TE case, ring terminal connection)

Software UCA2

Implementation of the UCA2 communication protocol in the P631, P632 and P633. Extension to all 4 devices of the expanded spontaneous signaling range initially implemented in the P634-604. In addition, GOOSE messages and fault transmission are now ed.

DIFF

U-4

The saturation discriminator was further improved.

P63X/EN AD/A43 // AFSV.12.09600 D /// P631-303-403/404-605 // P632-303-403/404-605 // P633-303-404/405/406-605 // P634-303-403/404-605

Publication: P63X/EN AD/A43 AREVA T&D's Automation & Information Systems Business www.areva-td.com T&D Worldwide Centre online 24 hours a day: +44 (0) 1785 25 00 70 http://www.areva-td.com/centre/

Publication: P63X/EN M/A43 AREVA T&D's Automation & Information Systems Business www.areva-td.com T&D Worldwide Centre online 24 hours a day: +44 (0) 1785 25 00 70 http://www.areva-td.com/centre/